JP2016168443A - Slot machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a slot machine capable of causing a player to have an expectation for becoming an advantageous state even when the total number of points has a lower advantageous degree to the player.SOLUTION: In a slot machine where the more the total number of granted points increases, at the higher rate a control is made to an AT, as well as the more navigation stocks are granted, it is so configured that the number of granted points is reported accurately, or the number of points smaller than the number of granted points is reported, or no reporting is performed, and in the AT, a specific presentation is performed at a different ratio according to the number of residual navigation stocks.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 28

Description

  The present invention relates to, for example, a slot machine. Specifically, a variable display unit capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information, each of which can be identified, is provided. After the variable display unit is variably displayed, the display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit. The present invention also relates to a slot machine that can generate a prize according to the display result.

  A slot machine generally includes a variable display device having a plurality of (usually three) reels having a plurality of types of symbols as identification information drawn on the outer periphery, and each reel has a start lever by a player. Rotation is started by operating, and when the player operates a stop button provided corresponding to each reel, the rotation is stopped within a range of a predetermined maximum delay time from the operation timing. . A winning is generated according to the display result derived when the rotation of all reels is stopped.

  The types of winning combinations include small roles, special roles, and replaying roles. Here, in the winning of a small role, the player can obtain a profit that a predetermined number of medals are paid out for each type of small role. In the special role winning, the player can obtain a profit that the next game is shifted to a gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a regular bonus or a big bonus. In the winning of the re-gamer, it is possible to obtain a profit that the next game can be performed without consuming new medals for setting the number of bets.

  In order for winning of each combination to occur, generally, it is a condition that a winning is made by an internal lottery performed in advance (usually when the start lever is operated). In addition, the combination of symbols constituting the winning combination in the internal lottery is aligned with the effective line, and the combination of symbols configuring the winning combination not selected in the internal lottery is not aligned with the effective line. Reel control is performed.

JP 2001-190739 A

  An object of the present invention is to provide a slot machine conceived in view of the actual situation.

The slot machine of the present invention is
A variable display unit capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each capable of being identified,
After displaying the variable display unit in a variable manner, the display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and in a slot machine capable of generating a prize according to the display result,
A pre-determining means for deciding whether or not to allow a prize to be generated;
Delay control means for performing delay control for delaying the progress of the game over a delay period;
A privilege grant determining means for making a decision regarding grant of a privilege,
When it is determined by the predetermining means that the occurrence of a specific winning is permitted, the determination by the privilege grant determining means is performed, and when the delay control is performed by the delay control means, the delay control is performed. The degree of advantage of the determination by the privilege grant determination means is higher for the player than when there was not.

The slot machine may have the following configuration.
In the slot machine described above,
Derivation operation means operated by the player to derive the display result;
Derivation control means for performing control for deriving a display result in accordance with the determination result of the prior determination means and the operation of the derivation operation means;
Advantageous state control means for controlling the advantageous state advantageous to the player over a predetermined normal state;
Normal state control means for controlling to the normal state when an end display result that can be derived by the derivation control means is derived on the condition that the determination result of the prior determination means has become a specific result in the advantageous state When,
Notification period control means for controlling the notification period to notify predetermined information in accordance with the granted privilege;
On the condition that the notification period is controlled among the periods controlled to the advantageous state, when the determination result of the pre-decision means becomes the specific result, information on the specific result corresponding to the specific result is displayed. An informing means for informing,
The derivation control unit is configured to display the end display result when the determination result of the prior determination unit becomes the specific result and the derivation operation unit is operated in an end procedure corresponding to the specific result. When the derivation operation means is operated with an avoidance procedure different from the end procedure corresponding to the specific result, control for deriving a display result different from the end display result is performed.
The advantage of the determination regarding the grant of the privilege by the privilege grant determining means is higher when it is a period other than the notification period of the period controlled to the advantageous state than when it is in the normal state. The privilege granting is different between a period other than the notification period of the period controlled to the advantageous state and a period of the notification period of the period controlled to the advantageous state. The determination means determines the provision of the privilege.

Further, the slot machine may have the following configuration.
(1) A game can be started by setting the number of bets for one game, and the display result is derived to a variable display device capable of changing the display state, thereby completing one game. A slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a winning can be generated according to a display result of the variable display device,
Prior determination means (internal lottery processing) for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings before the display result is derived to the variable display device;
Derivation operation accepting means (stop switches 8L to 8R) for accepting an operation for deriving a display result from the variable display device;
Means for controlling the variable display device to derive a display result in accordance with a determination result of the prior determination means and an operation received by the derivation operation reception means, wherein the determination result of the prior determination means is a predetermined value; Result (winning for any of 9 winning combinations (1) to (9), winning for fall replay), an advantageous procedure determined in advance corresponding to the predetermined result (winning 9 When the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in the procedure for generating a winning combination and the procedure for avoiding the fall replay winning), the operation is performed by the derivation operation accepting means in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure. Derivation control means (reel rotation) for controlling to derive an advantageous display result (combination of 9 sheets, combination of replays) more advantageous to the player than the display result to be derived when Process, FIG. 8 (a) and reference),
Point granting means (see S101, S102 and S110 in FIG. 19) for giving points when a predetermined granting condition (point granting condition) is satisfied;
Storage means (RAM 91c) for storing point identifying information (given point total number) for identifying the granted points;
Notification conditions (FIG. 17 and FIG. 17) that differ in the degree of advantage for the player according to the amount of points (total number of points granted) specified from the point specifying information at a predetermined opportunity in the progress of the game (the first AT lottery condition is established). 18 is set, and the result information (navigation effect) corresponding to the predetermined result is notified when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes the predetermined result according to the notification condition. Notification period control means (first AT lottery process, AT management process executed by the sub-control unit 91) for controlling the notification period (AT, AT preparation mode, ART) to be performed;
As point information suggesting the amount of points awarded, accurate point information that can correctly identify the amount of points awarded, or a notification condition that is less advantageous to the player than the amount of points awarded is the notification. Point information notification means (see S104, S106, S108 in FIG. 19) for notifying inaccurate point information that can specify the amount of points set by the period control means;
In the notification period, an expected value of the number of games (for example, the remaining number of navigation stocks) that can be expected to be consumed before the notification period ends according to the notification condition set by the notification period control means. Depending on the ratio, the specific effects (B or C of the nine-effect navigation effect notification modes A to C shown in FIG. 28, the background of the ART effect shown in FIG. It is provided with effect execution means (navigation effect execution process executed by the sub-control unit 91, game state effect execution process) for executing the change at night and the modification (24).

  According to such a configuration, during the notification period during which the advantageous display result can be derived by intentionally operating the advantageous procedure when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes a predetermined result, the point specifying information is used. Control is performed according to notification conditions set so that the degree of advantage for the player differs according to the amount of points specified. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the amount of points is set for a notification condition with a high degree of advantage.

  In addition, as point information that suggests the amount of points given, there are accurate point information that can correctly identify the amount of points given, or notification conditions that are less advantageous for the player than the amount of points given. Inaccurate point information that can specify the amount of points set by the notification period control means is notified. For this reason, the player has a sense of expectation that the amount of points for which a notification condition that is highly advantageous to the player is set may be given, rather than the amount of points specified from the point information. You can make it. As a result, it is possible to have a greater sense of expectation than the amount of points specified from the notified point information for being controlled during the notification period. In addition, even when the amount of points for which a notification condition having a relatively low degree of advantage for the player is set is specified from the notified point information, the notification has a higher degree of advantage for the player than the amount of the point. Since the amount of points for which conditions are set may actually be given, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for being controlled during the notification period.

  Furthermore, in the notification period, the specific effect is executed based on a different ratio according to the expected number of games until the notification period ends. For this reason, the expectation with respect to the expected value of the number of games can be varied depending on the execution frequency of the specific effect during the notification period. As a result, in the notification period, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the specific effect is executed. In addition, even when the amount of points for which a notification condition having a relatively low degree of advantage for a player is set is specified from the notified point information, the expected number of games expected from the amount of points is determined. Can be estimated from the execution frequency of the specific performance, so that the expectation for being controlled during the notification period can be maintained, and an interesting game can be provided and the interest can be improved. Can do.

  Note that the expected value of the number of games, which is the number of games that can be expected to be consumed before the notification period ends according to the notification conditions set by the notification period control means, is, for example, (i) digested during the notification period. In the slot machine that terminates the control for the notification period on condition that the number of games has reached the determined number of finished games, the number of finished games (the number of games itself, or the number of Navistock that specifies the number of games) ( ii) A lottery is executed to determine whether or not to continue the notification period according to a predetermined continuation probability, and the continuation probability (AT continuation rate) in a slot machine that continues control to the notification period on condition that the lottery is won (Iii) The time when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes a predetermined result during the notification period and the corresponding result information is notified. There the specified number of times in the slot machine to terminate the control to the broadcasting period on condition that it has reached the specified number of times (navigation effect permitted number) may be an (see Modification (23)).

(2) When the determination result of the prior determination means becomes the predetermined result during the notification period, the effect execution means is preliminarily provided as an effect for specifying result information corresponding to the predetermined result. Including a result information effect executing means (navigation effect executing process executed by the sub-control unit 91) for executing any one of the result information effects determined in the type (informing modes A to C shown in FIG. 28);
The result information effect executing means, when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes the predetermined result in the notification period, a specific type of the plurality of types at a rate according to an expected value of the number of games. The result information effect (B or C among the nine-effect navigation effect notification modes A to C shown in FIG. 28) is executed as the specific effect.

  According to such a configuration, in the notification period, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the result information effect is executed in a specific type. In addition, an interesting game in which the expected value of the number of games is estimated from the frequency with which the result information effect is executed in a specific type can be provided, and the interest can be improved.

(3) In the notification period, the effect executing means provides a plurality of effects during the notification period (background is noon, evening, night) determined in advance as an effect (ART effect) indicating that control is performed in the notification period. Including an effect executing means (game state effect executing process executed by the sub-control unit 91) during the notification period for executing any of the above,
In the notification period, the notification execution means during the notification period sets the type of the notification period during the notification period at a rate corresponding to the expected value of the number of games. ) To the specific type is executed as the specific effect (see FIG. 32).

  According to such a configuration, in the notification period, it is possible to provide an interesting game in which an expected value of the number of games is estimated based on whether or not the effect during the notification period changes to a specific type. A player can be noticed as the production changes, and the interest can be improved.

(4) The point information notifying means notifies the accurate point information as point information indicating the amount of the given point for each point given when the granting condition is satisfied (notifying the granted point) Control determining means (S104 in FIG. 19) for determining whether or not
The notification determining means notifies the accurate point information about the points given when the grant condition is established before the point to be determined is given with a probability of determining to notify the accurate point information. The determination is made so as to differ depending on whether or not the determination is made (see FIGS. 22A and 22B).

  According to such a configuration, the probability of determining that accurate point information is to be notified for each of the points granted when the grant condition is established is determined before the grant condition is established before the point to be determined is given. It can be made different depending on whether or not it has already been decided to notify the accurate point information for the given point, that is, whether or not it has been decided not to notify the accurate point information. Thereby, depending on whether or not it is decided not to notify the accurate point information, the probability of determining that the accurate point information is notified for the points given after the point to be determined and the grant condition is established is changed. Can be made.

  In addition, the notification determination means described above notifies the accurate point information about the points given when the grant condition is established before the point to be determined is given, with the probability of determining to report the accurate point information. Then, the determination may be performed so that the time when it is not determined to notify the accurate point information is higher than when it is determined.

  In this case, when accurate point information is not determined to be reported (that is, accurate point information is notified) than when it is determined to notify accurate point information (that is, when accurate point information is not determined to be notified). Is determined to broadcast accurate point information with a high probability, it is determined that accurate point information will not be further reported, and the amount of points specified from the point information is actually given. It is possible to prevent the difference from the amount of the point that has been set from becoming too large and the reliability of the point information from being lowered too much.

(5) The point information notifying means notifies the accurate point information as point information indicating the amount of the given points for each of the points given when the granting condition is satisfied (notifying the given points). Control determining means (S106 in FIG. 19) for determining whether or not
The notification determining means performs the determination so that the probability of determining to notify the accurate point information differs according to the amount of points specified from the point information notified before the determination (FIG. 23 (a ), (B), etc., see modification (C)).

  According to such a configuration, the probability of determining that accurate point information is to be notified for each of the granted points when the grant condition is established depends on the amount of points specified from the point information notified before the determination. Can be different. Thereby, according to the amount of points specified from the notified point information, it is possible to change the probability of determining that accurate point information is to be notified for points given after the grant condition is established.

  In addition, the above-described notification determination means is more advantageous for the player than when the probability of determining to notify accurate point information is the predetermined amount of points specified from the point information notified before the determination. Even if the determination is made so that the probability that it is determined to notify the accurate point information is higher when the notification condition is lower than the predetermined amount when the notification condition is low Good.

  In this case, it is determined that the point information specified with the point information is the amount of points for which a notification condition having a low degree of advantage for the player is set, so that the accurate point information is notified with a higher probability. On the other hand, when the amount of points specified from the point information is the amount of points for which notification conditions that are less advantageous for the player are set, the player's attention to the notified point information is higher. Therefore, at a stage where the player's attention to the point information to be notified is high, a high percentage of expectation and sense of security corresponding to the amount of points given can be obtained by notifying accurate point information with a high probability. Can be held by a person.

(5 ′) The point information notifying means is a specific notification control (notification point) for notifying the point information capable of specifying the amount of the given point for each point given when the grant condition is established. Including notification determining means (S106 in FIG. 19) for determining whether or not to perform control for notifying
The notification determining means is configured such that the probability of determining to notify the accurate point information differs according to the amount of points given when the grant condition is established before the point to be determined is given. The determination is performed (see FIGS. 23A and 23B).

  According to such a configuration, the probability of determining that accurate point information is to be notified for each of the points granted when the grant condition is established is determined before the grant condition is established before the point to be determined is given. It can be varied depending on the amount of points awarded. Thereby, according to the amount of the granted points, it is possible to change the probability of determining that accurate point information is to be notified for points granted after the grant condition is established.

  In addition, the notification determination means described above has a predetermined amount of points that are given when the grant condition is established before the point to be determined is given. As the amount of points for which a notification condition having a lower degree of advantage for the player than a certain amount is set is more likely to be determined to notify accurate point information than when it is the predetermined amount, The determination may be made.

  In this case, it is determined that the more accurate point information is notified with a higher probability as the amount of points given is the amount of points for which the notification condition having a lower degree of advantage for the player is set. On the other hand, the more the amount of points given is the amount of points for which notification conditions that are less advantageous to the player are set, the higher the player's attention to the notified point information. Therefore, at a stage where the player's attention to the point information to be notified is high, a high percentage of expectation and sense of security corresponding to the amount of points given can be obtained by notifying accurate point information with a high probability. Can be held by a person.

(6) Special gaming state control means for controlling to a special gaming state (bonus) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined normal state when a special winning (big bonus, regular bonus) occurs among the plurality of types of winnings (A process for controlling a bonus corresponding to when a big bonus or a regular bonus is won)
The grant condition may be satisfied during a period in which the special gaming state is controlled (see FIG. 20B).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to have a greater expectation for being controlled to the special game state, and to improve the interest of the game during the special game state.

(7) The game can be started by setting the number of bets for one game, and the display result is derived to the variable display device capable of changing the display state, whereby one game is ended. A slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a winning can be generated according to a display result of the variable display device,
Prior determination means (internal lottery processing) for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings before the display result is derived to the variable display device;
Derivation operation accepting means (stop switches 8L to 8R) for accepting an operation for deriving a display result from the variable display device;
Derivation control means (reel rotation processing) for performing control to cause the variable display device to derive a display result in accordance with a determination result of the prior determination means and an operation received by the derivation operation reception means;
Advantageous state control means for controlling to an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined normal state (processing for controlling to RT when a special event stops in the preparation mode);
The type of the specific result on condition that the determination result of the pre-determining means is one of a plurality of types of specific results in the advantageous state (replay + fall replay win, replay + fall replay + BAR replay win) Regardless of whether or not an end display result (falling replay) that can be derived by the derivation control means is derived, normal state control means for controlling the normal state (to control to the normal gaming state when the falling replay wins) Processing)
Point granting means (see S101, S102 and S110 in FIG. 19) for giving points when a predetermined granting condition (point granting condition) is satisfied;
Storage means (RAM 91c) for storing point identifying information (given point total number) for identifying the granted points;
A notification period for notifying predetermined information (navigation effect) according to the amount of points specified (total number of points granted) from the point specifying information at a predetermined opportunity (satisfaction of the first AT lottery is established) in the progress of the game The notification condition (see the winning rate shown in FIGS. 17 and 18) is set so that at least one of the ratio controlled by (AT) and the expected value for the length controlled in the notification period is different, and the notification condition In accordance with the notification period control means (first AT lottery process, AT management process executed by the sub-control unit 91),
An informing means for informing information (a navigation effect execution process executed by the sub-control unit 91),
The derivation control means includes
When the determination result of the prior determination unit is one of the plurality of types of specific results, and when the operation is received by the derivation operation reception unit in an end procedure corresponding to the type of the specific results, Control for deriving the end display result is performed, and when an operation is accepted by the deriving operation accepting unit in an avoidance procedure different from the end procedure corresponding to the type of the specific result, a display result different from the end display result is derived. Control (see FIG. 8A),
When the determination result of the pre-decision means becomes one of a plurality of types of special results (when one of the 9-sheet combination (1) to 9-sheet combination (9) is won), and the type of the special result When the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting unit in the advantageous procedure corresponding to the display, the display is derived when the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting unit in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure corresponding to the type of the special result. Control to derive an advantageous display result that is more advantageous to the player than the result (refer to reel control at the time of winning one of the nine winning combinations (1) to nine winning combinations (9)),
The notification means includes
When the determination result of the prior determination means becomes one of the plurality of types of specific results in the advantageous state, the specific result time information (falling) corresponding to the type of the specific results is provided on the condition that it is the notification period. At the time of replay winning, we will inform you of the navigation effect according to the type of replay that is won simultaneously,
When the determination result of the pre-determining means in the advantageous state is one of the plurality of types of special results, it corresponds to the type of the special results according to a predetermined ratio regardless of whether or not the notification period. The special result time information is notified (see FIGS. 29 and 30).

  According to such a configuration, in the notification period of the period controlled to the advantageous state, when the determination result of the prior determination unit becomes one of a plurality of types of specific results, the type of the specific result is supported. Since the specific result time information is notified, it is possible to operate in the avoidance procedure so as not to derive the end display result. Therefore, when it is controlled to be in an advantageous state, it can be expected to be controlled during the notification period.

  In such a notification period, at least one of the ratio controlled in the notification period and the expected value for the length controlled in the notification period differs according to the amount of points specified from the point specifying information. Control is performed according to the set notification conditions. Therefore, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that the amount of points is set at a notification condition with a high ratio controlled during the notification period or a notification condition with a large expectation value for the length controlled during the notification period.

  Further, when the determination result of the predetermining means becomes one of a plurality of types of special results when controlled to the advantageous state, the special results are determined according to a predetermined ratio regardless of whether or not the notification period. Information on special result corresponding to the type is notified. For this reason, even when it is not controlled during the notification period, during the period controlled in the advantageous state, when the determination result of the predetermining means becomes one of a plurality of special results, the advantageous display is performed at a predetermined ratio. An advantageous procedure can be used to derive the results. As a result, the amount of points assigned is not controlled in the notification period because the amount of points that are controlled in the notification period is high, and the amount of points given is not controlled in the notification period. Reducing discomfort that the player has for the fact that the notification period has ended in a relatively short period instead of the amount of points for which a notification condition with a large expected value for the controlled length is set. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that drastically lowers the interest of the game.

(8) A game can be started by setting the number of bets for one game, and the display result is derived to a variable display device capable of changing the display state, whereby one game is completed. A slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a winning can be generated according to a display result of the variable display device,
Prior determination means (internal lottery processing) for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings before the display result is derived to the variable display device;
Derivation operation accepting means (stop switches 8L to 8R) for accepting an operation for deriving a display result from the variable display device;
Derivation control means (reel rotation processing) for performing control to cause the variable display device to derive a display result in accordance with a determination result of the prior determination means and an operation received by the derivation operation reception means;
Advantageous state control means for controlling to an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined normal state (processing for controlling to RT when a special event stops in the preparation mode);
The type of the specific result on condition that the determination result of the pre-determining means is one of a plurality of types of specific results in the advantageous state (replay + fall replay win, replay + fall replay + BAR replay win) Regardless of whether or not an end display result (falling replay) that can be derived by the derivation control means is derived, normal state control means for controlling the normal state (to control to the normal gaming state when the falling replay wins) Processing)
Point granting means (see S101, S102 and S110 in FIG. 19) for giving points when a predetermined granting condition (point granting condition) is satisfied;
Storage means (RAM 91c) for storing point identifying information (given point total number) for identifying the granted points;
Notification conditions (see FIG. 5) that the degree of advantage for the player differs according to the amount of points (total number of points granted) specified from the point specifying information at a predetermined opportunity in the progress of the game (the first AT lottery condition is established). 17 and the winning rate reference shown in FIG. 18), and a notification period control means (first AT lottery process executed by the sub-control unit 91, AT management) for controlling the notification period to notify predetermined information according to the notification condition Processing) and
When the determination result of the prior determination means becomes one of the plurality of types of specific results in the advantageous state, on the condition that the notification period is within the period controlled to the advantageous state, A notification means (navigation effect execution process executed by the sub-control unit 91) for notifying the specific result time information corresponding to the type of result,
The derivation control means is when the determination result of the prior determination means is one of the plurality of types of specific results, and is operated by the derivation operation receiving means in an end procedure corresponding to the type of the specific results. When accepted, it performs control for deriving the end display result, and when the operation is accepted by the deriving operation accepting means in an avoidance procedure different from the end procedure corresponding to the type of the specific result, Control to derive different display results (see FIG. 8A),
The notification period control means, when a predetermined notification promotion condition different from the provision condition is satisfied, even if the amount of points specified from the point specifying information at the predetermined opportunity is the same, The notification condition is set so that the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the notification promotion condition is not satisfied (see FIG. 27).

  According to such a configuration, in the notification period of the period controlled to the advantageous state, when the determination result of the prior determination unit becomes one of a plurality of types of specific results, the type of the specific result is supported. Since the specific result time information is notified, it is possible to operate in the avoidance procedure so as not to derive the end display result. Therefore, when it is controlled to be in an advantageous state, it can be expected to be controlled during the notification period.

  In such a notification period, control is performed according to notification conditions set so that the degree of advantage for the player differs according to the amount of points specified from the point specifying information. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the amount of points is set for a notification condition that is advantageous to the player.

  Further, when a predetermined notification promotion condition different from the provision condition is satisfied, the notification condition is set so that the player has a higher degree of advantage than when the notification promotion condition is not satisfied. For this reason, even when the amount of points given is not the amount of points for which a notification condition having a high degree of advantage for the player is set, the notification period is controlled so that the notification period is established. The player can have a sense of expectation for this.

(9-a) The notification period control means described above allows the notification condition so that the degree of advantage for the player is higher when the amount of points specified from the point specifying information is larger than when the amount of points is small. (See FIGS. 17 and 18)
The point information notifying means notifies accurate point information that can correctly specify the amount of assigned points, or inaccurate point information that can specify the amount of points smaller than the amount of assigned points (FIG. 22). , See FIG. 23).

  In this case, the player can have a sense of expectation that a larger amount of points may be given than the amount of points specified from the point information. As a result, it is possible to have a greater sense of expectation than the amount of points specified from the notified point information for being controlled during the notification period. In addition, even when a relatively small amount of points is identified from the notified point information, since the amount of points larger than the amount of points may actually be given, Expectation to be controlled can be maintained.

(9-b) The notification period control means described above is configured so that the notification condition control means increases the degree of advantage for the player when the amount of points specified from the point specifying information is smaller than when the amount of points is large. Set
The point information notifying means is for notifying accurate point information that can specify the amount of given points, or inaccurate point information that can specify the amount of points larger than the amount of given points. (Refer to Modification (I)).

  In this case, the player can have a sense of expectation that the amount of points actually given may be smaller than the amount of points specified from the point information. As a result, it is possible to have a greater sense of expectation than the amount of points specified from the notified point information for being controlled during the notification period. In addition, even when a relatively large amount of points is specified from the notified point information, the amount of points actually given may be less than the amount of points, so control is performed during the notification period. Can maintain a sense of expectation for what is being done.

  (9-c) The point information notifying means is accurate point information that can correctly specify the amount of the given points on the condition that the points are given by the point granting means when the granting conditions are satisfied. Alternatively, even if the notification condition that is less advantageous for the player than the amount of points given is to notify inaccurate point information that can specify the amount of points set by the notification period control means Good.

  In this case, the expectation to be controlled during the notification period can be changed stepwise according to the amount of points specified from the point information notified each time points are given by the point granting means. it can. In addition, it is possible to add an interest that the player himself calculates and stores the total amount of points up to now from the point information notified each time points are given by the point giving means.

  (9-d) When the point information notifying unit is awarded a point by the point granting unit in accordance with the establishment of the granting condition, the point information notifying unit determines the amount of the given correct point until the granting condition is met. Point information that can specify the total amount added to the amount of points specified from the notified point information, or a notification condition that is less advantageous to the player than the amount of the given points is provided by the notification period control means You may alert | report the point information which can identify | isolate the total amount which added the amount of inaccurate points set to the amount of points specified from the point information alert | reported until the said grant conditions were satisfied.

  In this case, in accordance with the total amount of points specified from the point information notified each time points are given by the point giving means, the expectation for being controlled during the notification period is changed stepwise. Can do. In addition, the player can easily recognize the total amount of the notified points.

  (9-e) The notification condition may be a condition related to the control for the notification period. The notification condition may be, for example, a condition related to whether or not to start the notification period. More specifically, the notification condition relating to whether or not to start the notification period is (a) determined to control to the notification period in the slot machine that controls to the notification period on condition that it is determined to control to the notification period. (I) a ratio for determining the number of games reached until the control to the notification period is started in the slot machine that is controlled in the notification period on condition that the number of games reached has reached the determined number of reached games; (C) Notification in the slot machine that controls during the notification period on condition that the number of advantageous procedures from which the advantageous display result has been derived when the determination result of the predetermining means becomes a predetermined result has reached the determined number of arrivals It may be a ratio that determines the number of times of arrival until the control to the period is started (see the modification (18)).

  In the case of (a) above, the notification period control is performed so that the degree of advantage for the player increases as the amount of points specified from the point specifying information increases (for example, the more points are provided). The means sets notification conditions that are determined to be controlled during the notification period at a high rate (for example, refer to the winning rate of “0-2” and the winning rate of “6-9” in FIG. 17). In the case of (b), the notification period control is performed so that the degree of advantage for the player increases as the amount of points specified from the point specifying information increases (for example, the more points are provided). The means sets a notification condition for determining a smaller number of reached games at a high rate (see Modification (18)). In the case of the above (c), the notification period control is performed so that the degree of advantage for the player increases as the amount of points specified from the point specifying information increases (for example, as the number of points increases). The means sets a notification condition for determining a smaller number of arrivals at a high rate (see Modification (18)).

  Further, the notification condition may be, for example, a condition related to a period controlled in the notification period. More specifically, the notification condition related to the period to be controlled in the notification period is (d) control on the notification period on condition that the number of games digested in the notification period has reached the determined end game number. The ratio of determining the number of end games in the slot machine to be ended, (e) The end lottery is executed according to the end probability determined in advance in the notification period, and the control to the notification period is performed on condition that the winning in the end lottery is won. The ratio for determining the termination probability in the slot machine to be terminated, (f) The notification on condition that the determination result of the predetermination means becomes a predetermined result in the notification period and the corresponding result information has been notified reaches the specified number of times. The ratio may be a ratio for determining the specified number of times in the slot machine that finishes controlling the period (see the modification (18)).

  In the case of (d), the notification period control is performed so that the degree of advantage for the player increases as the amount of points specified from the point specifying information increases (for example, as the number of points increases). The means sets a notification condition for determining a larger number of finished games at a high rate (see, for example, a winning rate of “0-2” and a winning rate of “6-9” in FIG. 17). In the case of the above (e), the notification period control is performed so that the degree of advantage for the player increases as the amount of points specified from the point specifying information increases (for example, as the number of points increases). The means sets a notification condition for determining a lower end probability at a high rate (see Modification (18)). In the case of (f), the notification period control is performed so that the degree of advantage for the player increases as the amount of points specified from the point specifying information increases (for example, the more points are provided). A means sets the alerting | reporting conditions which determine the more specified frequency | count with a high ratio (refer modification (18)).

  In addition, the notification condition is, for example, (g) a slot in which whether or not to notify corresponding result information when the determination result of the pre-determining means becomes a predetermined result during the notification period, and which is notified when winning is determined. It may be the ratio that determines the winning probability in the machine. In the case of the above (ki), the notification period control is performed so that the degree of advantage for the player increases as the amount of points specified from the point specifying information increases (for example, as the number of points increases). The means sets a notification condition for determining a higher winning probability at a high rate (see Modification (18)).

  The notification condition may be any of the above (a) to (ki), or may be selectively combined among the above (a) to (ki). Even if the notification condition is any one of the above (a) to (ki) or selectively combined, the amount of points specified from the point specifying information is higher as the player is more advantageous (for example, Since the notification condition is set so that the degree of advantage for the player becomes higher as the number of points increases, the player can advance the game while expecting it, and can improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the slot machine that adopts (b) or (c) as the notification condition, it can be derived when the determination result of the predetermining means becomes a specific result among the predetermined results according to the notification condition. When a predetermined end display result is derived, control is performed during an out-of-period notification enabling period for notifying the result information corresponding to the specific result, except for the notification period of the period controlled to the gaming state that can be in the normal state. A non-period notification possible period control means,
Provided with a non-period notification means for notifying the result information corresponding to the specified result when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes the specified result on condition that the notification period is outside the period. In this case, the notification condition related to whether or not to start the notification period may further include technical matters described below.

  As notification conditions related to whether or not to start the notification period, (h) notification outside the period can be made on condition that the number of games digested in the out-of-period notification period has reached the determined number of out-of-period end games Execute out-of-period end lottery according to the ratio of determining the out-of-period end game in the slot machine that ends the control to the period, and the predetermined out-of-period end probability in the out-of-period notification possible period. The ratio of determining the end-of-period end probability in the slot machine that finishes the control to the out-of-period notification period on condition that the lottery has been won, As a condition that the number of times the corresponding result information has been notified has reached the specified number of times outside the period, the control to end the control period outside the period is terminated. Good rate, be an determining the period out prescribed number of times in Ttomashin (see Modification (19)).

  In the case of the above (ku), the notification period control is performed so that the degree of advantage for the player increases as the amount of points specified from the point specifying information increases as the degree of advantage for the player increases (for example, as the number of points increases). The means sets a notification condition for determining a larger number of out-of-period end games at a high rate (see Modification (19)). In the case of the above (K), the notification period control is performed so that the degree of advantage for the player increases as the amount of points specified from the point specifying information increases (for example, as the number of points increases). The means sets a notification condition for determining a lower out-of-period termination probability at a high rate (see Modification (19)). In the case of (co), the notification period control is performed so that the degree of advantage for the player increases as the amount of points specified from the point specifying information increases (for example, the more points there are). The means sets a notification condition for determining a larger number of out-of-period prescribed times at a high rate (see Modification (19)).

  In addition, the notification condition is, for example, lottery whether or not to notify corresponding result information when the determination result of the pre-determining means becomes a specific result in the (non-) notifiable period, and notifies when winning. In the slot machine, the ratio for determining the winning probability may be used. In the case of (S), the notification period control is performed so that the degree of advantage for the player increases as the amount of points specified from the point specifying information increases (for example, the more points are provided). The means sets a notification condition for determining a higher winning probability at a high rate (see Modification (19)).

  The notification condition in the slot machine including the non-period notification possible period control means and the non-period notification means may be any of the above (a) to (ki) and the above (ku) to (sa), Moreover, what was selectively combined among said (a)-(ki) and said (ku)-(sa) may be sufficient. Even if the notification condition is any one of the above (A) to (K) and the above (K) to (S), or selectively combined, the amount of points specified from the point specifying information is a game. Since the notification condition is set so that the higher the degree of advantage for the player (for example, the more points), the higher the degree of advantage for the player, the player can proceed with the game with a sense of expectation. Can improve the interest of

  (9-f) When the determination result of the prior determination means is a predetermined result, and the operation is received by the derivation operation reception means according to an advantageous procedure that is determined in advance corresponding to the predetermined result The advantageous display result derived in (i) is more than the display result (hereinafter also referred to as the non-advantageous display result) derived when the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting unit in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure. ) A point that a player acquires a lot of game value (medals), (ii) a point that is controlled in a game state advantageous in the game after the game, or (iii) a game state that is disadvantageous in the game after the game The display result may be a display result that increases the degree of advantage for the player at least at any point that is not controlled (see Modification (O)).

  Furthermore, when the procedure for deriving the advantageous display result at the three points (i) to (iii) is different, the three points (i) to (iii) may be comprehensively determined.

  In other words, the advantage display result is more advantageous for the player than the non-advantage display result is that the game value acquired by the player in the game in which the determination result of the predetermining means is a predetermined result is more than the advantage display result. There are more non-advantageous display results, and even if a loss occurs due to the advantageous display results compared to the non-advantageous display results, it becomes an advantageous display result and is controlled to an advantageous gaming state thereafter. As a result, it is a case where the player acquires a gaming value equal to or greater than the loss compared to the case where the gaming state is not controlled to be advantageous.

  Further, the advantage display result is more advantageous for the player than the non-advantage display result. The game value acquired by the player in the game in which the determination result of the predetermining means is a predetermined result is higher than the advantage display result. There are more non-advantageous display results, and even if there is a loss due to the advantageous display results compared to the non-advantageous display results, control to an unfavorable gaming state without resulting in non-advantageous display results As a result, the player obtains a gaming value that is greater than or equal to the loss compared to when the gaming state is controlled to be disadvantageous.

  In addition, the advantage display result is more advantageous to the player than the non-advantageous display result is that the player after the non-advantageous display result is more advantageous than the game state after the advantageous display result. The game value that the player acquires in the game is large even if there is a loss after the advantageous display result as compared to the non-advantageous display result. This is a case where the player obtains a game value in the game that is equal to or more than the loss that will occur after that in comparison with the case where the non-advantageous display result is greater than the non-advantageous display result.

  Further, the derivation control means described above is operated by the derivation operation accepting means in an advantageous procedure determined in advance corresponding to the predetermined result when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes a predetermined result. If it is accepted, if the control for deriving the display result is greater than that when the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure, a control with a higher degree of advantage for the player is performed. Good (see modification (O)).

  In addition, the derivation control means performs control for deriving an advantageous display result when an operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in an advantageous procedure, and the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure. It is also possible to perform control so that the advantageous display result is not derived at the time.

  In addition, the derivation control means performs control so that the non-advantageous display result is not derived when the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in the advantageous procedure, and the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure. It is also possible to perform a control for deriving a non-advantageous display result when given.

  Further, the derivation control means derives an advantageous display result when an operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in an advantageous procedure than when an operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure. You may control so that a ratio may become high.

  In addition, the above derivation control means derives a non-advantageous display result when an operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in an advantageous procedure than when an operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure. It is also possible to perform control so that the ratio is lower.

More specifically, the following control may be performed.
(9-f-1) Control is performed to derive a non-advantageous display result when an operation is accepted in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure corresponding to the predetermined result, and the operation is accepted in the advantageous procedure corresponding to the predetermined result. Control may be made to derive an advantageous display result to which more game values (medals) are given (paid out) than when the non-advantageous display result is derived (variation (O-1)) reference). As a result, in a game in which the determination result of the pre-decision means is a predetermined result, the game value that the player obtains when operated by an advantageous procedure than when operated by a procedure different from the advantageous procedure It can be said that the degree of advantage for the player increases in terms of increase in the number of players.

    (9-f-2) Control is performed to derive a non-advantageous display result when an operation is accepted in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure corresponding to the predetermined result, and the operation is accepted in an advantageous procedure corresponding to the predetermined result. Control may be performed to derive an advantageous display result that is more advantageous to the player than the state after the non-advantageous display result is derived (see Modification (O-2)). .

  More specifically, for example, in a predetermined gaming state, when an operation is accepted in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure corresponding to the predetermined result, control is performed to derive a non-advantageous display result that does not involve a transition of the gaming state. When an operation is accepted according to an advantageous procedure corresponding to a predetermined result, an advantageous display result with a transition to a gaming state (for example, RT) more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state is derived. It is also possible to perform control (see Modification (O-2)). In this case, there is no limitation on the game value that the player acquires when the non-advantageous display result is derived and the game value that the player acquires when the advantageous display result is derived. As a result, apart from the degree of advantage in the game in which the determination result of the pre-decision means becomes a predetermined result, the time when operated by the advantageous procedure is more appropriate than when the operation is operated by a procedure different from the advantageous procedure. In the game after the game, it can be said that the degree of advantage for the player is high in that the game state is controlled to be advantageous.

  In addition, for example, in a predetermined gaming state, when an operation is accepted in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure corresponding to the predetermined result, the gaming state (for example, disadvantageous RT) is more disadvantageous for the player than the predetermined gaming state. Control to derive non-advantageous display results with transition, and control to derive advantageous display results without transition of gaming state when an operation is accepted by an advantageous procedure corresponding to a predetermined result (See Modification (O-2)). In this case, the game value that the player acquires when the non-advantageous display result is derived and the game value that the player acquires when the advantageous display result is derived are not important. As a result, apart from the degree of advantage in the game in which the determination result of the pre-decision means becomes a predetermined result, the time when operated by the advantageous procedure is more appropriate than when the operation is operated by a procedure different from the advantageous procedure. It can be said that the degree of advantage for the player is high in that it is not controlled to a disadvantageous gaming state in the game after the game.

    (9-f-3) When the operation is accepted in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure corresponding to the predetermined result, control is performed to derive the advantageous display result at a predetermined non-advantage rate, and the advantageous procedure corresponding to the predetermined result When the operation is accepted, control for deriving an advantageous display result at a predetermined advantageous rate higher than a predetermined non-advantageous rate may be performed (see Modification (O-3)). The advantageous display result may be the advantageous display result shown in (9-f-1) and (9-f-2). As a result, when the determination result of the pre-decision means becomes a predetermined result, the player is acquired at a higher rate when operated by the advantageous procedure than when operated by a procedure different from the advantageous procedure. The degree of advantage for the player in that at least one of the following points increases the gaming value, is controlled to an advantageous gaming state in the game after the game, or is not controlled to an unfavorable gaming state in the game after the game Can be said to be high.

  Further, when an operation is accepted in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure corresponding to the predetermined result, a control for deriving a winning display result accompanied with a predetermined non-advantageous amount of game value given at a predetermined non-advantageous ratio is performed. Performing a control for deriving a winning display result accompanied by a predetermined advantageous amount of game value given at a predetermined advantageous rate when an operation is accepted by an advantageous procedure corresponding to the predetermined result; and Non-advantageous proportion, non-advantageous amount, advantageous proportion, and advantageous amount may satisfy the relationship of (advantageous proportion) × (advantageous amount)> (non-advantageous proportion) × (non-advantageous amount) (variation (O -3)). As a result, when the determination result of the pre-decision means becomes a predetermined result, the game value obtained by the player is greater when operated by the advantageous procedure than when operated by a procedure different from the advantageous procedure. It can be said that the degree of advantage for the player increases in that the expected value of the amount increases.

  (9-g) The notification period control means described above is a length (navigation stock number, predetermined game number) that is uniquely specified from the amount of points specified from the point specifying information at a predetermined opportunity in the progress of the game. It may be controlled to a notification period in which predetermined information is notified over a period of digestion, a period in which navigation effects are executed a predetermined number of times, and the like (see Modification (P)). For example, the notification period control means may control the notification period longer when the amount of points specified from the point specifying information is larger than when the amount of points specified is small, or for the point specifying Control may be performed for the notification period longer when the amount of points specified from the information is smaller than when the amount of points is large. Even when configured in this way, the same effects as described above are obtained.

(10) The awarding condition is a predetermined point granting lottery (a predetermined lottery executed when a melon is won in a case other than a bonus and in a high probability state, and executed when a melon is won during a bonus. Established (see the predetermined lottery) (see FIGS. 20A and 20B),
The notification period control means sets the notification condition so that the degree of advantage for the player is higher when the amount of given points is larger than when the amount of points is small (see FIGS. 17 and 18).
Even when the point specifying information is stored according to the fact that the point specifying information is stored in response to the winning in the point giving lottery and the point being given (S102 in FIG. 19), the point information notifying means The same control as when no points are awarded and points are not given (when it is determined not to notify in S104 and S106 in FIG. 19, NO is determined in S107 and the processes in S108 and S109 are not performed). Thus, point information that can specify the amount of points smaller than the amount of given points is notified (see FIG. 19).

  According to such a configuration, even when the same control as when no points are given is performed, the player actually has a sense of expectation that the points are awarded in the point giving lottery. And can enhance the fun of the game.

  Note that the same control as when no points were awarded in the point grant lottery means that when the configuration of (9-c) above is provided, point information is obtained due to the establishment of the present grant condition. This refers to control that does not notify, and in the case of having the configuration (9-d), the point information that can specify the amount of points specified from the point information that has been notified until the present grant condition is satisfied is continuously notified. Control to do.

(10 ') The given condition is a predetermined point granting lottery (a predetermined lottery executed when a melon is won in a case other than a bonus and in a high probability state, executed when a melon is won during a bonus. Is established when winning in a predetermined lottery) (see FIGS. 20A and 20B),
The notification period control means sets the notification condition so that the degree of advantage for the player is higher when the amount of given points is smaller than when the amount of points is large,
Even if the point information notifying means does not win in the point giving lottery and no points are given, by performing the same control as in the case of winning points in the point giving lottery, The point information that can specify the amount of the more points may be notified (see Modification (I)).

  According to such a configuration, even when the same control as when the points are given is performed, the player has a sense of expectation that the points are not actually awarded in the point giving lottery and the points are not given. And can enhance the fun of the game.

  In addition, in the point grant lottery, the same control as when the winning points are awarded means that the point information corresponding to a predetermined amount of points is provided regardless of the establishment of the grant condition when the configuration of (9-c) is provided. This refers to the control to notify, and when the configuration of (9-d) is provided, it is possible to specify point information that can specify the total amount obtained by adding a predetermined amount of points to the amount of points specified from the already notified point information This is a control to update to point information.

(11) The point giving means determines the number of points to be given (see S102 in FIG. 19 and FIG. 21),
The notification period control means sets the notification condition so that the degree of advantage for the player is higher when the amount of given points is larger than when the amount of points is small (see FIGS. 17 and 18).
The point information notifying means performs the same control as when the amount of points smaller than the amount of points to be given is given even when the point specifying information is stored according to the amount of points to be given. (When S104 and S106 in FIG. 19 are determined to be a small number of notification points, the process of S108 is performed as if the determined points were given), so that the amount of given points is larger than the given points. Point information capable of specifying a small amount of points is notified (see FIG. 19).

  According to such a configuration, even when the same control is performed as when only a small number of points are given, the player can have a sense of expectation that more points are actually given. Can improve the interest of the game.

  Note that the same control as when the amount of points less than the amount of points to be given is given when the provision condition (9-c) is provided, due to the establishment of the present grant condition. Control that reports point information that can specify the amount of points that is smaller than the amount of points. If the configuration of (9-d) is provided, specify from the point information that has been notified until the present grant condition is satisfied. This refers to control for informing point information capable of specifying the total amount obtained by adding the amount of points to the amount of points added to the amount of points less than the amount of points granted due to the establishment of the current granting condition.

(11 ′) The point giving means determines the number of points to be given (see S102 in FIG. 19, FIG. 21),
The notification period control means sets the notification condition so that the degree of advantage for the player is higher when the amount of given points is smaller than when the amount of points is large,
The point information notification means performs the same control as when a point amount larger than the point amount is given even when the point specifying information is stored according to the point amount to be given. By this, you may alert | report the point information which can specify the amount of points larger than the amount of the provided points (refer modification (I)).

  According to such a configuration, even when the same control is performed as when many points are awarded, the player has a sense of expectation that less points or points are not actually given. And can improve the fun of the game.

  Note that the same control as when the amount of points greater than the amount of points given is granted is given due to the establishment of the present granting condition when the configuration of (9-c) is provided. Control for notifying the point information that can specify the amount of points larger than the amount of points obtained, and in the case of having the above configuration (9-d), from the point information notified until the present grant condition is satisfied. This refers to control for notifying point information that can specify a total amount obtained by adding a point amount greater than the amount of points given due to the establishment of the current granting condition to the amount of specified points.

(12) Special gaming state control means (when a big bonus or a regular bonus is won) that controls to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined normal state when a special winning among the plurality of types of winnings occurs Process to control the bonus corresponding to)
Preparation state control means for controlling to a predetermined preparation state when the special gaming state ends (processing for controlling to the preparation mode after the bonus ends);
Advantageous state control means for controlling the player to an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state and the ready state when a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied in the ready state (when the special event stops in the preparation mode) Processing for controlling to RT), and
On the condition that the determination result of the pre-determining means in the preparation state or the advantageous state is a specific result (at the time of replay + falling replay winning, replay + falling replay + BAR replay winning) among the predetermined results When an end display result (falling replay) that can be derived by the derivation control means is derived, normal state control means for controlling to the normal state (processing for controlling to the normal gaming state when the falling replay wins); With
The derivation control means is when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes the specific result, and when the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in an advantageous procedure corresponding to the specific result, the ending control means Control is performed to derive a display result different from the display result as the advantageous display result, and when the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting unit in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure corresponding to the specific result, the end display result is derived. Control (see FIG. 8A),
The result information notifying means determines that the determination result of the prior determining means is the specified condition on condition that it is the notification period (AT preparation mode, ART) of the period controlled to the preparation state or the advantageous state. When the result is obtained, the result information corresponding to the specific result (navigation effect according to the type of replay that is simultaneously won at the time of falling replay win) is notified (navigation effect executed by the sub-control unit 91) Execution process).

  According to such a configuration, after the special gaming state is finished, it is controlled to the ready state, and if the advantageous condition is satisfied in the ready state, the advantageous state is controlled, and the end display result is derived in the ready state. Then, the normal state is controlled. For this reason, when the advantageous condition is established before the end display result is derived in the preparatory state after the special gaming state, the advantageous state is controlled.

  The end display result that prevents the transition from the ready state to the advantageous state is not derived when the determination result of the predetermining means becomes the specific result, and is operated in the advantageous procedure corresponding to the specific result, Derived when operated in different procedures.

  Further, in the notification period of the period controlled to the preparation state, when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes the specific result, result information corresponding to the specific result is notified.

  As described above, the gaming state in the previous stage of the advantageous state is controlled to the ready state, and the advantageous state is controlled when the advantageous condition is satisfied before the end display result is derived in the ready state. In this preparatory state, when controlled during the notification period, by operating in an advantageous procedure based on the result information corresponding to the specific result to be notified, while avoiding the intentionally derived end display result, The game can proceed while waiting for the favorable conditions to be established. On the other hand, when the notification period is not controlled even in the preparation state, the result information corresponding to the specific result is not notified by the notification means, so that it is not possible to avoid intentionally deriving the end display result. There is an increased possibility that the end display result is derived before the advantageous condition is satisfied and the normal state is controlled without being controlled to the advantageous state. As a result, it is possible to give a clear degree of advantage to the player depending on whether or not it is controlled during the notification period in the preparation state that is the pre-stage of the advantageous state, and the expectation for being controlled during the notification period is effective. And can enhance the interest of the game.

  Similarly, even in the advantageous state, during the notification period, when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes a specific result, result information corresponding to the specific result is notified. For this reason, in the notification period among the periods controlled to be in an advantageous state, by operating in an advantageous procedure based on the notified result information, the end display result is intentionally avoided and Control can be continued in an advantageous state. On the other hand, it is not possible to avoid intentionally deriving the end display result during periods other than the notification period among the periods controlled to the advantageous state, and the end display result is derived and controlled to the normal state. The possibility that it will end up increases. As a result, it is possible to give a clear degree of advantage to the player depending on whether or not it is controlled during the notification period in the advantageous state, effectively increasing the expectation for being controlled during the notification period, and enhancing the interest of the game. Can be improved.

  The slot machine described above may be a slot machine further provided with a configuration listed below.

(A) derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving the display result of the variable display device;
Derivation control means (reel rotation processing) for controlling the variable display device to derive a display result in accordance with a determination result of the prior determination means and an operation procedure of the derivation operation means;
A game value giving means (payout process) for giving a predetermined amount of game value to a player when an award of a plurality of types of winnings occurs;
The notification means can specify a procedure (including operation timing, operation order, etc.) for deriving a winning that is allowed to be generated by the prior determination means, on condition that the notification means is controlled. Perform procedure notification control to notify the player of such information,
The advantageous state control means does not end the existence state by allowing the occurrence of the special prize in the advantageous state,
The notification means performs the procedure notification control from the predetermined timing after being controlled to the advantageous state until the set notification period (number of AT continuing games during AT) elapses,
In the advantageous state, the expected value of the amount of gaming value given by the gaming value granting means per game in the advantageous state is a procedure specified from the information notified by the procedure notification means when it is within the notification period. When the derivation operation means is operated, the amount of game value used for setting the bet number is increased, and when it is outside the notification period, the amount of game value used for setting the bet number is larger. (Refer to Modification (14)).

  According to such a configuration, the expected value of the amount of gaming value given when the player is in an advantageous state and within the notification period can be obtained by operating the bet number by operating the procedure specified from the notified information. More than the amount of gaming value used for setting. Further, the advantageous state continues at least as long as no special prize is generated. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that the advantageous state ends before the notification period elapses when the player performs a stop operation in a procedure that does not lead to the special winning. As a result, the player does not generate a special prize and performs a stop operation in accordance with the procedure specified from the notified information, so that the player can use the amount of the game to be given when the player is in an advantageous state and within the notification period. Value can be acquired. In addition, after the notification period has elapsed, it is possible to add interest such as generating a special prize and controlling the game to a special game state, thereby improving the fun of the game.

  (B) A carry-over means for carrying over the decision to allow the occurrence of the special prize (bonus) until the special prize is generated, and a prize capable of performing the next game without using the gaming value. After an advantageous state (referring to RT or the like) for performing control that is derived with a higher probability than in the normal state is started, the pre-determining means has decided to allow the occurrence of the special prize (bonus) In some cases, the advantageous state may not be terminated, and the advantageous state may be terminated when the special prize is generated or when the end display result is derived (see Modification (14)). ).

  According to such a configuration, even if it is determined that the occurrence of a special prize is permitted after the advantageous state is started, if the special prize permitted by the determination does not occur, the advantageous state is determined according to the determination. Without being terminated, it is possible to continue control in the advantageous state until the termination display result is derived. For this reason, even if it is determined that the special winning is permitted in the advantageous state, the advantageous state can be continued unless the special winning allowed by the determination is generated, and the special winning is allowed. Compared with the conventional slot machine in which the advantageous state is ended by doing so, the player is not given a sense of loss when controlled to the advantageous state. In addition, since the decision to allow the occurrence of a special prize is carried over after the next game by the carryover means, it has been decided to allow the occurrence of a special prize while being controlled in an advantageous state. It can make you expect.

(C) derivation control means (reel rotation processing) for performing control for causing the variable display device to derive a display result in accordance with a determination result of the prior determination means;
The variable display device has a plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying the plurality of types of identification information, and the identification information is derived from each of the plurality of variable display areas. Is possible,
One game is completed when display results are derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas (reel 2L, 2C, and 2R display areas), and a plurality of display results are derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas. According to the combination of symbols derived and displayed on any one of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L6),
The multiple types of winnings include general winnings (small roles, replaying roles) other than the special winnings (bonus (A), (B)),
And further comprising stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving a display result of the variable display areas (display areas of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R),
The derivation control means includes
It has been determined that the generation of a specific general winning (orange, plum) among the general winnings (small role, replaying role) is permitted, and a combination of symbols (orange-orange-) for generating the specific general winning When the stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated at a timing (within the pull-in range) at which a specific general winning symbol (orange, plum) constituting orange, plum-plum-plum) can be pulled in , A combination of symbols (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum) for generating the specific general winning on any one of the plurality of winning lines (winning lines L1 to L6) is derived. It is determined that the specific general winning award (orange, plum) is allowed to occur, and the specific general winning symbol (oren) is determined. , Plum) when the stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated at a timing other than the timing at which it can be pulled (outside the pulling range), any of the plurality of winning lines (winning lines L1 to L6) Control that does not derive the combination of symbols (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum) for generating the specific general prize,
The specified general winning symbol (orange, plum) does not stop on any winning line in the variable display area (reserved reel) for which the display result has already been derived, and is still displayed in one or more variable display areas In a state where the result is not derived (a state where any reel is changing), the specific general winning symbol (orange, plum) is displayed for the variable display area (the reel being changed) for which the display result is not yet derived. When the stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated at a timing (within a pull-in range) that can be pulled in, any one of the plurality of winning lines (winning lines L1 to L6) is won. You may comprise so that the specific general winning symbol (orange, plum) may be derived | led-out on top (refer modification (13-1)).

  According to such a configuration, in a conventional slot machine, when a specific winning is won in the internal lottery and when the selected winning is missed, the specific display mode is stopped, so that the winning winning is achieved. You can determine to some extent that you have missed, but if you do not know the specific display mode that stops when you miss, you will not know that you have missed the winning prize, and in this case the prize simply was not won It is possible to solve the problem that it was difficult to determine whether the winning prize was missed or not. That is, it is determined that the occurrence of a specific general winning is permitted, the specific general winning symbol is not stopped in any winning line in the variable display area in which the display result has already been derived, and one or more variable Even in a state where the display result has not yet been derived in the display area, that is, in a state where it is not possible to derive a combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize that has already been allowed, leaving a variable display area being fluctuating, If the stop operation means is operated at the timing when the specific general winning symbol can be drawn for the remaining variable display area, the specific general winning symbol is derived on one of the multiple winning lines, so It is decided to allow the occurrence of general winnings, and the combination of symbols to generate the already allowed specific general winnings is derived while leaving the variable display area being changed. Depending on whether a particular regular winning symbols are derived can be not state an even also on one winning line making, it can be easily determined whether or not the missed certain regular winning.

(D) derivation control means (reel rotation processing) for performing control for causing the variable display device to derive a display result in accordance with a determination result of the prior determination means;
The variable display device has a plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying the plurality of types of identification information, and the identification information is derived from each of the plurality of variable display areas. Is possible,
One game is completed when display results are derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas (reel 2L, 2C, and 2R display areas), and a plurality of display results are derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas. According to the combination of symbols derived and displayed on any one of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L6),
The multiple types of winnings include general winnings (small roles, replaying roles) other than the special winnings (bonus (A), (B)),
And further comprising stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving a display result of the variable display areas (display areas of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R),
The derivation control means includes
It has been determined that the generation of a specific general winning (orange, plum) among the general winnings (small role, replaying role) is permitted, and a combination of symbols (orange-orange-) for generating the specific general winning When the stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated at a timing (within the pull-in range) at which a specific general winning symbol (orange, plum) constituting orange, plum-plum-plum) can be pulled in , A combination of symbols (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum) for generating the specific general winning on any one of the plurality of winning lines (winning lines L1 to L6) is derived. It is determined that the specific general winning award (orange, plum) is allowed to occur, and the specific general winning symbol (oren) is determined. , Plum) when the stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated at a timing other than the timing at which it can be pulled (outside the pulling range), any of the plurality of winning lines (winning lines L1 to L6) Control that does not derive the combination of symbols (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum) for generating the specific general prize,
Among the two or more variable display areas (stopped reels) for which display results have already been derived, one or more variable display areas (stopped reels) include the plurality of specific general winning symbols (orange, plum). Is stopped on any one of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L6), and the remaining of the two or more variable display areas (stopped reels) from which the display result has already been derived In the variable display area (stopped reel), the specific general winning symbol (orange, plum) is not stopped on the one winning line, and the display result is not yet derived in one or more variable display areas. In the absence state (the state where any reel is changing), the specific general winning symbol (orange, plum) is drawn for the variable display area (the changing reel) for which the display result has not yet been derived. When the stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated at a timing (within the pull-in range) that can be inserted, the specific general winning symbol (orange, plum) is derived on the one winning line. You may comprise so that control may be performed (refer modification (13-1)).

  According to such a configuration, in the conventional slot machine, when a specific winning is won in the internal lottery and when the selected winning is missed, the specific display mode is stopped, so that the winning winning is achieved. You can determine to some extent that you have missed, but if you do not know the specific display mode that stops when you miss, you will not know that you have missed the winning prize, and in this case the prize simply was not won It is possible to solve the problem that it was difficult to determine whether the winning prize was missed or not. That is, it is determined that the occurrence of a specific general winning is permitted, and one or more variable display areas of two or more variable display areas for which display results have already been derived have any one of the specific general winning symbols. Of the two or more variable display areas for which display results have already been derived, and the specific variable pattern is not stopped on the single winning line in the remaining variable display areas. In addition, the display result has not been derived yet in one or more variable display areas, that is, the combination of symbols for generating the already permitted specific general winnings with the variable display area being changed cannot be derived. Even if the stop operation means is operated at a timing at which the specific general winning symbol can be drawn in the remaining variable display area, the specific general winning symbol is already stopped on the one winning line. Since the fixed general winning symbol is derived, it is determined that the generation of the specific general winning is allowed, and the combination of symbols for generating the already permitted specific general winning is generated with the variable display area being changed. Even if it is not possible, it can be easily determined whether or not a specific general prize has been missed depending on whether or not a specific general prize symbol is derived on one winning line.

  Further, the specific general winning symbols constituting the combination of symbols for generating the specific general winnings may be the same type of symbols or different symbols. That is, the combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize may be a combination of symbols of the same type or may include different symbols.

  In addition, when it is determined that the occurrence of the specific general prize is permitted, it is preferable to include a notification means for notifying the possibility that the occurrence of the specific general prize is permitted. If it is informed that there is a possibility that the generation of the specific general winnings is permitted at the stage where the combination of symbols for generating the already permitted specific general winnings cannot be derived, the remaining variable display area Operate the stop operation means at the timing when the specific general winning symbol can be drawn in, and the specific general winning symbol is derived on any one of the plurality of winning lines, or the specific general winning symbol has already stopped. It is possible to determine whether or not a specific general winning symbol has been missed depending on whether or not a specific general winning symbol is derived on one winning line. Prize in some cases more than one, whether the missed any particular regular winning can be accurately determined.

(E) derivation control means (reel rotation processing) for performing control for causing the variable display device to derive a display result according to a determination result of the prior determination means;
The variable display device has a plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying the plurality of types of identification information, and the identification information is derived from each of the plurality of variable display areas. Is possible,
One game is completed when display results are derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas (reel 2L, 2C, and 2R display areas), and a plurality of display results are derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas. According to the combination of symbols derived and displayed on any one of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L6),
The multiple types of winnings include general winnings (small roles, replaying roles) other than the special winnings (bonus (A), (B)),
The derivation control means includes
The plurality of variable display areas as a display result in response to the determination that the occurrence of a specific general prize (orange, plum) among the general prizes (small role, re-playing role) is determined. Design for generating a specific general winning on the first winning line (winning lines L1, L2) or the second winning line (winning lines L3, L4) of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L6) Control to derive the combination of (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum),
The pre-determining means includes
First determination (orange, plum) to determine that the occurrence of the specific general prize is permitted, the fact that the specific general prize is allowed, and the occurrence of a special general prize different from the specific general prize A second determination (orange + 1 (1), plum +1 (2)), which simultaneously determines the fact that the specific general prize is allowed and the special prize is allowed 3 (Orange + BB (1), Plum + BB (2)), to allow the occurrence of the specific general prize, to allow the occurrence of the special general prize, and to allow the occurrence of the special prize simultaneously It is possible to make a fourth decision to decide (orange + 1 (1) + BB (1), plum +1 (2) + BB (2))
The third decision occupying the combined probability of the probability of making the first decision (orange, plum) and the probability of making the third decision (orange + BB (1), plum + BB (2)) is made. And the probability that the second decision (orange + 1 (1), plum + 1 (2)) and the fourth decision (orange + 1 (1) + BB (1), plum + 1) And the ratio of the probability of the fourth determination occupying the total probability of the sheet (2) + BB (2)) and the first to fourth determinations with different probabilities,
The derivation control means includes
The first pay line (winning line) is established when the first condition that the first decision (orange, plum) or the third decision (orange + BB (1), plum + BB (2)) is satisfied. A combination of symbols (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum) for generating the specific general winning in the line L1, L2) at a higher rate than the second winning line (winning lines L3, L4) Control to derive
The second determination (orange + 1 sheet (1), plum + 1 sheet (2)) or the fourth determination (orange + 1 sheet (1) + BB (1), plum + 1 sheet (2) + BB (2)) When the second condition made is satisfied, the specific general prize is given to the second pay line (win line L3, L4) at a higher rate than the first pay line (win line L1, L2). You may comprise so that the control which derives the combination (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum) for generating may be performed (refer modification (13-2)).

  According to such a configuration, in a conventional slot machine, it is possible to win a small role alone, a small role and a special role at the same time. It is possible to expect a special role to be won according to the stop mode of the reel by making the stop control used at the time of simultaneous winning of the Since the stop mode at the time of simultaneous winning of special roles is different, it can be determined from the player whether or not the special role is won according to the stop mode, so if the special role is not won The problem that expectation is lost can be solved. That is, when the first determination or the third determination is made, there is a high possibility that a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning on the first winning line is derived, and the second determination or When the fourth determination is made, there is a high possibility that a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning in the second winning line is derived. That is, when a specific general winning is generated when the first determination or the third determination is made, and when a specific general winning is generated when the second determination or the fourth determination is made. A winning line from which a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning is easily derived is different. The ratio of the probability that the third decision is made in the combined probability of the probability that the first decision is made and the probability that the third decision is made, the probability that the second decision is made, and the fourth decision Since the ratio of the probability of the fourth determination to the total probability is different from the probability of being made, the combination of symbols for generating the specific general prize was derived when the specific general prize was generated It is possible to change the degree of expectation that a special winning is permitted by the winning line. Furthermore, when a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning is derived in the second winning line, a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning is derived in the second winning line. In both cases, it is suggested that special prizes may be allowed to occur, but whether or not special prizes are allowed from the prize line from which a combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize is derived. It is impossible to discriminate, and the player's expectation that special winnings are allowed is lost regardless of which winning line the symbol combination for generating a specific general winning is derived. It won't be lost.

(F) derivation control means (reel rotation processing) for performing control for causing the variable display device to derive a display result in accordance with a determination result of the prior determination means;
The variable display device has a plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying the plurality of types of identification information, and the identification information is derived from each of the plurality of variable display areas. Is possible,
One game is completed when display results are derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas (reel 2L, 2C, and 2R display areas), and a plurality of display results are derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas. According to the combination of symbols derived and displayed on any one of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L6),
The multiple types of winnings include general winnings (small roles, replaying roles) other than the special winnings (bonus (A), (B)),
The derivation control means includes
The plurality of variable display areas as a display result in response to the determination that the occurrence of a specific general prize (orange, plum) among the general prizes (small role, re-playing role) is determined. Design for generating a specific general winning on the first winning line (winning lines L1, L2) or the second winning line (winning lines L3, L4) of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L6) Control to derive the combination of (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum),
The pre-determining means includes
First determination (orange, plum) to determine that the occurrence of the specific general prize is permitted, the fact that the specific general prize is allowed, and the occurrence of a special general prize different from the specific general prize A second determination (orange + 1 (1), plum +1 (2)), which simultaneously determines the fact that the specific general prize is allowed and the special prize is allowed 3 (Orange + BB (1), Plum + BB (2)), to allow the occurrence of the specific general prize, to allow the occurrence of the special general prize, and to allow the occurrence of the special prize simultaneously It is possible to make a fourth decision to decide (orange + 1 (1) + BB (1), plum +1 (2) + BB (2))
The sum of the probability of making the first decision (orange, plum) and the probability of making the fourth decision (orange + 1 (1) + BB (1), plum + 1 (2) + BB (2)) The ratio of the probability of making the fourth decision in the probability, the probability of making the second decision (orange + 1 (1), plum + 1 (2)) and the third decision (orange + BB ( 1), the first to fourth determinations are performed with different probabilities of the ratio of the probability of the third determination occupying the total probability of the plum + BB (2));
The derivation control means includes
When the first condition in which the first determination (orange, plum) or the fourth determination (orange + 1 sheet (1) + BB (1), plum + 1 sheet (2) + BB (2)) is made is satisfied In addition, a combination of symbols for generating the specific general winnings in the first winning line (winning lines L1, L2) at a higher rate than the second winning line (winning lines L3, L4) (orange- (Orange-orange, plum-plum-plum)
When the second condition in which the second determination (orange + 1 sheet (1), plum +1 sheet (2)) and the third determination (orange + BB (1), plum + BB (2)) are made is satisfied In addition, a combination of symbols (orange--) for generating the specific general winning in the second winning line (winning lines L3, L4) at a higher rate than the first winning line (winning lines L1, L2). You may comprise so that control which derives orange-orange and plum-plum-plum may be performed (refer modification (13-2)).

  According to such a configuration, when the first determination or the fourth determination is made, there is a high possibility that a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning on the first winning line is derived. In the case where the second determination or the third determination is made, there is a high possibility that a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning in the second winning line is derived. That is, when a specific general winning is generated when the first determination or the fourth determination is made, and when a specific general winning is generated when the second determination or the third determination is made. A winning line from which a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning is easily derived is different. The ratio of the probability that the fourth decision is made in the combined probability of the probability that the first decision is made and the probability that the fourth decision is made, the probability that the second decision is made, and the third decision Since the ratio of the probability of the third decision to the total probability is different from the probability of being made, the combination of symbols for generating the specific general prize was derived when the specific general prize was generated It is possible to change the degree of expectation that a special winning is permitted by the winning line. Furthermore, when a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning is derived in the second winning line, a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning is derived in the second winning line. In both cases, it is suggested that special prizes may be allowed to occur, but whether or not special prizes are allowed from the prize line from which a combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize is derived. It is impossible to discriminate, and the player's expectation that special winnings are allowed is lost regardless of which winning line the symbol combination for generating a specific general winning is derived. It won't be lost.

  The control for deriving the combination of symbols for generating the specific general winning at a higher rate than the second winning line in the first winning line means that the first winning line is at the rate of 100%. This includes a control for deriving a combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize. Further, the control for deriving the combination of symbols for generating the specific general winning in the second winning line at a rate higher than that in the first winning line means that the second winning line is at the rate of 100%. This includes a control for deriving a combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize.

  Further, the symbols constituting the combination of symbols for generating the specific general winnings may be the same type of symbols or different symbols. That is, the combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize may be a combination of symbols of the same type or may include different symbols.

(G) An external test for performing processing for causing the variable display device to derive the same display result as when the derivation operation means is operated in the operation procedure based on operation procedure information for specifying a predetermined operation procedure The apparatus (test apparatus 1200) further includes output means (for example, a sub control unit 91 and an input / output board 1100) for outputting recommended operation procedure information for specifying a predetermined recommended operation procedure.
The output means outputs operation procedure information (recommended operation procedure information) according to the determination result by the prior determination means (see FIG. 35, modification (12)).

  According to such a configuration, in the external test apparatus, it is possible to identify an operation procedure that is likely to be actually performed by the player, and is derived when the operation procedure is performed according to such an operation procedure. A test can be performed based on the display result. As a result, the test can be performed on the assumption that the slot machine is shipped to the market and actually played by the player.

  The output means outputs information for specifying an arbitrary operation procedure (so-called father hitting) (information that can specify the region numbers 1 to 21 for each of the reels 2L to 2R) as the recommended operation procedure information. (See Modification (12)).

  The output means operates as a recommended operation procedure information when a prize determined to be allowed to be generated by the pre-decision means is operated in a predetermined first operation procedure (a predetermined small combination is not awarded). Information for specifying a predetermined second operation procedure to be generated with a higher probability than when the stop operation is performed (see Modification (12)).

  According to such a configuration, in the external test apparatus, it is possible to identify an operation procedure that is likely to be actually performed by the player, and is derived when the operation procedure is performed according to such an operation procedure. A test can be performed based on the display result. As a result, the test can be performed on the assumption that the slot machine is shipped to the market and actually played by the player.

(H) Special game state control means (when a big bonus or a regular bonus is won) that controls to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined normal state when a special winning among the plurality of types of winnings occurs Process to control the bonus corresponding to)
Preparation state control means for controlling to a predetermined preparation state when the special gaming state ends (processing for controlling to the preparation mode after the bonus ends);
Advantageous state control means for controlling the player to an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state and the ready state when a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied in the ready state (when the special event stops in the preparation mode) Processing for controlling to RT), and
Derived by the derivation control means on condition that the determination result of the pre-decision means in the preparation state or the advantageous state is a specific result (replay + fall replay win, replay + fall replay + BAR replay win) Normal state control means for controlling to the normal state when the end display result to be obtained (falling replay) is derived (processing for controlling to the normal gaming state when the falling replay wins);
A notification condition (a table used for the second AT lottery) is set at a predetermined trigger (satisfaction condition is established) in the progress of the game, and control is performed for a notification period (AT) for notifying predetermined information (navigation effect) according to the notification condition. Notification period control means (second AT lottery process, AT management process executed by the sub-control unit 91);
When the determination result of the predetermination means becomes the specific result on the condition that it is the notification period (AT preparation mode, ART) of the period controlled to the preparation state or the advantageous state, Notification means (navigation effect execution process executed by the sub-control unit 91) for notifying the specific result time information corresponding to the specified result (navigation effect corresponding to the type of replay that is won at the same time in the fall replay win) And
The derivation control means is when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes the specific result, and when the operation is accepted by the derivation operation accepting means in an end procedure corresponding to the specific result, the ending control means Control for deriving a display result is performed, and control is performed for deriving a display result different from the end display result when an operation is accepted by the deriving operation accepting unit in an avoidance procedure different from the end procedure corresponding to the specific result. (See FIG. 8A),
The pre-determining means determines that the specific result is obtained at a higher rate in the preparation state than in the advantageous state (see FIGS. 7B and 7C).

  According to such a configuration, after the special gaming state is finished, it is controlled to the ready state, and if the advantageous condition is satisfied in the ready state, the advantageous state is controlled, and the end display result is derived in the ready state. Then, the normal state is controlled. For this reason, when the advantageous condition is established before the end display result is derived in the preparatory state after the special gaming state, the advantageous state is controlled.

  The end display result that prevents the transition from the ready state to the advantageous state is derived when the determination result of the predetermining means becomes the specific result and is operated in the end procedure corresponding to the specific result. When the operation is performed according to an avoidance procedure different from the end procedure corresponding to, a display result different from the end display result is derived.

  Further, in the notification period of the period controlled to the preparation state, when the determination result of the prior determination unit becomes the specific result, the specific result time information corresponding to the specific result is notified.

  As described above, the gaming state in the previous stage of the advantageous state is controlled to the ready state, and the advantageous state is controlled when the advantageous condition is satisfied before the end display result is derived in the ready state. In this preparatory state, when controlled during the notification period, by operating according to the avoidance procedure based on the information on the specific result that is notified, while avoiding the intentional derivation of the end display result, The game can proceed while waiting for establishment. On the other hand, when it is not controlled in the notification period even in the preparation state, it is not possible to avoid intentionally deriving the end display result because the notification means does not notify the specific result time information. There is a higher possibility that the end display result is derived prior to the establishment of and the normal state is controlled without being controlled to the advantageous state. Furthermore, since it is determined that the specific result is obtained at a higher rate in the preparation state than in the advantageous state, the end display result is derived in the preparation state and in the normal state than in the advantageous state. There is a higher possibility of being controlled. As a result, it is possible to give a clear degree of advantage to the player depending on whether or not it is controlled during the notification period in the preparation state that is the pre-stage of the advantageous state, and the expectation for being controlled during the notification period is effective. And can enhance the interest of the game.

  Similarly, even in the advantageous state, during the notification period, when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes the specific result, information on the specific result corresponding to the specific result is notified. For this reason, in the notification period among the periods controlled to be in an advantageous state, it is avoided that the end display result is intentionally derived by operating in the avoidance procedure based on the information on the specific result to be notified. , The control can be continued in the advantageous state. On the other hand, it is not possible to avoid intentionally deriving the end display result during periods other than the notification period among the periods controlled to the advantageous state, and the end display result is derived and controlled to the normal state. The possibility that it will end up increases. As a result, it is possible to give a clear degree of advantage to the player depending on whether or not it is controlled during the notification period in the advantageous state, effectively increasing the expectation for being controlled during the notification period, and enhancing the interest of the game. Can be improved.

  Note that the notification condition may be a condition related to the control for the notification period. The notification condition may be, for example, a condition related to whether or not to start the notification period. More specifically, the notification condition relating to whether or not to start the notification period is (a) determined to control to the notification period in the slot machine that controls to the notification period on condition that it is determined to control to the notification period. (I) a ratio for determining the number of games reached until the control to the notification period is started in the slot machine that is controlled in the notification period on condition that the number of games reached has reached the determined number of reached games; (C) A slot that is controlled in the notification period on condition that the number of times of ending avoidance that has led to the display result different from the ending display result when the determination result of the predetermining means becomes the specified result has been reached. It may be a ratio that determines the number of times of arrival until the control to the notification period is started in the machine (see Modification (21)).

  In the case of the above (a), in the period controlled in the preparation mode or the advantageous state, in the period other than the notification period, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than that in the normal state. The notification period control means sets a notification condition that is determined to be controlled in the notification period at a high rate (see the table in FIG. 25A and the table in FIG. 25D). In the case of (i) above, in the period controlled in the preparation mode or the advantageous state, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than that in the normal state except in the notification period. The notification period control means sets a notification condition for determining a smaller number of reached games at a high rate (see Modification (21)). In the case of (c) above, in the period controlled to the preparation mode or the advantageous state, in the period other than the notification period, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than that in the normal state. The notification period control means sets a notification condition for determining a smaller number of arrivals at a high rate (see Modification (21)).

  Further, the notification condition may be, for example, a condition related to a period controlled in the notification period. More specifically, the notification condition related to the period to be controlled in the notification period is (d) control on the notification period on condition that the number of games digested in the notification period has reached the determined end game number. The ratio of determining the number of end games in the slot machine to be ended, (e) The end lottery is executed according to the end probability determined in advance in the notification period, and the control to the notification period is performed on condition that the winning in the end lottery is won. The ratio for determining the end probability in the slot machine to be ended, (f) The notification period, provided that the determination result of the predetermining means becomes the specific result in the notification period and the number of times the specific result time information has been notified has reached the specified number It may be a ratio for determining the specified number of times in the slot machine that finishes the control to (see Modification (21)).

  In the case of the above (d), in the period controlled in the preparation mode or the advantageous state, in the period other than the notification period, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than that in the normal state. The notification period control means sets notification conditions for determining a larger number of finished games at a high rate (see the table in FIG. 25A, the 30G digestion table, and the bonus winning table in FIG. 25D). In the case of the above (e), in the period controlled to the preparation mode or the advantageous state, in the period other than the notification period, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than that in the normal state. The notification period control means sets a notification condition for determining a lower end probability at a high rate (see Modification (21)). In the case of the above (f), in the period controlled to the preparation mode or the advantageous state, in the period other than the notification period, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than that in the normal state. The notification period control means sets a notification condition for determining a larger specified number of times at a high rate (see Modification (21)).

  In addition, the notification condition is, for example, (ki) a slot machine that draws whether or not to notify the specific result time information when the determination result of the predetermining means becomes a specific result during the notification period, and notifies when it is won May be a ratio for determining the winning probability. In the case of the above (ki), in the period controlled in the preparation mode or the advantageous state, in the period other than the notification period, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than that in the normal state. The notification period control means sets a notification condition for determining a higher winning probability at a high rate (see Modification (21)).

  The notification condition may be any of the above (a) to (ki), or may be selectively combined among the above (a) to (ki). Even if the notification condition is any one of the above (a) to (ki) and selectively combined, it is in a normal state except for the notification period in the period controlled to the preparation mode or the advantageous state. Since the notification condition is set so that the degree of advantage for the player is higher than that at a certain time, the player can advance the game while expecting, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the slot machine adopting (b) or (c) as the notification condition, a period during which the gaming state is controlled to be in the normal state when the end display result is derived according to the notification condition. Out of the notification period, the non-period notification possible period control means for controlling to the out-of-period notification possible period for notifying the specific result time information, and
Provided with out-of-period notifying means for notifying specified result information corresponding to the specified result when the determination result of the prior determining means becomes the specified result on condition that the notification period is outside the period In this case, the notification condition relating to whether or not to start the notification period may further include the technical matters described below.

  As notification conditions related to whether or not to start the notification period, (h) notification outside the period can be made on condition that the number of games digested in the out-of-period notification period has reached the determined number of out-of-period end games Execute out-of-period end lottery according to the ratio of determining the out-of-period end game in the slot machine that ends the control to the period, and the predetermined out-of-period end probability in the out-of-period notification possible period. The ratio of determining the end-of-period end probability in the slot machine that finishes the control to the out-of-period notification period on condition that the lottery has been won, The slot for ending the control to the period that can be notified outside the period on condition that the number of times the information on the specific result is notified reaches the prescribed number outside the period. Good rate, be an determining the period out prescribed number of times in Tomashin (see Modification (22)).

  In the case of the above (ku), the notification period control means is set so that the degree of advantage for the player is higher in the period controlled in the advantageous state than in the normal period in the period other than the notification period. Sets a notification condition for determining a higher number of out-of-period end games at a high rate (see Modification (22)). In the case of (1) above, the notification period control means is configured so that the degree of advantage for the player is higher in the period controlled to the advantageous state than in the normal state except in the notification period. Sets a notification condition for determining a lower out-of-period termination probability at a high rate (see Modification (22)). In the case of (v), the notification period control means is set so that the degree of advantage for the player is higher in the period controlled to the advantageous state except for the notification period than in the normal state. Sets a notification condition for determining a higher number of out-of-period prescribed times at a high rate (see Modification (22)).

  In addition, the notification condition is, for example, lottery whether or not to notify the specific result time information when the determination result of the predetermining means becomes the specific result in the (s) non-period notification possible period, and the notification is made when winning In the slot machine, the ratio for determining the winning probability may be used. In the case of the above (sa), the notification period control means so that the degree of advantage for the player is higher in the period controlled in the advantageous state than in the normal state except in the notification period. Sets a notification condition for determining a higher winning probability at a high rate (see Modification (22)).

  The notification condition in the slot machine including the non-period notification possible period control means and the non-period notification means may be any of the above (a) to (ki) and the above (ku) to (sa), Moreover, what was selectively combined among said (a)-(ki) and said (ku)-(sa) may be sufficient. Even if the notification condition is any of the above (a) to (ki) and the above (ku) to (sa) or selectively combined, other than the notification period in the period controlled to the advantageous state Since the notification conditions are set so that the player has a higher degree of advantage than in the normal state, the player can advance the game with expectation and improve the interest of the game. be able to.

  (I) In the preparation state, the notification period control means sets the notification condition so that the player has a higher degree of advantage than in the normal state (see FIG. 25A). (See FIGS. 25B and 25D).

  According to such a configuration, in the preparation state, the notification condition is set so that the degree of advantage for the player is higher than that in the normal state. For this reason, even when the player is controlled to the ready state, the player can advance the game while expecting a sense of expectation, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the preparation state, the notification period control means is more advantageous to the player by setting a notification condition for controlling the notification period at a higher rate than in the normal state (FIG. 25 ( b) and FIG. 25 (d)). According to such a configuration, in the preparation state, the notification condition for controlling in the notification period is set at a higher rate than in the normal state, so that the expectation to be controlled in the notification period is more strongly held. And can improve the fun of the game.

Further, the determination result of the prior determination means becomes the specific result until the notification means reaches an upper limit number according to the notification period controlled according to the notification condition set by the notification period control means. The specific result time information corresponding to the specific result is notified (for example, it is repeatedly controlled to ART over 50 games as many times as the number of navigation stocks),
In the preparatory state, the notification period control means is more advantageous to the player by setting a notification condition for controlling at a high rate in a notification period with a high rate of the upper limit number than in the normal state. (FIG. 25 (b), FIG. 25 (d)) may be used. According to such a configuration, in the preparation state, when the notification period is set, the notification condition for controlling at a high rate is set in the notification period having a higher upper limit number at a higher rate than in the normal state. It is possible to have a strong expectation for the increase in the upper limit number, and to improve the interest of the game.

  (J) In the period controlled to the advantageous state, in the period other than the notification period, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than that in the normal state (see FIG. 25A). The notification period control means sets the notification condition (see FIG. 25 (d)).

  According to such a configuration, in the period controlled to the advantageous state, in the period other than the notification period, the notification condition is set such that the degree of advantage for the player is higher than that in the normal state. For this reason, even when it is controlled in the advantageous state but not during the notification period, the player can advance the game while expecting a sense of expectation, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, in the period controlled to the advantageous state, the notification period control means sets the notification condition for controlling the notification period at a higher rate than in the normal state except for the notification period. This makes it advantageous for the player (the 2nd AT lottery is performed with reference to the 5G to 25G digestion table in FIG. 25 (d) without winning the bonus. 30G in FIG. 25 (d) without winning the bonus. (The second AT lottery is performed with reference to the table at the time of digestion and is always controlled by AT. When the bonus is won, the second AT lottery is performed with reference to the table of FIG. 25 (d) and is always controlled by AT.) It may be a thing. According to such a configuration, in the period controlled to the advantageous state, in the period other than the notification period, the notification condition for controlling the notification period is set at a higher rate than in the normal state. It is possible to have a strong expectation for being controlled and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the determination result of the prior determination means becomes the specific result until the notification means reaches an upper limit number according to the notification period controlled according to the notification condition set by the notification period control means. The specific result time information corresponding to the specific result is notified (for example, it is repeatedly controlled to ART over 50 games as many times as the number of navigation stocks),
In the period controlled to the advantageous state, in the period other than the notification period, the notification period control means controls the notification period with a high rate at a high rate at a higher rate than in the normal state. It may be advantageous for the player by setting a notification condition (the second AT lottery is performed with reference to the table of FIG. 25D). According to such a configuration, in the period controlled to the advantageous state, except for the notification period, the notification condition for controlling at a high rate is set in the notification period having a higher upper limit number at a higher rate than in the normal state. Therefore, when the notification period is set, a sense of expectation that the upper limit number is increased can be made stronger, and the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view showing the whole structure of the slot machine. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the arrangement | sequence of the symbol on each reel which comprises a variable display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the whole structure of the control circuit of a slot machine. (A) is a figure for demonstrating the kind of winning combination, the symbol combination of a winning combination, and the technical matter relevant to a winning combination, (b) is a symbol combination and special combination of a predetermined special appearance. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to an appearance. (A) is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a gaming state, (b) is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a probability state. It is a figure which shows each lottery object combination and determination value number which are acquired based on a game state and a setting value. (A) is a figure for demonstrating the reel control when winning a fall replay, (b) is a figure for demonstrating the special reel control of a middle reel when winning a strawberry. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a lottery process. (A) is a figure for demonstrating the kind of freeze, (b) is a figure for demonstrating a freeze lottery table. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a reel rotation process. It is a figure for demonstrating the timing chart when a freeze does not generate | occur | produce. It is a figure for demonstrating the timing chart in case the 1st freeze generate | occur | produces. It is a figure for demonstrating the timing chart when the 2nd freeze generate | occur | produces. It is a figure for demonstrating the timing chart in case the 3rd freeze generate | occur | produces. It is a figure for demonstrating the lottery conditions used as the opportunity which performs 1st AT lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the table referred in 1st AT lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the table referred in 1st AT lottery. It is a flowchart for demonstrating point related processing. It is a figure for demonstrating point provision conditions. It is a figure for demonstrating the table for determining a grant point. It is a figure for demonstrating the table for performing difference number corresponding | compatible notification lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the table for performing notification lot corresponding to total number. It is a figure for demonstrating the lottery conditions used as the opportunity which performs 2nd AT lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the table referred in 2nd AT lottery. It is a figure which shows the promotion rate which the navigation stock number is determined to be 1 or more by AT lottery in non-AT preparation mode or non-ART, and is promoted to AT preparation mode or ART. It is a figure for demonstrating the number of navigation stock added at the time of alerting | reporting promotion conditions establishment. It is a figure for demonstrating the alerting | reporting mode determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating the table used for non-AT navigation lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the example about the case where it is not controlled by AT and the case where it is controlled by AT according to the result of AT lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the game state effect performed according to the present game state and effect state. It is a figure for demonstrating the table for pinpointing the kind of background displayed as an ART production. It is a figure for demonstrating the table for performing alert | lottery lottery in a modification. It is a figure which shows each lottery object combination and the number of determination values which are acquired based on the game state and setting value in a modification. It is a block diagram showing an example of a control circuit of a slot machine on which a test apparatus for performing a type test and an input / output board for inputting / outputting test information used for the test are mounted.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view showing the overall structure of the slot machine according to this embodiment, and FIG. 2 is a view showing the internal structure of the slot machine. The slot machine 1 includes a housing 1a having an open front surface and a front door 1b pivotally supported on a side end of the housing.

  Inside the casing 1a of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are horizontally arranged. As shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols out of the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are arranged so that they can be seen from the see-through window 3 provided on the front door 1b. Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, “melon”, “banana”, “black strawberry”, “white strawberry”, “blank (1) (stars without diagonal lines), respectively. ”,“ Blank (2) (stars with diagonal lines) ”,“ Deca (1) (upper half of stars without diagonal lines) ”,“ Deca (2) (lower half of stars without diagonal lines) ”,“ Red 7 A plurality of types of mutually identifiable symbols such as (black 7), white 7 (white 7), and BAR are drawn in a predetermined order. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3, respectively. In addition, the portions other than the portions on which the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are drawn are white, and light is transmitted with high transmittance. The portions on which the symbols are drawn also correspond to the colors of the symbols. It is designed to transmit light.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided in correspondence with each other and are rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIGS. 2 and 4), so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are transferred to the see-through window 3. In addition to being displayed changing continuously, by stopping the rotation of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  Inside the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R that detect the reference position and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are irradiated with white light from the back side. A reel LED 55 is provided. The reel LED 55 includes nine LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and each symbol can be irradiated independently.

  Further, a display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 4) is disposed at a position on the front side (player side) of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R of the front door 1b. The liquid crystal display 51 has a normally white liquid crystal panel having transparency in a state where no voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element, and a transmissive region 51b corresponding to the see-through window 3 of the display region 51a. The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be visually recognized from the player side through the see-through window 3. There are two types of liquid crystal displays: a non-glare type liquid crystal display with non-glare processing on the surface of the liquid crystal panel and a glare type liquid crystal display with glare processing (gloss processing). In the embodiment, a glare type liquid crystal display in which glare processing is applied to the surface of the display area 51a is used. In addition, a backlight (not shown) that irradiates the display area 51a from behind is provided on the back surface of the display area 51a excluding the transmissive area 51b, and a concealing member that conceals the inside is further provided on the back surface. (Not shown) is provided.

  On the front side (front side in FIG. 1) of the liquid crystal display 51, an instruction (for example, touch operation) from the player to the display surface is detected, and the position (for example, the position where the touch operation is performed) is specified. Light-emitting devices 56a and 56b and light-receiving devices 57a and 57b that constitute a touch panel for the above-described purpose are installed. The light emitting devices 56a and 56b include a plurality of infrared light emitting elements (for example, LEDs). The light receiving devices 57a and 57b include a plurality of infrared light receiving elements (for example, phototransistors).

  The light emitting device 56a and the light receiving device 57a are installed in pairs in the horizontal direction across the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51. The light emitting device 56a and the light receiving device 57a are installed so that infrared rays radiated from the plurality of light emitting elements provided in the light emitting device 56a can be received by the plurality of light receiving elements provided in the light receiving device 57a. Similarly, the light emitting device 56b and the light receiving device 57b are installed in pairs in the vertical direction across the display area of the liquid crystal display 51. The light emitting device 56b and the light receiving device 57b are installed so that infrared rays emitted from the plurality of light emitting elements provided in the light emitting device 56b can be received by the plurality of light receiving elements provided in the light receiving device 57b.

  In the present embodiment, infrared grids are formed along the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51 by emitting infrared rays from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b. When a touch operation is performed on the display surface by the player, the light receiving devices 57a and 57b detect the shielding of infrared rays and output a signal for specifying the position where the detected light receiving element is arranged. To the touch panel controller 99 described later. The touch panel controller 99 can specify the position where the touch operation is performed on the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51 based on signals from the light receiving devices 57a and 57b, and the touch panel is formed by these. Yes.

  The light emitting devices 56 a and 56 b constituting the touch panel are installed on the left side and the lower side of the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51, and the light receiving devices 57 a and 57 b are installed on the right side and the upper side of the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51. The touch panel can detect a touch operation in an area surrounded by the light emitting devices 56a and 56b and the light receiving devices 57a and 57b, and can specify a position where the touch operation is performed.

  Further, on the front door 1b, a medal is inserted using a medal insertion unit 4 into which a medal can be inserted, a medal payout opening 9 from which a medal is paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a game value owned by the player). A single BET switch 5 operated when setting the number of bets for a minute, and using a credit, a specified number of bets determined in accordance with the gaming state within the range (the normal game described later in this embodiment) MAXBET switch 6 operated when setting the state, the preparation mode, and RT (Replay Time) where the winning probability of replay is high, and 2 for bonus, medal and bet stored as credits Settlement switch 10 operated when settling the medals used for setting the number (returning medals used for setting credits and bets), game Start switch 7 is operated to start the reels 2L, 2C, stop switch 8L is operated to stop each rotation of the 2R, 8C, 8R, but are provided operable by the player.

  The front door 1b also displays a credit indicator 11 that displays the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals acquired during a big bonus, regular bonus, and RT described later, and when an error occurs. A game auxiliary display 12 for displaying an error code indicating the contents and a payout display 13 for displaying the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a winning are provided.

  Further, on the front door 1b, 1BETLED 14 that notifies that the bet number is set to 1 by lighting, 2BETLED 15 that notifies that the bet number is set to 2, and 3 bets are set. 3BET LED 16 to notify when lit, insertion request LED 17 to notify that a medal can be inserted is lit, start valid LED 18 to notify that the game start operation by the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, wait (previous Waiting state LED 19 for informing that it is in the state of waiting for the start of reel rotation since a certain period of time has not elapsed since the start of the game, during replay informing that it is in the replay game described later An LED 20 is provided.

  Further, inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 4) for notifying that the betting number setting operation by the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is effective. In the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R that indicate that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is effective are turned on. (See FIG. 4).

  Further, inside the front door 1b, a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for canceling an error state excluding a RAM abnormality error described later and a stop state described later by a predetermined key operation, and changing a set value described later A set value display 24 for displaying the set value at that time or during confirmation of the set value, and a flow path for medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, which will be described later, are provided in a hopper tank 34 a provided inside the housing 1 a. (See FIG. 2) The flow path switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching to either the side or the medal payout exit 9 side, the inserted medal that is inserted from the medal insertion section 4 and flows down to the hopper tank 34a side. A medal selector (not shown) having a sensor 31 and a door open detection switch 25 (see FIG. 4) for detecting the open state of the front door 1b are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a reel sensor 33L that can detect the reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, as shown in FIG. 33C, 33R (see FIG. 4), the reel unit 2 including the reel LED 55, the external output board 1000 for outputting an external output signal, the hopper tank 34a for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, and the hopper tank 34a A hopper unit 34 including a hopper motor 34b for paying out medals stored in the medal payout opening 9, a payout sensor 34c for detecting medals paid out by driving the hopper motor 34b, and a power supply box 100 are provided. .

  On the side of the hopper unit 34, an overflow tank 35 is provided for storing medals overflowing from the hopper tank 34a. Inside the overflow tank 35, a full sensor 35 a made up of a pair of electrically conductive members spaced apart from each other and provided at a height capable of detecting a predetermined amount of stored medals is provided. It is possible to detect that the medal storage amount stored in the inside when it is conductive by contacting through the medal stored in the inside exceeds a predetermined amount, that is, that the overflow tank is full. It has become.

  On the front surface of the power supply box 100 is a stop for selecting whether to enable / disable the stop function that controls the stop state (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed) at the end of a big bonus, which will be described later. Switch 36a, for selecting the validity / invalidity of the automatic settlement function for controlling automatic settlement processing (processing for returning (returning) medals stored as credits regardless of the player's operation) at the end of a big bonus, which will be described later It functions as an automatic settlement switch 36b, a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change mode at startup, and a reset switch for canceling an error state and a stop state except for a RAM abnormality error in a normal state. A reset that functions as a setting switch to change the set value of the winning probability (outtake rate) of internal lottery, which will be described DOO / setting switch 38, a power switch 39 which is operated to turn ON / OFF the power supply is provided.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, a medal is inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or a bet number is set using a credit. In order to use credits, the single BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch 6 may be operated. When a prescribed number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the winning line determined according to the gaming state among the winning lines L1 to L6 (see FIG. 1) becomes effective, and the start switch 7 is operated. Is in a valid state, that is, a state where the game can be started. When medals are inserted beyond the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  The winning line is a line that is set to determine whether a combination of symbols displayed on the perspective windows 3 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is a winning symbol combination. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the winning line L1 set across the symbols arranged in the upper stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R and the symbols arranged in the lower stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R are displayed. The winning line L2, the upper stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the lower stage of the reel 2R, that is, the winning line L3, the lower stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, which are set across the right-down symbols. , Set up over the upper line of the reel 2R, that is, the winning line L4 set across the symbols arranged in the upward direction, the upper stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the upper stage of the reel 2R, ie, over the symbols arranged in the V shape. There are six types of winning lines L5, the lower stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the lower stage of the reel 2R, that is, the winning line L6 set across the reverse V-shaped symbols. Has been defined as down, normal game state, preparation mode, RT, big bonus, all winning lines L1~L6 the betting amount prescribed number is set is effective in regular bonus. The winning line is not limited to the lines indicated by L1 to L6, and may include, for example, a line extending over symbols arranged in the middle of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a role) is set on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L6. When the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped as a display result, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are given to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in the present embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1). If a combination of symbols with payout of medals is arranged on a plurality of activated pay lines, the total number of payouts determined for each combination of symbols arranged on the activated pay line is totaled. The total number of medals is awarded to the player. However, an upper limit (15 in this embodiment) is set for the number of medals to be awarded in one game. When the total number of medals exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit number of medals is given. Will be. In addition, when a combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the game state is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on any activated pay line L1 to L6, a game corresponding to the combination of symbols Transition to the state.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, after the game is started and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated to start changing the symbols, any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is When operated, the reels corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R stop rotating and the symbols are stopped and displayed. The maximum stop delay time from the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R to the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is 190 ms (milliseconds). The reels 2L, 2C and 2R rotate 80 times per minute, and 80 × 21 (the number of symbols per reel) = 1680 frames, so the maximum of 4 symbols is drawn in 190 ms. Will be able to. In other words, the symbols that can be selected as the stop symbols are the symbols that are displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and the symbols that are four frames ahead of them, for a total of five symbols.

  For this reason, for example, when any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated and the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the reel corresponding to the stop switch is used as a reference, the symbol from the symbol to four frames ahead Since the symbols can be displayed in the lower row, as a result, the symbols from the symbol to six frames ahead can be displayed in the upper row. That is, in each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, when any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated, within 7 frames including the symbols displayed on the lower row of the reel corresponding to the stop switch. The arranged symbols can be displayed on the winning line.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 4, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 101. The game state is controlled by the game control board 40, and the game state is controlled by the effect control board 90. The production according to the control is controlled, and the power supply board 101 generates the drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 and supplies them to each part.

  The power supply board 101 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and a DC voltage necessary for driving the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated from the AC100V power supply. The game control board 40 and the game control board 40 It is supplied to the production control board 90 connected through the.

  Further, the above-described hopper motor 34b, payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, stop switch 36a, automatic checkout switch 36b, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply board 101. Yes.

  On the game control board 40, the one-sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the settlement switch 10, the reset switch 23, the insertion medal sensor 31, the door opening detection switch 25, The reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R are connected, and the above-described payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, stop switch 36a, automatic settlement switch 36b, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply board 101. Are connected, and the detection signals of these connected switches are inputted.

  Further, the game control board 40 includes the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, the payout display 13, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 20, and the BET. The switch effective LED 21, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are connected to each other, and are described above via the power supply board 101. The hopper motor 34b is connected, and these electric components are driven based on control of a main control unit 41 (described later) mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 includes a microcomputer having a main CPU 41a, ROM 41b, RAM 41c, and I / O port 41d. The main control unit 41 controls the game, and a predetermined range (0 to 65535 in the present embodiment). Random number generation circuit 42 for generating a random number, sampling circuit 43 for acquiring a random number from the random number generation circuit, and switch detection for detecting a detection signal input from switches connected directly to the game control board 40 or via the power supply board 101 Circuit 44, motor drive circuit 45 that controls the drive of reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, solenoid drive circuit 46 that controls the drive of flow path switching solenoid 30, and various displays and LEDs connected to game control board 40 The LED drive circuit 47 that controls the power supplied to the slot machine 1 When the voltage is monitored and a voltage drop is detected, a power interruption detection circuit 48 that outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the main control unit 41, an initialization command is not input when the power is turned on or from the main CPU 41a A reset circuit 49 that sometimes gives a reset signal to the main CPU 41a, an electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, and an electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 A disconnection monitoring IC 50 for monitoring the above and other various devices and circuits are mounted.

  The main CPU 41a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timekeeping function and a timer interrupt, executes a program (described later) stored in the ROM 41b, and performs processing related to the progress of the game. Each part of the control circuit mounted on the game control board 40 is controlled directly or indirectly. The ROM 41b stores fixed data such as programs executed by the main CPU 41a and various tables. The RAM 41c is used as a work area when the main CPU 41a executes a program. The I / O port 41d inputs / outputs a control signal to / from each circuit connected via a signal input / output terminal included in the main control unit 41.

  The main control unit 41 is also supplied with backup power even during a power failure, and while the backup power is being supplied, the main CPU 41a performs a refresh operation to hold the data stored in the RAM 41c. It has become so.

  The random number generation circuit 42 is configured by a counter that counts up and updates the value every time a predetermined number of pulses are generated, as will be described later, and the sampling circuit 43 acquires the numerical value counted by the random number generation circuit 42. . The random number generation circuit 42 defines a range of numerical values to be counted for each type of random number, and in the present embodiment, 0 to 65535 is defined as the range. The main CPU 41a sends an instruction to the sampling circuit 43 according to the processing to acquire the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit 42 as a random number (this function is hereinafter referred to as a hardware random number function). Random numbers for internal lottery, which will be described later, are processed by software instead of using the random numbers extracted by the hardware random number function as they are. The main CPU 41a also has a function of updating a numerical value of a specific register by the above-described timer interrupt process (main) and acquiring the updated numerical value as a random number (hereinafter, this function is referred to as a software random number function). .

  In the power interruption interrupt processing, execution of other interrupt processing is prohibited with the start of the processing. Then, a process of saving all registers that may be in use to the RAM is performed. As a result, it is possible to return to the original processing when the power interruption is restored.

  Next, after all output ports are initialized, a RAM parity is calculated based on all data stored in the RAM, set in a predetermined parity storage area, and RAM access is prohibited. Then, a loop process in which no process is performed is entered. That is, when the voltage decreases as it is, the operation is stopped internally. Therefore, the main control unit 41 reliably stops operation when power is interrupted.

  Thus, in the power interruption processing, the RAM parity at that time is calculated and stored in the parity storage area, and stored in the RAM by comparing with the RAM parity calculated at the next startup. It is possible to check whether the data being processed is normal.

  Next, the reset circuit 49 outputs a reset signal to the main control unit 41 when the voltage rises to a level at which the main control unit 41 can be activated when the power is turned on, and activates the main control unit 41. When the value of the reset counter is counted up without being cleared based on a signal periodically output from the main control unit 41, that is, when the main control unit 41 does not operate for a certain time, The reset signal is output to restart the main control unit 41.

  The main CPU 41a transmits various commands to the effect control board 90 via the I / O port 41d. A command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the effect control board 90 to the game control board 40. The transmission line of the command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is composed of a strobe (INT) signal line, a data transmission line, and a ground line, and is connected via the effect relay board 80. The game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are not directly connected.

  The effect control board 90 is connected to the light receiving devices 57a and 57b constituting the touch panel described above, and detection signals of the connected light receiving devices 57a and 57b are input to the touch panel controller 99.

  The production control board 90 is connected to electrical components such as a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1), production effect LEDs 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LEDs 55 arranged on the front door 1b of the slot machine 1. The electrical components are driven based on control by a sub-control unit 91 (described later) mounted on the effect control board 90. The effect control board 90 is connected to the light emitting devices 56a and 56b constituting the touch panel described above, and the light emitting devices 56a and 56b are based on control by a touch panel controller 99 described later mounted on the effect control board 90. To be driven.

  Similar to the main control unit 41, the effect control board 90 includes a sub CPU 91a, a ROM 91b, a RAM 91c, and a microcomputer including an I / O port 91d. The sub control unit 91 controls the effect, and the effect control board 90. A display control circuit 92 for performing display control of the liquid crystal display 51 connected to the LED, an effect driving LED 52, an LED driving circuit 93 for controlling driving of the reel LED 55, an audio output circuit 94 for controlling audio output from the speakers 53, 54, Switch detection for detecting a detection signal input from a reset circuit 95 for supplying a reset signal to the sub CPU 91a when the power is turned on or when an initialization command from the sub CPU 91a is not input for a certain period of time, and switches connected to the effect control board 90 Circuit 96 outputs time information including date information and time information The clock device 97, the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 is monitored, and when a voltage drop is detected, a power interruption detection circuit 98 that outputs a voltage drop signal to that effect to the sub-control unit 91; A touch panel controller 99 for performing processing for specifying a position where a touch operation is performed on the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51 based on signals from the devices 56b and 57b, other circuits, and the like are mounted. In response to the command transmitted from the game control board 40 and the output information from the touch panel controller 99, various controls for performing the performance are performed, and each part of the control circuit mounted on the performance control board 90 is directly or Control indirectly.

  Similar to the main CPU 41a, the sub CPU 91a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function). The sub CPU 91a acquires a command from the main control unit 41 based on an input of a strobe (INT) signal output when the main control unit 41 transmits a command, and performs a command reception interrupt process for storing the command in the reception buffer. Run. In addition, the sub CPU 91a generates an interrupt at regular intervals and executes a timer interrupt process. Further, the sub CPU 91a executes a power interruption interrupt process according to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power interruption detection circuit 98.

  The sub-control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 91c is held while the backup power is supplied.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value. Specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using a winning probability corresponding to a set value in an internal lottery described later. The set value is composed of 6 levels of 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate, and the payout rate being lower in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. In other words, when 6 is set as the set value, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantages decrease stepwise in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.

  In order to change the set value, when the power of the slot machine 1 is in the ON state, it is necessary to turn it off once, and after the setting key switch 37 is turned on, the power of the slot machine 1 needs to be turned on. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the ON state, 1 is displayed as the initial value of the setting value on the setting value display 24, and the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38 is set. Transition. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when further operation is performed from the setting 6, the setting value is returned to the setting 1). . When the start switch 7 is operated, the set value is confirmed, and the confirmed set value is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned OFF, the game shifts to a state where the game can be started by setting the bet number. It should be noted that when the power of the slot machine 1 is in an ON state, an operation for turning it OFF once, an operation for turning the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned ON, an operation of the reset / setting switch 38, An operation necessary for setting the set value, such as an operation of the start switch 7 for determining the set value, is referred to as a setting change operation. The setting change operation is not limited to such an operation, and may be any operation as long as it is an operation for setting a setting value.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described. The storage area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is divided into an important work, a general work, a special work, a set value work, a stop phase work, a non-saved work, an unused area, and a stack area.

  The important work is a work in which data that is inconvenient to be initialized at the end of the BB, such as various display devices and LED display data, input / output data of the I / O port 41d, and a game time clock counter, is stored. General work consists of data that can be initialized at the end of the BB, such as a stop control table, a stop symbol, the number of medals paid out, the total number of medals paid out in the BB, and a winning flag that is initialized at the end of each game ) And a winning flag are stored.

  Special work, data for sending commands to the production control board 90, various software random numbers, etc., data that is initialized only before the start of setting, at the end of each game, at the time of winning and setting changes Winning flag (big bonus, regular bonus) that is initialized at the time (when changing to the setting change mode), gaming state flag for specifying the gaming state of the next game, the number of digested games reaches the predetermined number of games This is a work in which the number of remaining games controlled by the RT is stored when the game state is completed (for example, a normal game state described later). In the special work, an example in which the number of remaining games is stored will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of games digested after being controlled in the gaming state may be stored.

  The set value work is a work in which a set value used when performing a lottery in the internal lottery process is stored, and is set to 1 after 0 is stored in the initialization before the setting is started (before the transition to the setting change mode). The set value that is corrected and newly set at the end of the setting (when the setting change mode is ended) is stored.

  Even in the case of shifting to the setting change mode, in principle, information regarding the gaming state (the type of gaming state and the number of remaining games when in the normal gaming state) before the setting changing mode is maintained. Thereby, for example, when the mode is changed to the setting change mode during RT, the game state is controlled such that the replay winning probability of the RT is maintained even after the mode change mode is changed. In addition, when the game is shifted to the setting change mode during the normal game state that ends when the number of games reaches the predetermined number of games, the number of remaining games is also maintained. In addition, when the bonus winning flag is set for the special work and the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the winning flag is initialized. For example, in the case of shifting to the setting change mode during the bonus winning, the winning flag of the bonus is initialized, and when winning in the bonus lottery, the winning flag can be set again and the replay winning probability of the RT is maintained. Controlled by the state. For this reason, in principle, an area in which a game state flag for specifying the game state of the next game is stored is not initialized in connection with the setting change. As an exception, for example, when the gaming state before transition to the setting change mode is a bonus, a gaming state flag indicating, for example, a preparation mode is stored in relation to the setting change.

  The stop phase work is a work in which data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R is stored, and data indicating the stop phase is stored when the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are stopped. The Rukoto. The unsaved work is a work that holds the state of various switches, and a value is always set regardless of whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is destroyed at the time of activation. The unused area is an unused area in the storage area of the RAM 41c, and is initialized if any one of a plurality of initialization conditions described later is satisfied.

  The stack area is an area in which data saved from the register of the main CPU 41a is stored, and the unused stack area is established by any one of a plurality of initialization conditions to be described later, like the unused area. In this case, the used stack area is not initialized because the program continues.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a starts up when both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are ON, when a RAM error occurs, or when only the setting key switch 37 is ON. When the BB ends, when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both turned off and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed, six initialization conditions at the end of one game are satisfied. At this time, five types of initializations with different regions to be initialized are performed according to each initialization condition.

  Initialization 0 is initialization performed when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both ON at the time of start-up, and is performed when a change to the setting change mode is performed, or initialization performed when a RAM abnormality error occurs. Yes, in initialization 0, all areas (unused area and unused area) of the storage area of the RAM 41c except for the in-use stack area and the area where the game state flag for specifying the game state of the next game is stored (Including the stack area) is initialized and controlled to the initial gaming state.

  Initialization 1 is an initialization that is performed when only the setting key switch 37 is ON at the time of start-up and shifts to the setting change mode. In the initialization 1, the stack in use in the storage area of the RAM 41c. The area, the area in which the game state flag for specifying the game state of the next game is stored, and all areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) except for the stop phase work are initialized.

  Initialization 2 is initialization performed at the end of the BB. In initialization 2, a general work, an unused area, and an unused stack area are initialized in the storage area of the RAM 41c. Initialization 3 is an initialization performed when both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are in an OFF state at the time of startup and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed. The saved work, unused area, and unused stack area are initialized. Initialization 4 is initialization performed at the end of one game. In initialization 4, an unused area and an unused stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c are initialized.

  In this embodiment, an example in which initialization 0 and initialization 1 are performed at the end of the setting change mode will be described. However, the first game before the setting change mode, during the setting change mode, or after the setting change is performed. May be performed until the start is started (until the start switch 7 is operated). In this case, if the set value work is initialized, the determined set value is lost, so the set value work is not initialized.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a winning is awarded when a winning symbol is aligned on any winning line of the variable display device 2. The types of winning combinations are determined according to the state of the game, but can be broadly divided into special roles with transition to big bonus and regular bonus, small roles with payout of medals, and setting of bet number. There is a re-player who can start the next game without needing. The big bonus may be indicated as BB, and the regular bonus provided during the big bonus may be indicated as RB. In some cases, a big bonus or a regular bonus is simply referred to as a bonus. In order to win each winning combination determined according to the gaming state, it is necessary to win the internal lottery and set the winning flag of the winning combination in the RAM 41c.

  FIG. 5A is a diagram for explaining the types of winning combinations, symbol combinations of winning combinations, and technical matters related to winning combinations, and FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to a symbol combination and a special appearance. 6A is a diagram for explaining the transition of the gaming state controlled by the main control unit 41, and FIG. 6B shows the transition of the probability state controlled by the sub control unit 91. It is a figure for demonstrating.

  In the slot machine according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6 (a), the main control unit 41 has a predetermined advantageous condition (a special outcome stop described later) in the preparation mode and the preparation mode controlled after the bonus ends. RT controlled by establishment, normal game state controlled by establishment of predetermined end condition (falling replay winning to be described later) in the preparation mode and RT, internal RT controlled by bonus internal winning, It is controlled to any one of bonuses controlled by bonus winning. RT can be said to be an advantageous state for the player over the preparation mode and the normal gaming state in that the winning rate of the replay that does not involve the transition of the gaming state among the re-gamers is extremely high.

  In the slot machine according to the present embodiment, as described above, the main control unit 41 can control the gaming state to the preparation mode, RT, normal gaming state, internal RT, and bonus, while the gaming state is the preparation mode. When it is or RT, the sub control unit 91 can control the effect state during the assist time (hereinafter referred to as AT) that is a notification period in which the navigation effect for notifying the internal lottery result can be executed. A state in which the gaming state is the preparation mode and the production state is controlled by the AT is referred to as an AT preparation mode, and a state in which the gaming state is the preparation mode but the production state is not controlled by the AT is also referred to as a non-AT preparation mode. . A state in which the gaming state is RT and the effect state is controlled by AT is also referred to as ART, and a state in which the game state is RT but the effect state is not controlled by AT is also referred to as non-ART.

  In the slot machine according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6B, the sub-control unit 91 is controlled to a high probability state on condition that the bonus ends or melon winning which will be described later is performed. It is controlled to a low probability state on condition that the number of games is consumed or a bonus is won. When the probability state is a high probability state, or when the gaming state is in a bonus state, a point relating to the probability controlled by the AT is awarded by satisfying a predetermined point granting condition as will be described later.

  Referring to FIG. 5A, the special combination of the winning combinations includes a big bonus (1), a big bonus (2), and a regular bonus.

  The big bonus (1) is won when a combination of “red 7-red 7-red 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The big bonus (2) is awarded when a combination of “white 7-white 7-white 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines. When either of the big bonuses (1) or (2) is won, the gaming state shifts to the big bonus.

  When the big bonus is controlled, the regular bonus is repeatedly controlled until the big bonus ends. While the gaming state is the big bonus, a big bonus medium flag corresponding to the type of the big bonus won is set in the RAM 41c. Further, during the regular bonus, the regular bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c. That is, while the big bonus medium flag is set to the ON state, the regular bonus medium flag is repeatedly set to the ON state when the regular bonus medium flag is not set to the ON state when the game is started. The

  Big bonuses (1) and (2) end on condition that 270 or more medals have been paid out.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (a), the game state is controlled to the internal RT from when the big bonuses (1), (2) and the regular bonus are internally won until winning. In the internal RT, the probability of winning the replay is higher than that in the normal gaming state.

  When the big bonus is won, after the big bonus is over, all operations of the player are invalid except for the payment of credits, and the game is controlled in a frozen state in which the game cannot be progressed for a certain period of time. In addition, when the big bonus ends when the stop function is enabled, all operations of the player are invalidated except for the payment of credits, and reset to a stop state in which the game cannot be progressed. Control is performed until the / setting switch 38 is operated. Also, as shown in FIG. 6A, after the big bonus is over, the gaming state is controlled to the preparation mode.

  The regular bonus is awarded when a combination of “white 7-white 7-red 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines. When the regular bonus is won, the gaming state shifts to the regular bonus.

  When the regular bonus is won, the regular bonus is controlled until 12 games are consumed or 8 times. While the game state is in the regular bonus, the regular bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the game state is controlled to the above-described internal RT until the regular bonus is won after the regular bonus is won internally.

  In addition, when the regular bonus is won, after the regular bonus is over, all operations of the player are invalid except for the payment of credits, and the game is controlled in a frozen state in which the game cannot be progressed for a certain period of time. In addition, when the regular bonus ends when the stop function is enabled, all operations of the player are disabled except for the payment of credits, and reset to a stop state in which the progress of the game becomes impossible Control is performed until the / setting switch 38 is operated. In addition, as shown in FIG. 6A, after the regular bonus is ended, the gaming state is controlled to the preparation mode in the same manner as when the big bonus is ended.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, when the probability state controlled by the sub-control unit 91 is a high probability state, when the big bonus or regular bonus is won, the probability state is controlled to a low probability state. After the regular bonus ends, the low probability state is controlled to the high probability state. The high probability state controlled by the end of the big bonus or the regular bonus is continuously controlled until 50 games are consumed or the bonus is won.

  In this embodiment, when one of the big bonuses (1), (2), and the regular bonus is won and when it is finished, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not to control the effect state to AT. AT lottery to be performed. The AT lottery includes a first AT lottery for lottery according to the probability corresponding to the total number of points given, and a second AT lottery for lottery according to the probability corresponding to the established lottery condition.

  The AT lottery refers to a lottery for the sub-control unit 91 to determine, for example, whether or not to control to AT using a random number extracted from a random counter and a period during which AT can be controlled. Further, the AT lottery is not limited to when the bonus is won or when the bonus is ended, but is also executed by using a predetermined number of games in the non-AT preparation mode or non-ART as will be described later. When the sub-control unit 91 is won in the bonus lottery or the AT lottery by the end of the bonus, the presentation state is controlled to AT after the bonus ends, and the sub-control unit 91 is won in the AT lottery by using a predetermined number of games in the non-AT preparation mode or non-ART. Sometimes the production state is controlled to AT from the next game or the game won for the fall replay.

  Even if one of the big bonus and regular bonus is won in the internal lottery to be described later, if the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is not operated at an appropriate timing to make it possible to win these roles, There will be no winnings. This is because the symbols (“red 7” and “white 7”) constituting the big bonus and the regular bonus are not arranged within 7 frames in each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

  Next, the small combination among the winning combinations will be described. Among the winning combinations, the small combinations include strawberry (1), strawberry (2), melon, and nine-piece combination (1) to nine-piece combination (9). Among the small roles, melon is awarded when a combination of “melon-melon-melon” is arranged on any of the winning lines. When melon wins, 9 medals are paid out. In principle, the melon can be awarded regardless of the operation procedure of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. This is because the symbols constituting the melon ("melon") are arranged within 7 frames in each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, when the melon is won when the probability state controlled by the sub control unit 91 is the low probability state, whether or not the sub control unit 91 controls the high probability state. A high probability lottery will be held. In addition, when the winning is performed by the high probability state lottery, the sub control unit 91 controls the probability state to the high probability state. The probability of winning in the high probability state lottery is set to 50%, for example. The high-probability state controlled by winning the high-probability state lottery is continuously controlled until 30 games are consumed or a bonus is won.

  In addition, when the probability state controlled by the sub-control unit 91 is a high probability state, the point granting lottery for determining whether or not to give a point related to the winning probability of the first AT lottery is triggered by winning the melon. Executed. In addition, when the melon is won in the low probability state, and when it is won by the high probability state lottery and controlled to the high probability state, the point giving lottery is further executed. As a result, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning the melon in the low probability state.

  Next, among the small roles, strawberry (1) becomes a winning when a symbol of “black strawberry” is derived on one of the winning lines for reel 2L, and two medals are paid out. Among the small roles, the strawberry (2) is awarded when the symbol “white strawberry” is derived on one of the winning lines for the reel 2L, and two medals are paid out. If the symbol “black strawberry” or “white strawberry” stops at the upper or lower level of the left reel 2L, the winning lines L1, L3, L5 or the winning lines L2, L4, L6 are on the three winning lines. Since winning the strawberry (1) or strawberry (2), 6 medals are paid out.

  If the strawberry (1) or the strawberry (2) is won during the bonus, a notification promoting condition that promotes the control to the AT is established, as will be described later with reference to FIG. Specifically, when the notification promotion condition is established by winning strawberry (1) or strawberry (2) in the bonus, processing for ensuring that the AT is controlled after the bonus ends. In the present embodiment, the notification promoting condition that is more advantageous for the player is established when the strawberry (2) is won than when the strawberry (2) is not won.

  In addition, if the strawberry (1) or the strawberry (2) is won in the high probability state, the points related to the winning probability of the first AT lottery are always given.

  Further, only in the game where the strawberry (1) or the strawberry (2) is won, special reel control is performed so that a special outcome can be stopped on the winning line. Thereby, even if it is a case where neither a strawberry (1) nor a strawberry (2) is won, a special turn is stopped, and the strawberry (1) or the strawberry (2) is won. This can be notified to the player.

  Next, nine-piece roles (1) to (9) will be described. The 9-piece winning combination (1) is awarded when a combination of “red 7-blank (1) -red 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines. The 9-piece combination (2) wins when a combination of “white 7-blank (1) -red 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines. The 9-piece winning combination (3) is awarded when the combination of “BAR-Blank (1) -Red 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines. The 9-piece winning combination (4) is awarded when a combination of “red 7-blank (1) -white 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The 9-piece winning combination (5) is awarded when a combination of “white 7-blank (1) -white 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The 9-piece winning combination (6) is awarded when the combination of “BAR-Blank (1) -White 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines. The 9-piece winning combination (7) is awarded when a combination of “red 7-blank (1) -BAR” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The 9-piece winning combination (8) is awarded when a combination of “white 7-blank (1) -BAR” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The 9-piece winning combination (9) is awarded when the combination of “BAR-Blank (1) -BAR” is aligned on any of the winning lines.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the symbols constituting each of the nine-piece roles (1) to (9) are not arranged within 7 frames on the reels 2L and 2R, but are arranged within 7 frames on the reel 2C. ing. For this reason, even if one of the nine winning combinations (1) to (9) is won in the internal lottery to be described later, the stop switches 8L and 8R must be operated at an appropriate timing to enable winning of these winning combinations. , I will not win the winning nine-piece role.

  Further, the left symbol and the right symbol constituting each of the nine winning combinations (1) to (9) are arranged 7 frames apart on each of the reels 2L and 2R. For this reason, the combination of the operation timings of the stop switches 8L to 8R ("operation procedure") for deriving each of the 9-sheet roles (1) to (9) is different for each of the 9-sheet roles (1) to (9). Can be made. For example, the operation procedure for deriving the nine-piece combination (1) is to operate the stop switch 8L at a timing at which “red 7” of the left reel 2L can be drawn into the pay line, and “red 7” of the right reel 2R. Is a procedure for operating the stop switch 8R at a timing at which can be drawn into the winning line. The operation procedure for deriving the 9-piece combination (9) is that the “BAR” of the left reel 2L is operated at a timing at which the “BAR” can be pulled into the winning line, and the “BAR” of the right reel 2R is won. This is a procedure for operating the stop switch 8R at a timing that can be pulled into the line.

  In a state where it is not recognized which of the nine winning combinations (1) to (9) is won, when the stop switches 8L and 8R are operated, the left symbol and the right constituting the winning nine winning combination The symbol is drawn with a probability of 1/3 × 1/3 = 1/9 and won, and the other 8/9 cannot be drawn and cannot win.

  On the other hand, the nine role combinations (1) to (9) are navigation target combinations in which a navigation effect corresponding to the selected type is executed on the condition that it is the above-described ART. For this reason, when it is ART, information corresponding to the winning nine winning combination is notified. The information corresponding to the type of the winning combination may be, for example, information that can specify the type of the nine winning combination, and the operation procedure for winning the winning nine winning combination can be specified. It may be information. As a result, in ART, the player can recognize the type of the 9 winning combination and can operate the stop switches 8L and 8R at an appropriate timing for winning the notified 9 winning combination. As a result, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of 9-piece missing.

  In addition, refer to FIG. 29 when the nine winning combinations (1) to (9) are won during the above-described non-ART or during the period from when the RT is controlled to the normal gaming state until the predetermined number of games are consumed. As will be described later, a navigation effect corresponding to the type selected in accordance with a predetermined probability is executed. For this reason, the occurrence of a missing piece can be reduced even when the nine winning combination is not controlled by the AT.

  In addition, when the gaming state is in bonus, points related to the winning probability of the 1st AT lottery will always be given when any of the nine winning combinations (1) to (9) wins and wins alone. Is done.

  Next, among the winning combinations, the replaying combination will be described. Among the winning combinations, the replaying combination includes replay, falling replay, and BAR replay. When you win one of the re-players, you will not be paid out medals, but you can start the next game without setting the number of bets again. This is essentially the same as when medals are paid out.

  Replay is awarded when a combination of “banana-banana-banana” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The symbols constituting the replay (“banana”) are arranged within 7 frames on each reel. Therefore, as a rule, it can be said that the replay is a role that can win a prize regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R if it is won.

  The tumble replay is awarded when a combination of “melon-banana-banana” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The symbols constituting the tumble replay ("melon" on the left reel 2L, "reel" on the middle reel 2C, and "banana" on the right reel 2R) are arranged within 7 frames on each reel. Therefore, it can be said that, as a general rule, the fall replay can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R if it is won. As shown in FIG. 6A, after winning the fall replay in the preparation mode or RT, the game state is controlled to the normal gaming state. In addition, when winning a fall replay in the AT preparation mode or ART, the gaming state is controlled to the normal gaming state and the AT is terminated.

  The fall replay is a navigation target combination in which a navigation effect corresponding to the type of replay selected is executed on condition that the AT preparation mode or ART described above is used. Therefore, in the AT preparation mode or ART, when the fall replay is won, information corresponding to the type of replay won simultaneously with the fall replay is notified. The information corresponding to the type of replay that was won at the same time as the fall replay may be information that can identify the type of replay that was won at the same time, and the winning of the fall replay according to the type of replay that was won at the same time. It may be information that can specify an operation procedure for avoiding the problem. Thereby, in AT preparation mode or ART, a fall replay winning can be avoided, and as a result, it can intentionally avoid being controlled to a normal gaming state.

  On the other hand, in the non-AT preparation mode or non-ART, even if the fall replay is won, the navigation effect is not executed, so the fall replay winning can not be intentionally avoided, and the game is controlled to the normal gaming state. It can be said that the possibility of being increased. In this way, when controlled in the preparation mode or RT, depending on whether or not the production state is AT, the difference in the player's advantage is increased, and the AT is selected in the AT lottery. The expectation for winning can be effectively increased, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  The BAR replay is awarded when a combination of “BAR-banana-banana” is arranged on any of the winning lines. Among the symbols constituting the BAR replay, the symbols (“banana”) of the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R are arranged within seven frames on each reel. On the other hand, among the symbols constituting the BAR replay, the symbol (“BAR”) of the left reel 2L is not arranged within seven frames on the left reel 2L. For this reason, even if the BAR replay is won in the internal lottery, the BAR replay is not won unless the stop switch 8L is operated at an appropriate timing.

  Next, the special appearance will be described with reference to FIG. For the special outcome, the symbol of the left reel 2L among the symbol combinations (9) (1) to (9) on any of the winning lines is “red 7 / white 7 / BAR (“ / ”is“ or ” "Meaning") is replaced with "blank (2)" in three types of combinations (blank (2) -blank (1) -red 7 / white 7 / BAR), and the pattern of the right reel 2R is "red 7". / White 7 / BAR "is replaced with" Blank (1) "(Red 7 / White 7 / BAR-Blank (1) -Blank (1)), and the design of the left reel 2L is" Blank (2 ) "And a combination (blank (2) -blank (1) -blank (1)) in which the design of the right reel 2R is replaced with" blank (1) ". In this way, the symbols constituting the special outcome are arranged within 7 frames in each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. For this reason, in principle, the special outcome can be stopped at any of the pay lines L1 to L6 regardless of the operation procedure of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R.

  In the present embodiment, the reel control for stopping at any one of the pay lines L1 to L6 in the present embodiment is when any of the nine winning combinations (1) to (9) is won in any gaming state. This is only done when the 9 winning winning combinations are missed. On the other hand, as described above, the special outcome can be stopped at any of the pay lines L1 to L6 regardless of the operation procedure of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. Therefore, when any of the nine winning combinations (1) to (9) is won, the symbols constituting the winning nine winning combinations are stopped on any of the winning lines L1 to L6. If this is not possible, the special event can be stopped at any of the winning lines L1 to L6.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, after the special outcome is stopped in the preparation mode, the control is performed to RT. RT is continuously controlled until a big bonus or a regular bonus is won or until a fall replay is won. It should be noted that even if the special game is stopped in a normal game state other than the preparation mode, a bonus, an internal RT, etc., it is not controlled by RT. Further, even if the special outcome is stopped at the RT, the control to the RT is maintained.

  Next, the internal lottery will be described. In the internal lottery, the variable display device 2 determines whether or not each of the winning combinations described above is permitted, that is, whether or not the symbol combination that generates the winning combination is allowed to perform control for aligning with any winning line. Is determined before the display result is derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 7 is operated). In the internal lottery, a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535) is acquired from the random number generation circuit 42. Then, for each combination determined according to the gaming state, the obtained random number for internal lottery, the gaming state, and the determination value of each winning combination determined according to the set value set by the reset / setting switch 38 Depending on the number.

  Here, a lottery target combination determined for each gaming state as an internal lottery target and the number of determination values of the lottery target combination will be described. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing each lottery target combination and the number of determination values acquired based on the gaming state and the set value. The lottery object combination and the number of determination values shown in FIG. 7 are stored in a predetermined storage area allocated to the ROM 41b, for example. In the internal lottery, the number of determination values determined for the lottery subject in accordance with the game state is sequentially added to the random number for internal lottery extracted at the start of the game, and the addition result overflows a predetermined value (for example, 65536). Sometimes, it is determined that the winning combination for the lottery is won. If the winning combination is determined, the winning flag for the winning combination is set in the RAM 41c.

  FIG. 7A is a diagram showing a lottery target combination and the number of determination values that are internally drawn when the gaming state is the normal gaming state. In the normal game state, the lottery target is the big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus, replay, replay + fall replay, replay + fall replay + BAR replay, strawberry (1) + strawberry (2) , Melon, 9-sheet combination (1), 9-sheet combination (2), 9-sheet combination (3), 9-sheet combination (4), 9-sheet combination (5), 9-sheet combination (6), 9-sheet combination (7 ), 9-piece combination (8), and 9-piece combination (9) are sequentially read as lottery targets. Note that “+” is written between winning combinations to indicate that the winning combination is read out simultaneously in the internal lottery. For example, in the case of “replay + falling replay”, it indicates that the replay and the falling replay are simultaneously read out as the lottery target combination in the internal lottery.

  When the set value is 1, when “80” is the regular bonus when the target of the internal lottery is the big bonus (1) and “80” is the big bonus (2) When “100” is replay, “3860” is replay + tumbling replay, “2560” is replay + tumbling replay + BAR replay, and “2560” is strawberry (1) + strawberry ( 2) “700” is acquired as the number of determination values, “7000” is acquired as a melon, and “1000” is acquired as one of the nine combinations (1) to (9). . FIG. 7A also shows the number of determination values of each lottery object combination acquired in the internal lottery when the set value is 2 to 4.

  As shown in FIG. 7A, the larger the value set as the set value, the larger the number of determination values acquired in the internal lottery for the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus. Yes. As a result, the larger the set value, the higher the probability of winning the special combination in the internal lottery.

  FIGS. 7B to 7D show the game state when the game state is the preparation mode, RT, and internal RT, and in the internal lottery, replay, replay + falling replay, replay + falling replay + BAR replay are lottery. It is a figure which shows the number of judgment values acquired when read as an object combination. In addition, when the game state is the preparation mode, RT, internal RT, the number of determination values acquired other than lottery for each of replay, replay + fall replay, replay + fall replay + BAR replay is shown in FIG. This is the same as the number of judgment values shown. That is, the number of determination values of each lottery target acquired in the internal lottery when the game state is the preparation mode, RT, and internal medium RT are the replay, replay + falling replay, and replay + shown in FIG. The number of determination values acquired in each internal lottery of the fall replay + BAR replay is determined by the replay, replay + fall replay, and replay + fall replay + BAR replay shown in FIGS. 7B to 7D. It is replaced with the number of values. In addition, when the internal RT is already set, any bonus winning flag such as big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus, etc. has already been set. Even in such a case, the already set bonus winning flag is maintained, and the winning bonus winning flag is not reset or updated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the bonus from being drawn and won again in the internal RT that has already won the bonus.

  FIG. 7B is a diagram showing the number of determination values acquired in the internal lottery of each of replay, fall replay, and BAR replay when the gaming state is a preparation mode controlled after the bonus ends. For example, when the set value is 1 to 4, “105” is “replay + falling replay + BAR replay” when the target of the internal lottery is replaying, and “16450” is replay + falling replaying. Sometimes “16450” is acquired as the number of determination values.

  FIG. 7 (c) shows the RT controlled by stopping the special game when the game state is the preparation mode, and is acquired in the internal lottery for each of the replay, the fall replay, and the BAR replay. It is a figure which shows the number of judgment values. For example, when the set value is 1 to 4, “30000” is “replay + tumbling replay + BAR replay” when the target role of the internal lottery is replay, and “8880” is replay + falling replay. Sometimes “8880” is acquired as the number of determination values.

  FIG. 7 (d) shows a case where the game state is an internal medium RT controlled from when the bonus is won internally until winning, and the number of determination values acquired in the internal lottery of replay, fall replay, and BAR replay FIG. For example, when the set value is 1 to 4, “10000” is replay + tumbling replay + BAR replay when the target of the internal lottery is replay, and “5000” is replay + falling replay. Sometimes “5000” is acquired as the number of judgment values.

  Here, the winning rate of the fall replay in each gaming state will be described. The winning rate of fall replay per game is 5120 / 65536≈8% in the normal gaming state, and 32900 / 65536≈50% in the normal mode, based on the total number of fall replay judgment values. 17760 / 65536≈27% when RT, and 10000 / 65536≈15% when inside RT. As a result, the winning rate of the fall replay per game is such that even if the fall replay wins, the game state is maintained and the normal game state is achieved by winning the fall replay than in the case of the internal RT. It is set to be higher in the preparation mode that suffers the disadvantage of being controlled by the system and in the RT mode.

  Further, in the preparation mode, the RT is controlled when the above-mentioned special outcome is stopped. The appearance rate of the special appearance per game in the preparation mode is (9000/65536) × (8/9) ≈12% based on the number of judgment values and the missed rate of the nine-player roles (1) to (9). . That is, in the preparation mode, the winning rate of the fall replay is set to be higher than the appearance rate of the special roll. Therefore, in the preparation mode, it can be said that there is a high possibility of winning the fall replay before the special outcome is stopped.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when paying attention to the winning rate of falling replay per game, the winning rate of falling replay per game is higher in the preparation mode than in RT. It is set to be. Thereby, in the preparation mode, it is possible to further increase the possibility of winning a fall replay and winning a prize as compared with the case of RT. Therefore, for example, in the non-AT preparation mode, it can be said that it is easier to control to the normal gaming state by winning the fall replay than the non-ART.

  On the other hand, in the case of the non-AT preparation mode, if the special roll is stopped first and the luck is controlled to RT fortunately without winning the fall replay, the fall replay win rate is higher than that in the preparation mode. The lower the chance of winning a prize. For this reason, when it is fortunately controlled to RT, the player can have a sense of expectation that the RT will be maintained without winning the fall replay than when in the preparation mode.

  FIG. 7E is a diagram illustrating the number of determination values for each lottery target combination acquired in the internal lottery when the gaming state is a bonus. When the gaming state is a bonus, the lottery target roles are all nine (1) to (9) (all nine types (1) to (9)), strawberry (1) + strawberry (2 ), Melon, nine-piece combination (1), nine-piece combination (2), nine-piece combination (3), nine-piece combination (4), nine-piece combination (5), nine-piece combination (6), nine-piece combination ( 7), 9-piece combination (8), and 9-piece combination (9) are sequentially read out as lottery targets.

  Then, when the set value is 1, “55935” when the target combination of the internal lottery is all nine (1) to (9) and “200” when the combination is strawberry (1), (1) + “strawberry” (2), “100” is determined, “3000” is determined, and “700” is determined when any of the nine roles (1) to (9) is selected. Get as number of values. FIG. 7 (e) also shows the number of determination values of each lottery target combination acquired in the internal lottery when the set value is 2 to 4. From the number of determination values shown in FIG. 7E, when the gaming state is in bonus, all nine winning combinations (1) to (9) are won with high probability.

Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R will be described.
The main CPU 41a refers to the table index and table creation data stored in the ROM 41b when the reel starts rotating and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. Create a stop control table for each reel. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to, and the referred stop control table is drawn. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  In the table index, an index that indicates the start address of the area in which the data for table creation is stored, from the reference address when referring to the table index, according to the setting state of the winning flag by internal lottery (hereinafter referred to as the internal winning state) Differences up to the address where the data is stored are registered. As a result, a difference corresponding to the internal winning state is acquired, and the corresponding index data can be acquired by adding the difference to the reference address. Even if the winning status of the combination is different, when the same control is applied, the same address is stored as the index data. In such a case, the same table creation data is referred to. Thus, a stop control table is created.

  The table creation data includes a stop control table indicating the number of frames to be drawn according to the stop operation position, and an address of the stop control table to be referred to according to the reel stop status.

  The stop control table referred to according to the reel stop status is whether all reels are rotating, only the left reel is stopped, only the middle reel is stopped, only the right reel is stopped, It may vary depending on whether the middle reel is stopped, the left and right reels are stopped, the middle and right reels are stopped, and if any reel is stopped, stop Since there may be differences depending on the stop position of the reels already completed, the address of the stop control table to be referenced for each situation is registered for each rotating reel, and based on the top address of the table creation data, It is possible to specify the address of the stop control table that should be referred to according to the status of each, and it is necessary according to each status from this specified address. And to be able to identify the stop control table. Even when the stop status of the reels and the stop position of the stopped reels are different, when the same stop control table is applied, the same address may be registered as the address of the stop control table. In such a case, the same stop control table is referred to.

  The stop control table is data that can specify the number of frames to be pulled in at each timing when the stop operation is performed. In the present embodiment, stepping motors that make one turn at a cycle of 168 steps (0 to 167) are used for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. That is, when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven for 168 steps, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R make one round. Then, 21 areas (frames) divided every 8 steps (the number of steps in which one symbol moves) per reel are defined, and these areas are set to 0 to 20 (see FIG. 3) is assigned.

  On the other hand, the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 21, and symbol numbers 0 to 20 from the reel reference position are assigned to symbols on each reel, so symbols 0 to 20 are assigned to each reel. , Area numbers 0 to 20 are assigned in order. In the stop control table, the number of drawn frames by area number is compressed and stored according to a predetermined rule, and the number of drawn frames by area number can be acquired by expanding the stop control table. Yes.

  As described above, the stop control table created by referring to the table index and the table creation data corresponds to the area number, and the area corresponding to each area number has a stop reference position (in this embodiment, a perspective window). 3 when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected at the timing (the timing in which the number of steps from the reel reference position is included in the range of the number of steps). This is a table in which the number of frames is set.

  Next, the procedure for creating the stop control table will be described. First, at the start of reel rotation, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game is acquired. Specifically, the table index is first referred to, index data corresponding to the internal winning state is obtained, table creation data is identified based on the obtained index data, and all reels are identified from the identified table creation data. The address of the stop control table for each reel corresponding to the state of rotation is acquired, and the stop control table for each reel stored at the acquired address is expanded to generate a stop control table for all reels.

  Further, when any one reel stops or any two reels stop, the index data acquired at the start of reel rotation, that is, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game The table creation data is identified based on the obtained table creation data, and the address of the stop control table for the unreacted reel corresponding to the stop reel and the area number of the stop position of the reel is obtained from the identified table creation data. The stop control table for each stored reel is expanded to create a stop control table for the unstopped reels.

  Next, when the main CPU 41a effectively detects any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel, the control when the display result is derived to the corresponding reel will be described. .

  If any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is detected effectively, the area number of the stop operation position is based on the number of steps from the reel reference position when the stop operation is detected. And the number of drawn frames corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is acquired by referring to the stop control table of the reel where the stop operation is detected. Then, control is performed to rotate and stop the reel by the number of acquired frames. Specifically, from the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, the number of steps from the acquired number of drawn frames until it is stopped is calculated, and the reel is rotated and stopped by the calculated number of steps. Take control. Thereby, the area corresponding to the area number that is the stop position ahead of the number of frames to be drawn in from the area corresponding to the area number of the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the perspective window 3 The lower symbol area).

  In the table index of the present embodiment, only one address is stored as index data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state, and one table creation data includes one reel. Only one address is stored as the address of the storage area of the stop control table corresponding to the stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). That is, the table creation data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state and the stop control table corresponding to the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are uniquely determined. The stop control table created with reference to is unique for one internal winning state in one gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). Therefore, when all of the gaming state, the internal winning state, and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are the same, the reel is based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. The stop control is performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is determined as the number of drawn frames, and the reel can be stopped by drawing a maximum of four symbols after detecting a stop operation. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of a maximum of 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. The symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five symbols including the operation position.

  In the present embodiment, when any of the winning combinations is won, the winning combination is drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames on the winning line, and the winning combination is drawn not to be aligned on the winning line. Create a stop control table with the number of frames to be drawn in and perform reel stop control. If none of the roles are won, stop control with a number of frames to be drawn that does not match any of the roles A table is created and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if the winning combination can be stopped on the winning line within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed so that the winning combination is stopped. If the winning combination is not drawn, it will be controlled so that it can be stopped in a drawing range of up to 4 frames.

  If a special role has been carried over from before the previous game and a small role (such as strawberry (1), melon, 9-card role (1)) is won, etc., the winning small role will be 4 frames on the winning line. The number of draws is determined so that the maximum number of draws can be drawn in the range, and for the stop operation position where the selected small role cannot be drawn into the winning line in the range of up to 4 frames, the selected special role is 4 in the winning line. A stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn is determined so that the maximum number of frames can be drawn in the range of frames is created, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if it is possible to stop all the small roles that have been selected in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line and stop them, the control is performed so that the winning combination is stopped. If you can't draw a small role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the line, if you can stop with a special role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line, Control is performed to align and stop them, and a winning combination that has not been won will be controlled to be stopped within the 4-frame pull-in range. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the small combination on the winning line over the special combination, and the special combination can be won only when the normal small combination cannot be drawn. As a result, after winning a small role and then winning a special role, the special role is won, and compared to the case where the special role is preferentially won, Since the special combination can be won, the player's medal can be increased as much as possible before the special combination is won, and reel control advantageous to the player is performed.

  For example, when a special combination and a melon with a payout number of more than 3 are selected, reel control is performed preferentially, which is a 6-plus increase by winning a special combination before winning the special combination, which is advantageous to the player. . When a special combination and a small combination can be withdrawn at the same time, only the small combination is drawn, and the special combination is not arranged on the winning line at the same time as the small combination.

  In the reel control, an example is described in which reel control is performed in which a small role is preferentially aligned on a winning line over a special role. However, not all small roles are preferentially aligned over a special role. A small role in which medals greater than or equal to the number of wagers are paid out (in the case of 3 bets, a small role in which 3 or more medals are paid out, for example, a melon that pays out 9 medals by winning, 9), etc. (hereinafter also referred to as a normal small combination), the reel control is preferentially arranged, and a small combination in which medals less than the bet number are paid out (when the bet number is 3, small medals less than 3 are paid out) For a combination, for example, when a single combination that pays out one medal by winning is set as a winning combination, the special combination is given priority on the winning line. It may be configured to perform the reel control to align. Thereby, even if winning is made, it is possible to prevent the reel control from being preferentially aligned even for the small role that is disadvantageous for the player because the payout is less than the bet amount.

  Next, when a special role and a replaying role are won at the same time (such as a big bonus (1) + replay), such as when a replaying role is won while the special role has been carried over before the previous game Then, a stop control table in which the number of drawn-in frames is determined so as to draw the selected re-gamer to the winning line in the range of four frames to the maximum is created, and the reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, control is performed in which the symbols of the re-gamer are aligned and stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames.

  When multiple types of re-playing players are elected at the same time (such as replay + fall replay (the same is true when they are elected at the same time as special roles)), as shown in FIG. A re-gamer determined on the winning line according to the type of game player and whether the first reeled-out reel (first stopped reel) is a left reel, middle reel, or right reel Control is performed to stop evenly in the drawing range of up to 4 frames. FIG. 8A is a diagram for explaining the reel control when winning the fall replay.

  For example, when the replay + falling replay is won and the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time, control is performed to stop the combination of the falling replays in any winning line among the selected re-game players. As shown in FIG. 3, symbols constituting the fall replay are arranged at intervals of 7 frames or less on each reel, and L1 to L6 are set as the winning lines, so that the replay + fall replay is won. When the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time, the reel control is performed so that the falling replay always wins regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  On the other hand, when the replay + falling replay is won and the left reel 2L or the middle reel 2C is stopped for the first time, the replay combination of the selected replaying players is stopped on one winning line. To do. As shown in FIG. 3, the symbols constituting the replay are arranged at intervals of 7 frames or less on each reel, and L1 to L6 are set as the winning lines. When the left reel 2L or the middle reel 2C is stopped for the first time, the reel control is performed so that the replay always wins regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  In addition, when replay + falling replay + BAR replay is won and the left reel 2L or the middle reel 2C is stopped for the first time, the combination of the falling replays among the selected replaying players is aligned with any winning line and stopped. To control. For this reason, when the replay + falling replay + BAR replay is won and the left reel 2L or the middle reel 2C is first stopped, the falling replay is performed regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. Reel control is performed so that will always win.

  On the other hand, when the replay + falling replay + BAR replay is won and the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time, control is performed to align and stop the combination of replays on any winning line among the selected re-game players. . For this reason, when the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time when the replay + tumbling replay + BAR replay is won, the replay always wins regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. Reel control is performed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the first stop reel for avoiding the falling replay winning and making the replay winning different depending on whether the replay + falling replay is won or the replay + falling replay + BAR replay is won. The operation procedure (avoidance procedure) can be made different.

  Further, when the fall replay is won when the production state is not AT, the type of replay won at the same time as the fall replay cannot be specified. For this reason, the replay winning is avoided by avoiding the falling replay winning with the probability of 1/2, but the falling replay is won with the remaining probability of 1/2.

  On the other hand, when the fall state replay is won when the production state is AT, the type of replay won at the same time as the fall replay can be specified. For this reason, as long as the operation is not mistaken, the first stop can be made so that the replay winning is always avoided while avoiding the falling replay winning.

  As described above, since the winning rate of falling replay per game when in the preparation mode is 50%, the winning rate of falling replay is 25% in consideration of the reel control. Therefore, the average number of games in the non-AT preparation mode that can be digested without winning a fall replay is about 4 games from the fall replay win rate. As a result, it is possible to prevent the preparation mode from being continuously controlled over a long period of time even though the effect state is not controlled by the AT.

  In addition, the winning rate for the fall replay, particularly during the preparation mode, is still higher than 12% of the appearance rate of the special event that triggers the RT control. For this reason, in the preparation mode, even if the probability of accidentally dropping the fall replay is taken into account, it can be said that there is a high possibility of winning the fall replay before the special outcome is stopped. For this reason, when in the non-AT preparation mode, the internal winning situation cannot be grasped, and the fall replay is performed before the special outcome is stopped based on the winning rate of the fall fall and the appearance rate of the special outcome. Since the possibility of winning and winning is increased, it can be easily controlled to the normal gaming state and difficult to be controlled by RT.

  On the other hand, when in the AT preparation mode, the internal winning situation can be grasped, and even if the winning rate of the falling replay has a high probability, the falling replay winning can be intentionally avoided. For this reason, when in the AT preparation mode, it is possible to avoid the control to the normal gaming state, and it is possible to control the RT as a result by stopping the special game.

  That is, a preparation mode is provided as a previous game state controlled to RT advantageous for the player, and when the performance state in the preparation mode is not controlled by the AT, it is easy to control from the preparation mode to the normal game state. Thus, it is difficult to control to RT, and when the effect state in the preparation mode is controlled to AT, RT can be surely controlled. For this reason, the difference in the degree of advantage for the player can be increased depending on whether or not the performance state in the preparation mode is controlled by the AT, so that a sense of expectation that the performance state is controlled by the AT can be given. It can be increased effectively and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, since the win rate of the fall replay per game during RT is 27%, the winning rate of the fall replay is 13.5% in consideration of the reel control.

  Therefore, the average number of non-ART games that can be digested without winning a fall replay is about 7.4 games based on the fall replay win rate. As a result, it is possible to prevent the RT from being continuously controlled over a long period of time even though the performance state is not controlled by the AT, and it is difficult to maintain the RT, and it is easy to control the normal gaming state. can do.

  On the other hand, when it is ART, the internal winning situation can be grasped, and even if the winning rate of the falling replay has a high probability, the falling replay winning can be intentionally avoided. For this reason, when it is ART, it can avoid being controlled to a normal game state, and RT can be maintained as a result.

  That is, even if the non-AT preparation mode is fortunately controlled to non-ART, it is difficult to maintain the RT by making it easily controlled to the normal gaming state, and the RT can be reliably continued when it is ART. For this reason, the difference in the degree of advantage for the player can be increased depending on whether or not the performance state in RT is controlled by the AT, so that a sense of expectation for the fact that the performance state is controlled by the AT is effective. Can increase the interest of the game.

  When multiple types of small roles are won at the same time (strawberry (1) + strawberry (2), all nine roles (1) to (9), etc.), the winning line will be displayed according to the timing of the stop operation. In addition, the symbols that make up the winning small combination that can be pulled in within the maximum four-frame drawing range are aligned and stopped. When all 9 winning combinations (1) to (9) are won, any one of the combinations of 9 winning combinations (1) to (9) shown in FIG. Reel control is performed to win a prize. When winning strawberry (1) + strawberry (2), either one of the symbol combinations of strawberry (1) and strawberry (2) shown in FIG. 5 will be awarded regardless of the timing of the stop operation. Reel control is performed.

  In this embodiment, when winning a strawberry, reel control is performed to draw the symbols constituting the winning strawberry for the left reel 2L on the winning line in a drawing range of up to 4 frames, and a special reel is used for the middle reel 2C. Reel control is performed. FIG. 8B is a diagram for explaining the special reel control of the middle reel 2C when winning a strawberry.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 8 (b), symbol number 5 is provided on condition that at least strawberry (1) is won (strawberry (1) + strawberry (2) winning or strawberry (1) alone winning). Special reel control is performed to draw the “Deca (1) (upper half of the star without slashes)” to the middle in the drawing range of up to 4 frames. In addition, on the condition that strawberry (2) is selected (strawberry (1) + strawberry (2) selected), the symbol “Deca (2) (the lower half of the star without diagonal lines)” of symbol number 4 Special reel control is performed to pull in the middle stage with a maximum of 4 frames. When winning the strawberry (2), if the symbol number 4 and the symbol number 5 can be drawn to the middle in the drawing range of up to 4 frames, the symbol number 4 symbol Special reel control is performed in which the number 5 symbol is given priority over the middle stage. When the strawberry is not won, the reel control for stopping the symbols other than the symbols of symbols 4 and 5 on the middle reel 2C in the middle, except for the case where the reel control for generating another winning combination is performed. Done.

  For this reason, when the stop operation is performed so as to stop the middle reel 2L at the timing when the symbol of symbol number 4 is stopped in the middle row, the symbol of symbol number 4 stops in the middle row and other than strawberry (1) and strawberry (2) The player can recognize that the strawberry (2) has been won when the winning of the role of is not generated, the symbol of the symbol number 5 stops in the middle, and the strawberry (1) and strawberry (2 ) When the winning of a role other than) has not occurred, the player can recognize that at least strawberry (1) has been won, and when the other symbols are stopped in the middle row, the strawberry is won. It is possible to make the player recognize that it was not.

  Note that when the strawberry (1) or strawberry (2) is won during the bonus, the notification promotion condition is established. For this reason, in the middle reel 2C, the fact that the symbol number 4 or 5 is stopped in the middle stage and the winning of the role other than the strawberry (1) and the strawberry (2) does not occur is informed that the notification promotion condition is established. can do.

  Next, processing executed by the main control unit 41 in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. In the slot machine 1, the game is progressed by repeatedly performing the game process one game at a time. For this purpose, the game must be in a state where the game can be progressed first. In order to be able to advance the game, for example, the set value work is stored in the set value work with the set value in the normal range with the main control unit 41 including the main CPU 41a activated, and the data stored in the RAM 41c. The condition is that there is no abnormality. When the game is ready to proceed, game processing is repeated in the slot machine 1 game by game. Hereinafter, each game in the slot machine 1 will be described. The “game” in the slot machine 1 is, in a narrow sense, a period from when the start switch 7 is operated to when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped. Since the setting of the bet number before the operation of No. 7 and the payout of medals and the transition of the gaming state are performed after the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped, these incidental processes are included in the “game” in a broad sense. And

  The game control process is also executed after the power is turned on and a predetermined boot process is performed, or immediately after the setting is changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38. When the processing of one game is started, the start switch is first set by operating the one-sheet BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 or by setting a predetermined number of bets by inserting medals from the medal insertion slot 4. 7 can be accepted effectively, and a BET process for instructing the substantial start of the game is performed by effectively accepting an operation on the start switch 7. If the player has won a replay in the previous game, the same number of bets as in the previous game (3 in this embodiment) is automatically set by the flag during the replay game, and the operation to the start switch 7 can be effectively accepted. (At this stage, the flag during the replay game is erased). In the BET process, every time a bet number is set, a BET command that can specify the number of medals used for setting the bet number is transmitted to the effect control board 90.

  When a specified number of bets are set by BET processing and the start switch 7 is activated, when an operation to the start switch 7 is accepted, a random number for internal lottery is extracted, and a game is played based on the extracted random number value. A lottery process is performed to determine whether or not a winning for each combination determined according to the state is allowed.

  Here, the lottery process will be described in detail. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing details of the lottery process executed by the main control unit 41. In the lottery process, first, in S01, the BET number (betting number) set in the current game is read. Next, it is determined in S02 whether or not the read number of bets is a prescribed number (for example, 3; 2 for bonus). When the read number of bets is not the prescribed number, a RAM abnormality error occurs, and a predetermined RAM abnormality error process is performed.

  When the read bet number is the specified number, the set value stored in the set value work of the RAM 41c is read in S03, and in S04, the read set value is a value that should be originally taken to a range of 1 to 4 It is determined whether or not. If the read set value is not in the range of 1 to 4, a RAM abnormality error occurs and predetermined RAM abnormality error processing is performed.

  If the read set value is in the range of 1 to 4, in S05, the random number for internal lottery (the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42, the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is determined by software in a predetermined procedure). (Including processed random numbers, etc.) are extracted and stored in the internal lottery determination area of the RAM 41c.

  In S06, as described with reference to FIG. 7, the number of determination values of the specified lottery target combination is acquired based on the gaming state and the set value. For example, when the set value is “1” and the lottery target combination when in the normal gaming state is the big bonus (1), “80” is acquired as the number of determination values as shown in FIG. The

  In S07, the obtained determination value number is added to the random number value stored in the internal lottery determination area of the RAM 41c, and the result of the addition is used as a new internal lottery value. In S08, it is determined whether a predetermined value (for example, 65536) has overflowed when the number of determination values is added to the value of the random number for internal lottery.

  If no overflow has occurred, in S09, it is determined whether there is a next combination of combinations or combinations that are not yet processed among combinations of combinations or combinations that are to be selected. If there is a combination or combination of combinations that has not yet been processed, the process returns to step S06, and the next combination or combination of combinations is selected as a lottery target combination and a lottery is performed. If there is no combination or combination of combinations not to be processed, the process proceeds to S11. In the internal lottery in the present embodiment, the combination or combination of combinations shown in FIG. 7 specified from the gaming state is selected in order. For example, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the big bonus (1) is first drawn as a lottery target, and when it is determined YES in S09, the big bonus (2) is drawn next, and then S09. Every time it is judged as YES, regular bonus, replay, replay + fall replay, replay + fall replay + BAR replay, strawberry (1) + (2), melon, 9 roles (1), 9 roles (2) ,... Are drawn in the order of 9 winning combinations (9). Similarly, when the game state is other, the lottery shown in FIG. 7 is drawn in order.

  If an overflow occurs, the process proceeds to S10, and the winning flag of the lottery target role corresponding to the number of determination values read in S06 is set to the ON state. In S <b> 11, an internal winning command for specifying the setting status of the winning flag in the RAM 41 c is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 90.

  Further, in the lottery process in the present embodiment, freeze lottery is performed in which a random lottery or the like is used to randomly determine whether or not to generate a predetermined freeze in accordance with the lottery result of the lottery subject. Freezing refers to delaying the rotation start timing of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, delaying the timing for enabling the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and the like.

  First, in S12, it is determined whether or not one of the big bonuses (1), (2) and the regular bonus is set. If it is determined in S12 that no bonus winning flag is set, the lottery process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S12 that the winning flag of any bonus is set, the winning flag of the bonus is not set in the current lottery process but is set in the previous lottery process. It is determined whether or not a bonus carryover flag for specifying whether or not the winning flag being carried over is set to OFF. The bonus carryover flag is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and is set to ON after the freeze lottery is performed in the lottery process for winning the bonus (S17 described later), and is turned OFF when the bonus is won Is set.

  If it is determined in S13 that the bonus carryover flag is not OFF, the bonus winning flag has been carried over, and since the freeze lottery has already been performed, the lottery process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in S13 that the bonus carryover flag is OFF, since the bonus winning flag is the bonus winning flag set in the current lottery process, the processes shown in S14 to S18 are performed.

  In S14, a random number for freeze lottery (for example, a random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42, a random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 in a predetermined procedure by software, etc.) is extracted. And stored in the freeze determination area of the RAM 41c. In S15, freeze lottery is performed according to the random number for freeze lottery stored in S14 and the freeze lottery table. The freeze lottery table refers to a table used to determine whether or not to execute freeze, and when to execute freeze.

  Here, an example of the type of freeze and the freeze lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10A is a diagram for explaining types of freeze, and FIG. 10B is a diagram for explaining a freeze lottery table.

  The freeze includes a pre-rotation freeze that occurs before the start of rotation of each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R and a post-rotation freeze that occurs after the start of rotation of each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

  Freeze before rotation is when the operation of the start switch 7 is accepted effectively, or to start the reel 2L, 2C, 2R rotation start in the previous game in order to keep the one game digest time longer than a predetermined time When the operation of the start switch 7 is effectively accepted before being counted for a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) by the one game timer, the predetermined time is counted from the later one when the predetermined time is counted. A freeze that delays the rotation start timing of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R until the delay time elapses.

  The post-rotation freeze means that the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are validated until a predetermined delay time elapses after the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started and the rotation speed reaches a constant speed. A freeze that delays timing.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10A, as the types of freezes, the first freeze for executing only the pre-rotation freeze over the delay time T1, and the pre-rotation freeze only for the time T2 longer than the delay time T1. And a third freeze for executing the pre-rotation freeze for the same T1 as the first freeze and further executing the post-rotation freeze for the delay time T3.

  It is determined with reference to the freeze lottery table shown in FIG. 10B whether or not to execute the freeze and what type of freeze is to be executed. In the freeze lottery table shown in FIG. 10B, the winning rate is set so that the freeze lottery is performed according to different ratios when the big bonus is won and when the regular bonus is won.

  At the time of winning the big bonus, it will be decided that 98% will be freed, 0.1% will be decided as 1st freeze, 0.4% will be decided as 2nd freeze, 1.5% The third freeze is determined at the rate of. On the other hand, when the regular bonus is won, 99% is determined to be freezing, 0.6% is determined to be the first freezing, 0.3% is determined to be the second freezing, and 0. The third freeze is determined at a rate of 1%.

  Here, when the big bonus is won and the regular bonus is won, the winning rate is set so that freezing occurs at a higher rate when the big bonus is won than when the regular bonus is won. For this reason, it is possible to notify that the bonus is won by the occurrence of the freeze and to improve the expectation that the player has won the big bonus which is more advantageous than the regular bonus.

  In addition, if a freezing occurs when the big bonus is won, the first freezing is determined at a rate of 0.1 / 2, the second freezing is determined at a rate of 0.4 / 2, and 1.5 / 2. The third freeze is determined at the rate of. That is, at the time of winning the big bonus, the ratio determined as the third freeze is the highest, the second freeze is the next highest, and the ratio determined as the first freeze is the lowest.

  On the other hand, when freezing occurs when the regular bonus is won, the first freeze is determined at a rate of 0.6 / 1, the second freeze is determined at a rate of 0.3 / 1, and 0.1 / 1 The third freeze is determined at the rate of. In other words, when the regular bonus is won, the ratio determined as the first freeze is the highest, the second freeze is the next highest, and the ratio determined as the third freeze is the lowest.

  Therefore, it is more likely that a big bonus advantageous to the player is won when the second freeze occurs than when the first freeze occurs. The chance of winning the bonus is even higher. As a result, the expectation for winning the big bonus when the third freeze occurs can be most improved, and the big bonus is also greater when the second freeze occurs than when the first freeze occurs. You can improve your expectation for winning.

  Returning to FIG. 9, in S <b> 16, the pre-rotation freeze counter for specifying the period for generating the pre-rotation freeze and the post-rotation freeze counter for specifying the period for generating the post-rotation freeze according to the result of the freeze lottery. Is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. For example, when it is determined by the freeze lottery that the first freeze is executed, a value corresponding to the delay time T1 is set in the pre-rotation freeze counter, and when it is determined that the second freeze is executed, the pre-rotation freeze counter is determined. Is set to a value corresponding to the delay time T2, and when it is decided to execute the third freeze, a value corresponding to the delay time T1 is set in the pre-rotation freeze counter, and the delay time is set in the post-rotation freeze counter. Processing for setting a value corresponding to T3 is performed. When it is not determined that the freeze is executed by the freeze lottery, the pre-rotation freeze counter and the post-rotation freeze counter are maintained at zero. As will be described later, the main control unit 41 specifies the presence / absence and type of the freeze based on the pre-rotation freeze counter and the post-rotation freeze counter, and generates a freeze for a period specified by the counter when the freeze is executed. Process to make it happen.

  In S <b> 17, a freeze related command for specifying the result of the freeze lottery is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 90. As will be described later, the effect control board 90 specifies the presence / absence of the freeze based on the freeze-related command, specifies the type when executing the freeze, and performs processing for executing the corresponding effect.

  In S18, the bonus carryover flag is set to ON. Thereby, even if it determines with YES in S12 in the next lottery process, since it determines with NO in S13, it can prevent that the process of S14-S18 is performed repeatedly.

  In S18, since the bonus winning flag is set in the current lottery process, a process for controlling the internal medium RT corresponding to the winning bonus (for example, the value of the game state flag includes the internal medium RT flag). And the lottery process is terminated. As described above, the bonus carryover flag is set to OFF by the bonus winning.

  When the lottery process is completed, the reel rotation process is performed next. Here, the reel rotation process will be described in detail. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing in detail the reel rotation process executed by the main control unit 41.

  In the reel rotation process, first, in S30, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has been counted by one game timer. One game timer is a timer that is added and updated at regular time intervals (for example, timer interrupts).

  If it is determined in S30 that the time has been counted by the one game timer for a predetermined time or more, it is determined in S31 whether or not the pre-rotation freeze counter is 0, that is, whether or not the pre-rotation freeze is executed.

  When it is determined in S31 that the pre-rotation freeze counter is 0, the process proceeds to S34 and reel rotation is started as described later, but it is determined that the pre-rotation freeze counter is not 0 and the pre-rotation freeze is executed. When the pre-rotation freeze counter is zero, the process proceeds to S32 and S33 repeatedly until the pre-rotation freeze counter is executed over the period specified by the pre-rotation freeze counter.

  In S32, it is determined whether or not a predetermined subtraction condition (elapse of a certain time, more specifically, timer interrupt execution) is satisfied. When it is determined in S32 that the subtraction condition is satisfied, in S33, the value of the pre-rotation freeze counter is decremented by 1, and the process proceeds to S31 again. Thus, the subtraction is started after it is determined that the pre-rotation freeze counter has been counted for a predetermined time or more by the one game counter.

  When it is determined in S31 that the pre-rotation freeze counter is 0, in S34, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven to start rotation of all the left, middle, and right reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

  When the reel rotation is started, a reel rotation command for notifying the start of the reel rotation is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 90 in S35, and a new timing is started by the one game timer in S36. Note that the timing for starting a new time count by the 1-game timer is not limited to when the reel rotation is started, even when YES is determined in S30 or when YES is determined in S37 described later. Good.

  In S37, it is determined whether or not a predetermined rotation condition (rotation speed reaches a constant speed) is satisfied from the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. The rotation condition may be satisfied when the reference position is detected by the reel sensors 33SL, 33SC, and 33SR in addition to the rotation speed reaching a constant speed.

  When it is determined in S37 that the rotation condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to S38, in which it is determined whether or not the post-rotation freeze counter is 0, that is, whether or not the post-rotation freeze is executed.

  If it is determined in S38 that the post-rotation freeze counter is 0, the process proceeds to S41 and the stop switch is enabled as described later, but if the post-rotation freeze counter is not 0 and the post-rotation freeze is executed. When it is determined, the process proceeds to S39 and S40 repeatedly until the post-rotation freeze counter becomes zero, and the post-rotation freeze is executed over a period specified by the post-rotation freeze counter.

  In S39, it is determined whether or not a predetermined subtraction condition (a certain time has elapsed, more specifically, timer interrupt execution) is satisfied. When it is determined in S39 that the subtraction condition is satisfied, in S40, the value of the post-rotation freeze counter is decremented by 1, and the process proceeds to S38 again. As described above, the post-rotation freeze counter starts subtraction after the reel rotation is started and the rotation condition is satisfied.

  When it is determined in S38 that the post-rotation freeze counter is 0, in S41, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are enabled so that the operation can be accepted effectively, and the left / middle / right stop valid LEDs 22L to 22R Lights up.

  Thereafter, in S42, any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated by the player to stop driving the reel motor corresponding to the stop switch and stop the rotation. In S43, each time the rotation of one of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R stops, a reel stop command that can identify the stopped reel and the area number of the corresponding stop operation position of the reel is issued. It is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 90.

  In S44, it is determined whether or not all the reels 2L to 2R are stopped. When it is determined that all the reels 2L to 2R are not stopped, the process proceeds to S42. When it is determined that all the reels 2L to 2R are stopped, the reel rotation process is performed. finish.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 12 to 15, timing charts of the case where no freeze occurs and the case where the first to third freezes occur will be described. FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining a timing chart when no freeze occurs. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a timing chart when the first freeze occurs. FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining a timing chart when the second freeze occurs. FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining a timing chart when the third freeze occurs.

  In each of FIGS. 12 to 15, the operation state (ON, OFF) of the start switch 7 is indicated in the (a) column, and the timekeeping state of one game timer is indicated in the (b) column (timed over a predetermined time, not timed over a predetermined time). However, in the column (c), the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are in a rotating state (stopped, rotated at a constant speed), and in the column (d) are the receiving states (valid, invalid) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are (e ) Column shows the occurrence state of freeze (occurring or not occurring). Further, in FIGS. 13 to 15, the execution state (in execution or non-execution) of the freeze effect that is executed due to the occurrence of freeze described later is shown in the (f) column. The circled numbers shown in the lower columns of FIGS. 12 to 15 indicate the timings in (a) to (f), respectively. Hereinafter, it is simply expressed as a number, such as timing 1.

  First, with reference to FIG. 12, a case where no freeze occurs, that is, a case where the pre-rotation freeze counter and the post-rotation freeze counter are 0 will be described. Timing 1 shows a time when the start switch 7 is operated after the bet amount is set by the BET process and the start switch 7 is activated. When the operation to the start switch 7 is accepted, as described above, depending on whether or not the time is counted for a predetermined time or more by the 1-game timer (S30) and whether or not the pre-rotation freeze counter is 0 (S31). Thus, the reel rotation is started as shown in the column (c) of FIG. Note that the portions where the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are slanted indicate the period of rotation until reaching a constant speed.

  In FIG. 12, as shown in the column (b) at the timing 1, the reel rotation is started immediately after the operation to the start switch 7 is accepted because the 1 game timer has already timed over a predetermined time. Note that when the timing of one game timer has not been counted for a predetermined time or more at the timing 1, the reel rotation is not started until the time is counted for the predetermined time or longer as shown in S30 of FIG.

  Timing 2 shows the time when the rotation condition reaches the constant speed and the validation condition is satisfied after the reel rotation is started. As a result, as shown in the column (d), the acceptance state of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R becomes valid, and the operation to the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is effectively accepted to stop the corresponding reel. It becomes possible.

  Next, a case where the first freeze occurs, that is, a case where a value corresponding to T1 is set in the pre-rotation freeze counter will be described with reference to FIG.

  Timing 1 indicates when the start switch 7 is operated and the first freeze occurs. When an operation to the start switch 7 is accepted, as described above, it is determined whether or not the time is counted for a predetermined time or more by one game timer. Based on the value of the counter, it is determined whether or not the pre-rotation freeze is executed.

  In FIG. 13, as shown in the column (b) at the timing 1, since a predetermined time has already been counted by the 1 game timer, the delay as shown in the column (e) immediately after the operation to the start switch 7 is accepted. Freezing occurs over time T1. When the predetermined time has not yet been measured by the 1 game timer at timing 1, the freeze occurs after the predetermined time has been counted.

  Timing 3 shows the time when the freeze has ended after the delay time T1 has elapsed since the freeze occurred. As shown in the column (c), the reel rotation is started after the delay time T1 elapses and the freeze ends.

  Timing 4 indicates the time when the rotation speed reaches a constant speed and the rotation condition is satisfied after the reel rotation is started. Since FIG. 13 shows the case where the first freeze occurs, when the rotation condition is satisfied, as shown in the column (d), the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are validated and the acceptance state becomes valid. It becomes possible to stop the reel corresponding to the operation to the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  Next, a case where the second freeze occurs, that is, a case where a value corresponding to T2 is set in the pre-rotation freeze counter will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 14, since a predetermined time has already been counted by the 1 game timer at the timing 1 as shown in the column (b), the delay as shown in the column (e) immediately after the operation to the start switch 7 is accepted. Freezing occurs over time T2. When the predetermined time has not yet been measured by the 1 game timer at the timing 1, the freeze occurs after the predetermined time is counted.

  Timing 3 ′ indicates a time when the freeze has ended after the delay time T <b> 2 has elapsed since the freeze occurred. As shown in the column (c), the reel rotation is started after the delay time T2 elapses and the freeze ends.

  Timing 4 ′ shows the time when the rotation condition reaches the constant speed and the validation condition is satisfied after the reel rotation is started. Since FIG. 14 shows the case where the second freeze occurs, as shown in the column (d), when the rotation condition is satisfied, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are validated, and the acceptance state becomes valid. The operation to the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is effectively accepted, and the corresponding reel can be stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, as the pre-rotation freeze, the first freeze that executes the pre-rotation freeze over the delay time T <b> 1 and the pre-rotation freeze over the delay time T <b> 2 that is longer than T <b> 1. A second freeze is provided. For this reason, when the pre-rotation freeze is executed, the rotation start timing of each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be made different depending on whether the freeze is the first freeze or the second freeze. Can be abundant. Further, when the second freeze is executed, it is possible to give the player an unexpectedness that the rotation of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R has not yet started even though T1 has elapsed since the pre-rotation freeze was executed. it can.

  Next, referring to FIG. 15, when the third freeze occurs, that is, a value corresponding to T1 is set in the pre-rotation freeze counter, and a value corresponding to T3 is set in the post-rotation freeze counter. The case will be described.

  Timing 1 indicates when the start switch 7 is operated and the first freeze occurs. When an operation to the start switch 7 is accepted, as described above, it is determined whether or not the time is counted for a predetermined time or more by one game timer. Based on the value of the counter, it is determined whether or not the pre-rotation freeze is executed.

  In FIG. 15, since a predetermined time has already been counted by the 1 game timer at the timing 1 as shown in the column (b), the delay as shown in the column (e) immediately after the operation to the start switch 7 is accepted. Freezing occurs over time T1. When the predetermined time has not yet been measured by the 1 game timer at timing 1, the freeze occurs after the predetermined time has been counted.

  Timing 3 shows the time when the freeze has ended after the delay time T1 has elapsed since the freeze occurred. As shown in the column (c), the reel rotation is started after the delay time T1 elapses and the freeze ends.

  In timing 4, after the reel rotation is started, after the rotation speed reaches a constant speed and the rotation condition is established, it is further determined whether or not to execute post-rotation freeze based on the post-rotation freeze counter.

  In FIG. 15, immediately after the rotation speed of the reel reaches a constant speed as shown in the column (c) and a predetermined rotation condition is established at the timing 4, the freeze is performed over the delay time T3 as shown in the column (e). Will occur.

  Timing 5 shows the time when the freeze has ended after the delay time T3 has elapsed since the freeze occurred at timing 4. As shown in the column (d), after the delay time T3 elapses and the freeze ends, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are activated and the acceptance state becomes valid, and the operations to the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are performed. It becomes possible to stop the reels corresponding to.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, as a type of freeze, in addition to the freeze that executes only the freeze before rotation, the third freeze that executes the freeze before rotation and further executes the freeze after rotation is provided. For this reason, when the third freeze is executed, the player who recognizes that the rotation of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R is started and the progress of the game is resumed after the pre-rotation freeze is executed. Execution of freeze after rotation can give unexpectedness to the occurrence of freeze.

  In the third freeze, the same time T1 as that of the first freeze is set as the time when the pre-rotation freeze is executed. In addition, as will be described with reference to FIG. 10B, the expectation for winning the big bonus can be improved when the third freeze is executed. As a result, when the pre-rotation freeze occurs in the same manner as the first freeze, the player can have a sense of expectation that the pre-rotation freeze has occurred by executing the third freeze. Thereafter, it is possible to improve the expectation for the occurrence of freeze after rotation.

  Returning to the game control process, when the driving of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, whether or not any of the role symbols shown in FIG. 5A is derived and displayed on the winning line in the display result at the time of stopping. A winning determination process is performed to determine whether or not. If it is determined in this winning determination process that any combination has been won, various processes corresponding to the winnings generated on the game control board 40 are performed. In the winning determination process, after the winning determination is made, a winning determination command capable of specifying the presence / absence of the winning, the type of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out is sent to the effect control board 90. In the winning determination process, when it is determined that one of the big bonuses (1), (2), or the regular bonus is won, a process for controlling the corresponding bonus (for example, the value of the game state flag is set). The corresponding bonus value is set).

  Further, in the winning determination process, when it is determined that the player has won the fall replay during the preparation mode or RT, the process for controlling to the normal gaming state (for example, the value of the gaming state flag is set to the value of the normal gaming state). Set value etc.). Further, when it is determined that no winning has occurred and the special outcome is stopped at any of the winning lines L1 to L6 during the preparation mode, a process for controlling to RT ( For example, the value of RT is set as the value of the gaming state flag).

  In the present embodiment, nine winning combinations (1) to (9) that trigger special special event suspension are read out independently as other lottery winning combinations without being read out as the lottery target combination, and the internal winning combination is made. Is done. For this reason, when the special game stops, no winnings can occur. However, the nine winning combinations (1) to (9) that trigger the special event stop may be read out as a lottery target combination at the same time as other winning combinations, and an internal winning may be performed. In this case, there is a possibility that another winning combination won at the same time may occur even when the special event stops. If the special event is stopped and a winning of another winning combination occurs, the profit associated with the occurrence of the winning of the other winning combination is granted, and in the preparation mode, RT It may be one that controls.

  When the winning determination process ends, a payout process is performed. In the payout process, medals are paid out or credits are added according to the number of payouts set in the winning determination process. However, when the number of credits accumulated as data reaches 50, the hopper motor 34b is driven to pay out an excess number of medals from the medal payout opening 9. Also, in the payout process, when the payout of medals is started by payout of winnings or credits (including medals used for setting the number of bets), a payout start command for notifying the start of payout of medals is sent to the effect control board 90. When the medal payout by winning and winning the credit is completed, a payout end command for notifying the end of the medal payout is transmitted to the effect control board 90. In addition, various processes that are not related to winning a prize (for example, processing related to bonus end control (including determination of establishment of bonus end conditions), elimination of a carry-over flag (winning flag for small roles, etc.) without carryover), etc. are also performed. .

  In the payout process, the winning flags for the big bonus and the regular bonus stored in the special work are not deleted. As a result, the winning flags for the big bonus and the regular bonus are carried over to the next game until the winning bonus is won. In the payout process, a game state command that can specify the game state of the next game is sent to the effect control board 90. Then, the process for one game ends, and the process for the next one game starts.

  In the repetition of the game as described above, the main control unit 41 of the game control board 40 performs the transition of the game state among the preparation mode, RT, normal game state, internal RT, and bonus, and the progress of the game In response to this, a command is transmitted to the effect control board 90. On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 of the effect control board 90 performs various processes based on the command received from the game control board 40.

  Next, processing executed by the sub control unit 91 will be described. The sub-control unit 91 first executes a predetermined effect initial setting process, and after performing an effect control restoration process for restoring the control state in the effect control board 90 to the state when the power supply is stopped, the effect-side random value Repeat the update process.

  In the sub-control unit 91, an interrupt for controlling the progress of the effect is generated at a predetermined time interval (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the timer interrupt flag of the RAM 91c is set to the ON state by the reset / interrupt controller. Then, the effect control interruption process is executed. In the effect control interrupt process, the contents of the internal register are saved, the effect backup process is executed, and when the sub control unit 91 is restarted, the data required for restoring the control state before the restart is backed up. Is done. Further, command analysis processing for analyzing various commands transmitted from the game control board 40 is executed, and predetermined effect control processing is executed. By this effect control process, various game effects are performed by displaying images on the liquid crystal display 51 and generating sounds from the speakers 53 and 54 according to the progress of the game in the slot machine 1.

  The game effect includes a game state effect according to the game state and the effect state, a freeze effect that is executed due to the occurrence of the freeze, a high probability state, and a point grant effect that notifies that a point has been awarded during the bonus In addition, a navigation effect executed when the effect state is controlled by the AT is included. It should be noted that image element data and moving image data for performing a game effect are stored in a predetermined ROM.

  In order to perform a game effect, the RAM 91c of the sub-control unit 91 has various counters, areas for setting various flags, a game state command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, and an internal winning command. The area for storing the winning status, the combination of the display results derived to the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the information indicating whether or not a winning has occurred, and the gaming state applied in the game running on the gaming control board 40 side (The winning situation and the game state are twice) are also provided in the RAM 91c.

  Further, in the effect control board 90, a stop symbol table for determining the display result of the variable display device 2 based on the reel stop command is provided in the RAM 91c. However, since the reel stop command includes only the type of the stopped reel and the number of the symbol stopped in the middle as information, it is not possible to determine what symbol is stopped by this alone. For this reason, the ROM 91b stores in advance a table showing all symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. With reference to this table, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped on the stop symbol table. The symbol is registered. The sub-control unit 91 produces an effect based on the registration information of the stop symbol table.

  In addition, various random values counted by a random number circuit (not shown) or the like are updated on the side of the effect control board 90, and then the contents of the saved register are restored, and then the effect control interrupt process ends.

  In the effect control process executed in the effect control interrupt process described above, the sub-control unit 91 assigns / manages the probability state control process for controlling the probability state as shown in FIG. A point related process for notification, an AT control process for controlling the effect state to the AT according to the game state, etc., and a game effect execution process for executing the aforementioned game effect according to the game state or the like are performed.

  The sub-control unit 91 in the present embodiment performs a freeze effect by executing a game effect execution process. In the game effect execution process, as described below, the freeze effect is executed based on the freeze related command and the reel rotation command from the main control unit 41.

  For example, when it is specified that the first freeze is to be executed based on the freeze-related command from the main control unit 41, the first freeze-related command is received, and then, as shown in the column (f) of FIG. Over the period T1 at which the freeze is performed, a freeze effect is performed to specify that the pre-rotation freeze has occurred.

  Further, when it is specified that the second freeze is to be executed based on the freeze related command from the main control unit 41, the second freeze is received as shown in the column (f) of FIG. 14 after receiving the freeze related command. A freeze effect for specifying that the pre-rotation freeze has occurred is performed over T2 when the freeze is executed.

  When it is specified that the third freeze is to be executed based on the freeze-related command from the main control unit 41, the freeze-related command is received and, as shown in the column (f) of FIG. A freeze effect is performed to specify that a pre-rotation freeze has occurred.

  Further, when it is specified to execute the third freeze based on the freeze-related command from the main control unit 41, the reel rotation command transmitted in S35 of FIG. 11 is received and each of the stop switches 8L to 8R is activated. Then, as shown in the column (f) of FIG. 15, a timing 5a after a predetermined time has elapsed after reaching a timing 4a when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) shorter than T3 has elapsed. Up to this point, a freeze effect is performed to specify that a post-rotation freeze has occurred. On the other hand, between the timing 4 and the timing 4a in the column (f) of FIG. 15, if no freeze has occurred, it is the timing when each of the stop switches 8L to 8R is activated. This is the timing at which the corresponding reel can be stopped by operating the. However, a post-rotation freeze has occurred between timing 4 and timing 5 including between timing 4 and timing 4a in FIG. For this reason, between timing 4 and timing 4a in FIG. 15 (f), for example, the stop switches 8L to 8R are operated to stop because the reel is supposed to be stopped, but the corresponding reel is not stopped. It is possible to make the player have unexpectedness. Further, since the freeze effect is executed after the subsequent timing 4a, it is possible to make it easier for the player to know that the post-rotation freeze has occurred after the player has the unexpectedness described above.

  The freeze effect is, for example, one of an effect of displaying a specific character on the liquid crystal display 51, an effect of generating a specific sound from the speakers 53 and 54, and an effect of lighting the effect effect LED 51 in a predetermined manner. Alternatively, it may be an effect combined with selection.

  In addition, the freeze effect executed due to the freeze before rotation is the first freeze, the third freeze, or the second freeze, that is, the effect of the same mode regardless of the type of freeze. May be executed over the same period (for example, T1 or a predetermined time shorter than T1). As a result, the type of freeze that has occurred cannot be specified from the freeze effect, so it is easy for the player to have the expectation that the freeze before rotation has occurred for a longer time and that the freeze after rotation will occur. can do.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 in the present embodiment performs the first AT lottery by executing the first AT lottery process included in the AT control process. In the first AT lottery process, when it is determined that the bonus is won based on the internal winning command from the main control unit 41, the first AT lottery is performed according to the probability corresponding to the total number of points actually granted after the end of the previous bonus. Is executed. Further, in the first AT lottery process, when it is determined that the bonus is ended based on the gaming state command from the main control unit 41, the first AT lottery is executed according to the probability corresponding to the total number of points given in the bonus. Is done.

  FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining lottery conditions that trigger the execution of the first AT lottery. FIGS. 17 and 18 are diagrams for explaining tables referred to in the first AT lottery.

  In the first AT lottery, as shown in FIG. 16, when it is determined that the bonus has been won, the bonus winning table shown in FIG. 17 is referred to, and when it is determined that the bonus has ended, the bonus end table shown in FIG. , The number of navigation stock is determined according to the probability corresponding to the total number of points awarded. Whether or not a bonus has been won is specified by, for example, an internal winning command from the main control unit 41. Further, whether or not the bonus has ended is specified from a gaming state command from the main control unit 41, for example.

  The number of navigation stocks indicates a period during which the AT can be controlled. By consuming (subtracting) the number of navigation stock by 1, the game is controlled by the AT while the game is consumed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50), and the navigation effect can be executed. Accordingly, it can be said that the greater the determined number of navigation stocks, the higher the degree of advantage for the player because the AT is controlled over a longer period. In the present embodiment, the number of navigation stocks determined in the first AT lottery based on the bonus winning, the number of navigation stocks determined in the second AT lottery based on the bonus winning described later, and the navigation stock determined in the first AT lottery based on the end of the bonus. According to the total number with the stock number, the AT is controlled after the bonus is over.

  When the number of navigation stocks of 1 or more is determined in the first AT lottery or the second AT lottery, the sub-control unit 91 indicates AT and indicates the number of navigation stocks (the total number of the first AT lottery and the second AT lottery). The flag is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c. Based on the AT flag in the RAM 91c, the sub-control unit 91 specifies whether or not to control to AT, and specifies the remaining number of navigation stocks.

  When the number of navigation stock is given when the AT flag indicating that the vehicle is AT is set, the number of navigation stock given this time may be added to the stock number specified from the AT flag. It may be rewritten to the number of navigation stocks granted this time.

  For example, when the AT flag indicating that the AT is set and the first AT lottery or the second AT lottery is performed by the bonus winning, the AT flag corresponding to the result of the first AT lottery or the second AT lottery Updated to The update to the AT flag corresponding to the result of the first AT lottery or the second AT lottery means, for example, that the current first AT lottery or the second AT is added to the number of navigation stocks specified from the AT flag stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c. It may be possible to rewrite an AT flag that specifies the number of navigation stock added by adding the number of navigation stocks according to the lottery result, and the AT flag stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c may be used for the first AT lottery or It may be rewritten to an AT flag indicating the number of navigation stocks corresponding to the result of the second AT lottery. Any method may be used as long as the current AT flag can be specified according to the result of the first AT lottery or the second AT lottery.

  In addition, when the number of navigation stocks is given after the AT flag indicating that the first AT lottery is performed by the bonus winning and the AT is set, for example, the AT flag for specifying the number of navigation stocks added and added. To be rewritten.

  For example, after the AT flag indicating that the first AT lottery is performed and the AT is set by the bonus winning, for example, the second AT lottery by the bonus winning or the first AT lottery by the end of the bonus is performed and further one or more. When the number of navigation stocks is determined, the number of navigation stocks specified from the AT flag stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 91c is added to the result of the second AT lottery by the bonus winning and the result of the first AT lottery by the end of the bonus. The corresponding number of navigation stocks is added and added to the AT flag that specifies the number of navigation stocks.

  The case where the bonus winning table shown in FIG. 17 is referred to in the first AT lottery will be described. If the total number of points granted outside the bonus is “0-2” when the bonus is won (hereinafter also referred to as the total number of normal points granted), the number of navigation stocks is 90%. Navistock number was determined to be 1 at a rate of 5%, Navistock number was determined to be 3 at a rate of 2%, Navistock number was determined to be 5 at a rate of 2%, 1% The first AT lottery at the time of winning the bonus is performed so that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 10 in proportion.

  When the total number of granted points is “3-5”, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 0 at a rate of 50%, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at a rate of 30%, and the number of navigation stocks at a rate of 15%. 3 is determined, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 5 at a rate of 3%, and the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 10 at a rate of 2%.

  When the total number of granted points is “6-9”, the navigation stock number is determined to be 1 at 70%, the navigation stock number is determined to be 3 at 20%, and the navigation stock number is at 5%. 5 is determined, the number of navigation stock is determined to be 10 at a rate of 3%, and the number of navigation stock is determined to be 20 at a rate of 2%, the first AT lottery at the time of winning the bonus is performed.

  When the total number of granted points is “10”, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 3 at a rate of 70%, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 5 at a rate of 10%, and the number of navigation stocks is 10 at a rate of 10%. The first AT lottery at the time of winning the bonus is performed so that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 20 at a rate of 10%. As will be described later, the upper limit of the total number of normal granted points is set to “10”.

  In this manner, the bonus winning table in FIG. 17 is such that the larger the total number of granted points, the higher the number of navigation stocks that is 1 or more and the greater the number of navigation stocks, that is, the more advantageous for the player. AT lottery at the time of winning the bonus. Further, when the total number of granted points is 6 or more, the number of navigation stock is always determined to be 1 or more. For this reason, when the total number of granted points is 6 or more, the AT is always controlled after the bonus is over.

  Therefore, it can be said that the AT lottery is performed so as to be advantageous to the player by controlling the AT at a higher rate and determining the number of navigation stocks at a higher rate as the total number of granted points increases. As a result, the greater the total number of points recognized by the player, the greater the sense of expectation that AT will be controlled and the acquisition of a larger number of navigation stocks, and the interest of the game will be improved. it can.

  Next, a case where the bonus end time table shown in FIG. 18 is referred to in the first AT lottery will be described. If the total number of points granted during the bonus and the total number of points granted at the end of the bonus (hereinafter also referred to as the total number of bonus points granted) is “0 to 1”, the navigation stock has a ratio of 95%. The first AT lottery at the end of the bonus is performed so that the number is determined to be 0, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at a rate of 3%, and the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 3 at a rate of 2%.

  When the total number of bonus points awarded is “2-3”, the navigation stock number is determined to be 0 at a rate of 80%, the navigation stock number is determined to be 1 at a rate of 15%, and the navigation stock is a rate of 4%. The first AT lottery at the end of the bonus is performed so that the number is determined to be 3 and the navigation stock number is determined to be 5 at a rate of 1%.

  When the total number of bonus points granted is “4”, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 0 at a rate of 60%, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at a rate of 25%, and the number of navigation stocks is determined at a rate of 10%. The first AT lottery at the end of the bonus is performed so that the navigation stock number is determined to be 5 at a rate of 4%, and the navigation stock number is determined to be 10 at a rate of 1%.

  When the total number of bonus points given is “5”, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 3 at a rate of 70%, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 5 at a rate of 10%, and the number of navigation stocks is increased at a rate of 10%. The first AT lottery at the end of the bonus is performed so that the navigation stock number is determined to be 20 at a rate of 10%. As will be described later, the upper limit of the total number of bonus points granted is set to “5”.

  As described above, in the bonus end table of FIG. 18, the larger the total number of bonus granted points, the higher the percentage of navigation stock that is determined to be 1 or more, that is, the player is more advantageous. Thus, the first AT lottery at the end of the bonus is performed. Further, when the total number of bonus points awarded is 5, the number of navigation stocks is always determined to be 3 or more. For this reason, when the total number of bonus points awarded is 5, the AT is always controlled after the bonus is over.

  Therefore, it can be said that the AT lottery is performed so as to be advantageous to the player by controlling the AT at a higher rate and determining the higher number of navigation stocks at a higher rate as the total number of bonus points granted increases. . As a result, the greater the total number of points recognized by the player, the greater the sense of expectation that AT will be controlled and the acquisition of a larger number of navigation stocks, and the interest of the game will be improved. it can. Further, even if the total number of points recognized by the player is small, the points are notified by performing a notification lottery as will be described later, so points that are greater than the total number of recognized points are actually given. There is a possibility that the expectation to be controlled by the AT and to obtain a larger number of navigation stocks can be sustained.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the first AT lottery is performed with reference to the table shown in FIG. 17 or 18 by the first AT lottery process performed when the bonus is won or the bonus is ended by the sub-control unit 91. Done.

  The points related to the probability determined to be controlled by the AT in the first AT lottery are given and managed by the sub-control unit 91 by executing the point related processing included in the effect control processing. Further, the point-related processing is executed by the sub-control unit 91, whereby the above-described point giving effect is executed. FIG. 19 is a flowchart for explaining point-related processing executed by the sub-control unit 91.

  First, in S101, it is determined whether or not a predetermined point grant condition is satisfied. FIG. 20A is a diagram for explaining a point granting condition that can be established when the probability state is a high probability state other than the bonus, and FIG. 20B is a point that can be established during the bonus. It is a figure for demonstrating provision conditions.

  First, referring to FIG. 20A, when the player is in a high probability state other than the bonus, it is established on the condition that a melon winning or a strawberry winning is made. More specifically, when a melon is won in a state other than a bonus and in a high probability state, the point granting condition is satisfied on the condition that, for example, a predetermined lottery using a random number extracted from a random counter is won. . For example, the probability of winning in the predetermined lottery is set to 25% when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, and is set to 50% when the gaming state is other than the normal gaming state. That is, even when the melon is won in the high probability state, the point granting condition is established at a higher rate when the game state is other than the normal game state than when the game state is the normal game state. Therefore, it can be said that the player is more advantageous when the player is in the preparation mode or RT, for example, than in the normal gaming state, in that the point granting condition is easily established.

  As will be described later, points that are awarded when the point granting condition is established by winning a melon when it is other than a bonus and in a high probability state can be notified according to the result of a predetermined notification lottery.

  In addition, when a strawberry is won in a high probability state other than the bonus, the point granting condition is always satisfied. For this reason, at least a predetermined number (for example, 1) of points has been awarded for points given when a strawberry is won and the point granting condition is satisfied when a high probability state other than a bonus is established, as will be described later. Will be informed.

  Next, referring to FIG. 20 (b), during the bonus, it is established on the condition that melon is won or that nine winning combinations are won and won. More specifically, when a melon is won while a bonus is being awarded, for example, a point granting condition is established on the condition that the player wins by a predetermined lottery using a random number extracted from a random counter. The probability of winning in the predetermined lottery is set to 50%, for example.

  In addition, as will be described later, the points awarded when the point granting condition is established by winning a melon during the bonus can be notified according to the result of a predetermined notification lottery.

  In addition, when a bonus is being awarded, a point granting condition is always satisfied when a winning combination is won for nine winning combinations. As described later, at least a predetermined number (for example, 1) of points will be awarded for points awarded when a bonus is awarded and a point granting condition is established when a winning combination is awarded to nine winning combinations. You will be notified.

  In the present embodiment, when a bonus is being awarded, information that can specify that one of the nine winning combinations has been won is notified (for example, “9 winning combinations”). May be displayed). " Thereby, in the game in which the information is notified during the bonus, it is possible to add an interest such as predicting which 9 winning combinations the player has won.

  In addition, when the point granting condition is always established by winning, it is not limited to notifying that a predetermined number of points have been granted, but accurately giving the granted points determined in S102 described later. May be.

  Returning to FIG. 19, if it is not determined in S <b> 101 that the point granting condition corresponding to the state shown in FIG. 20 is satisfied, the point-related processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in S101 that the point granting condition is satisfied, in S102, a grant point that can be given to the player is set.

  FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining a table for determining the grant points in S102. When the point granting condition is satisfied when it is other than the bonus, as shown in the non-bonus column of FIG. 21, the point to be given is determined as 1 point at a rate of 50%, and 2 points at the rate of 20%. It is determined to be 3 points at a rate of 20% and 5 points at a rate of 10%.

  When the point granting condition is established while the bonus is in effect, as shown in the bonus column of FIG. 21, the point to be given is determined to be 1 point at a rate of 85%, and 2 points at a rate of 10%. It is determined to be 3 points at a rate of 4% and 5 points at a rate of 1%.

  In this way, more points are determined as the granted points at a higher rate when the point granting condition is established during the bonus than when the point granting condition is established during the bonus.

  In addition, you may comprise so that a grant point may be determined in a different ratio according to whether it is during AT when point grant conditions are satisfied. More specifically, when the point granting condition is established during AT, it is configured so that more points are determined as grant points at a higher rate when established during non-AT. Also good. Accordingly, the first AT lottery can be performed more advantageously for the player when not in AT than in AT, and the interest of the game during non-AT can be improved.

  In S102 of FIG. 19, a grant point is determined with reference to the table shown in FIG. 21, and grant point information for specifying the determined grant point is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c. The sub-control unit 91 specifies a grant point resulting from the establishment of the current point grant condition based on the grant point information in the RAM 91c.

  In the present embodiment, an example has been described in which it is determined whether or not the point granting condition is satisfied in S101, and when the point is established, the given point is determined in S102. With regard to the determination of the points and the grant points, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that whether or not the points are awarded in one lottery and the grant points are determined. For example, it may be configured to determine any of points 0 to 5 when the player is in a high probability state other than the bonus and wins a melon in the normal gaming state. In this case, when the point is determined to be 0, no point is given.

  In S103, it is determined whether or not the current point grant condition that triggered the point grant is a condition for informing that a predetermined number of points have been granted. That is, when the point granting conditions this time are conditions other than the bonus shown in FIG. 20A and established by winning a strawberry when in a high probability state, or when the bonus shown in FIG. It is determined whether any of the conditions established by winning and winning the nine winning combinations alone.

  In S103, when it is determined that the point granting condition is a condition for informing that a predetermined number of points have been granted, the process proceeds to S108 described later in order to notify that a predetermined number of points have been granted. . In the present embodiment, for example, the point “1” is determined as the notification point.

  On the other hand, in S103, if it is not determined that the point granting condition is a condition for informing that a predetermined number of points have been granted, the determination and notification of whether or not to notify that a point has been granted is made. The process proceeds to S104 in order to make a notice lottery for determining the number of points.

  In S104, a difference number notification lottery is performed. The difference number corresponding notice lottery means that the total number of points actually granted after the previous first AT lottery is established until the current point granting condition is satisfied, and the current point granting condition after the previous first AT lottery is established. Depending on the difference from the total number of points that have been informed until the establishment, a lottery for determining whether or not to provide the points set in S102 when the present point granting condition has been established, and the points set in S102 It includes a lottery for determining whether or not to accurately notify, and a lottery for determining how many points are lower when the granted points set in S102 are not accurately notified. In S104, the difference number is calculated from the total number of granted points (updated in S110) and the total number of notification points (updated in S109), which will be described later. Specifically, the difference number is a value obtained by subtracting the total number of notification points from the total number of granted points.

  FIG. 22 is a diagram for explaining a table for performing the difference number notification lottery. In the difference number correspondence notifying lottery in the present embodiment, first, referring to the difference number correspondence table A in FIG. 22A, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to notify points according to the difference number.

  When the difference number is “0”, it is determined to notify at 30% of the fact that the points have been granted in accordance with the setting of the granted points at S102 and not to notify at the rate of 70%. The When the difference number is “1”, it is determined to notify that a point has been granted in S102 at the rate of 40%, and not to be notified at a rate of 60%. The

  When the difference number is “2”, it is determined to notify the fact that the points have been provided in S102 at the rate of 50% and not to notify at the rate of 50%. The When the difference number is “3 or more”, it is determined to notify at 70% of the fact that the points have been granted in accordance with the setting of the granted points at S102, and not to notify at the rate of 30%. Is done.

  As described above, the difference number correspondence table A in FIG. 22A is determined not to notify the fact that the points have been given at a higher rate as the difference number is smaller, and at a higher rate as the difference number is larger. To be decided. Thereby, when the difference number is already large, it is possible to prevent the difference number from becoming too large by not being further notified.

  When it is decided to notify with reference to the difference number correspondence table A in FIG. 22A, the added points set in S102 with reference to the difference number correspondence table B in FIG. 22B. Depending on the difference, a lottery for determining whether or not to report the given point accurately and a lottery for determining the number of points to be notified when the given point is not reported correctly are performed. In the case where the notification is not performed accurately, the notification point is determined from the points that are less advantageous to the player in the first AT lottery than the awarded points, that is, the points that are less than the granted points.

  When the granted point is “1”, the point is determined to be “1” at a rate of 100% as a notification point regardless of the difference number. When the granted point is “2” and the difference number is “0 to 2”, the notification point is determined to be point “1” at a rate of 30%, and point “2” at a rate of 70%. Determined. When the granted point is “2” and the difference number is “3 or more”, the notification point is determined to be point “1” at a rate of 20%, and point “2” at a rate of 80%. To be determined.

  When the granted point is “3” and the difference is “0 to 2”, the notification point is determined to be “1” at a rate of 10%, and the point “2” at a rate of 20%. ”And the point“ 3 ”at a rate of 70%. When the granted point is “3” and the difference number is “3 or more”, the notification point is determined to be point “2” at a rate of 10%, and point “3” at a rate of 90%. To be determined.

  When the granted point is “5” and the difference number is “0 to 2”, the notification point is determined to be “2” at a rate of 10%, and the point “3” at a rate of 20%. ”And the point“ 5 ”at a rate of 70%. When the granted point is “5” and the difference number is “3 or more”, the notification point is determined to be “3” at a rate of 10%, and the point “5” at a rate of 90%. To be determined.

  In this way, in the difference number correspondence table B in FIG. 22B, the point to be notified is determined so that the fact that the smaller the difference number is, the lower the number of points given than the given points is notified. The point to be notified is determined so that the higher the difference number is, the higher the proportion is given, or the fact that a point closer to the given point is given. In addition, the more points are given, the higher the rate is. As a result, when the difference number is already large, or when a large number of given points are likely to cause the difference number, it is possible to prevent the difference number from becoming too large due to the notification of even fewer points.

  In the difference number corresponding notification lottery according to the present embodiment, the example of determining whether to notify using the table of FIGS. 22A and 22B and the notification point has been described. It may be configured to determine only whether to notify according to the difference number using only the table of 22 (a), and to accurately notify the granted point set in S102 when it is determined to notify. . Moreover, you may comprise so that an alerting | reporting point may be determined according to a difference number using only the table of FIG.22 (b).

  Returning to FIG. 19, in S <b> 105, it is determined whether or not it has been determined to notify that points have been given by the difference number corresponding notification lottery in S <b> 104. When it is determined to notify, the process proceeds to S108 described later in order to notify that the point determined in S104 is given. On the other hand, if it is not determined to notify in S105, the process proceeds to S106.

  In S106, a total number notification lottery is performed. The total number corresponding notice lottery refers to the granted points set in S102 when the present point grant condition is established according to the total number of granted points (the total number of granted points other than the bonus, the total number of bonus granted points during the bonus). A lottery for determining whether or not to be notified, a lottery for determining whether or not to accurately notify the grant points set in S102, and how many points are to be notified when the grant points set in S102 are not accurately reported Includes lottery. In the case where the notification is not performed accurately, the notification point is determined from the points that are less advantageous to the player in the first AT lottery than the awarded points, that is, the points that are less than the granted points.

  It should be noted that the total number of points that are actually granted after the first AT lottery last time until the present point granting condition is satisfied is specified from the total number of granted points described later.

  FIG. 23 is a diagram for explaining a table for performing the total number notification lottery. In the total number correspondence notifying lottery in the present embodiment, first, referring to the total number correspondence table A in FIG. 23A, whether or not to notify points according to the total number of points actually assigned is performed. It is.

  When the total number of points awarded other than during the bonus is “0 to 2”, or when the total number of points awarded during the bonus is “0 to 1”, the granted points are set in S102. It is determined to notify that the points have been given at a rate of 80% and not to notify at a rate of 20%.

  When the total number of points awarded other than during the bonus is “3-5”, or when the total number of points awarded during the bonus is “2-3”, the granted points are set in S102. It is determined to notify that a point has been given at a rate of 50% and not to notify at a rate of 50%.

  When the total number of points awarded other than during the bonus is “6 to 10”, or when the total number of points awarded during the bonus is “4 to 5”, the granted points are set in S102. It is determined to notify that a point has been given at a rate of 10% and not to notify at a rate of 90%.

  As described above, the total number correspondence table A in FIG. 23A is determined to notify that a point has been given at a higher rate as the total number of given points is smaller, and the total number of given points is The larger the number, the higher the ratio is determined not to be notified. Thereby, when only a small number of points are given, the player can be relieved to recognize that a small number of points are given by notifying at a high rate. On the other hand, by not being notified at a high rate when a large number of points are given, it is possible to increase the possibility that more points are actually given than the points recognized by the player from the notification points. , Can maintain a sense of expectation.

  If it is decided to notify with reference to the total number correspondence table A in FIG. 23A, further refer to the total number correspondence table B in FIG. Depending on the total number of points granted, a lottery for determining whether or not to accurately report the given points and a lottery for determining the number of points to be notified when the given points are not reported correctly are performed. It is.

  When the granted point is “1”, the point is determined to be “1” at a rate of 100% as a notification point regardless of the total number of given points. When the number of points given is “2” and the total number of points other than during the bonus is “0 to 2”, or when the total number of points during the bonus is “0 to 1”, The point “1” is determined at a rate of 30%, and the point “2” is determined at a rate of 70%.

  When the number of points awarded is “2” and the total number of points other than during the bonus is “3 to 5”, or when the total number of points during the bonus is “2 to 3”, The point “1” is determined at a rate of 50%, and the point “2” is determined at a rate of 50%.

  When the number of points awarded is “2” and the total number of points other than during the bonus is “6 to 10”, or when the total number of points during the bonus is “4 to 5”, The point “1” is determined at a rate of 90%, and the point “2” is determined at a rate of 10%.

  When the number of points given is “3” and the total number of points other than during the bonus is “0 to 2”, or when the total number of points during the bonus is “0 to 1”, The point “1” is determined at a rate of 10%, the point “2” is determined at a rate of 20%, and the point “3” is determined at a rate of 70%.

  When the number of points given is “3” and the total number of points other than during the bonus is “3 to 5”, or when the total number of points during the bonus is “2 to 3”, The point “1” is determined at a rate of 20%, the point “2” is determined at a rate of 30%, and the point “3” is determined at a rate of 50%.

  When the number of points given is “3” and the total number of points other than during the bonus is “6 to 10”, or when the total number of points during the bonus is “4 to 5”, The point “1” is determined at a rate of 50%, the point “2” is determined at a rate of 30%, and the point “3” is determined at a rate of 20%.

  When the number of points given is “5” and the total number of points other than during the bonus is “0 to 2”, or when the total number of points during the bonus is “0 to 1”, The point “3” is determined at a rate of 10%, and the point “5” is determined at a rate of 90%.

  When the number of points given is “5” and the total number of points other than during the bonus is “3 to 5”, or when the total number of points during the bonus is “2 to 3”, 10% of the points are determined as “1”, 10% of the points are determined as “2”, 30% of the points are determined as “3”, 50% of the points are determined as “5” It is determined.

  When the number of points awarded is “5” and the total number of points other than during the bonus is “6 to 10”, or when the total number of points during the bonus is “4 to 5”, , 30% of the points are determined as “1”, 30% of the points are determined as “2”, 30% of the points are determined as “3”, and 10% of the points are determined as “5”. It is determined.

  As described above, the total number correspondence table B in FIG. 23 (b) is assigned so that the smaller the total number of points given, the higher the percentage of points given or points closer to the points given. The point to be notified is determined so that the fact that a smaller number of points than the granted points are given at a higher rate is notified as the total number of the given points is larger. Thereby, when only a small number of points are given, it is possible to reassure the player by recognizing that a small number of points are given by accurately informing at a high rate. On the other hand, when a large number of points are given, a point that is less than the given points is notified at a high rate, so that more points are actually given than the points recognized by the player from the notification points. Can increase the possibility of being in the future, and can sustain expectations.

  In the total number correspondence lottery according to the present embodiment, an example has been described in which notification is performed using the tables in FIGS. 23A and 23B and an example in which notification points are determined. It may be configured to determine only whether to notify according to the total number using only the table of (a), and to accurately notify the granted point set in S102 when it is determined to notify. Moreover, you may comprise so that an alerting | reporting point may be determined according to the total number using only the table of FIG.23 (b).

  Moreover, although the example which performs the difference number corresponding | compatible notification lottery and the total number corresponding | compatible notification lottery was demonstrated as the notification lottery in this Embodiment, you may comprise not only this but only any one. Further, the example of performing the total number corresponding notification lottery after performing the difference number corresponding notification lottery has been described, but the difference number corresponding notification lottery may be performed after performing the total number corresponding notification lottery.

  In the notification lottery according to the present embodiment, the example of determining whether to notify and the notification point according to the difference number and the total number has been described. However, the notification lottery is not limited thereto, and the difference number and the total number are determined. Regardless, it may be configured to determine whether or not to notify and the notification point according to the grant point set in S102.

  Returning to FIG. 19, in S107, it is determined whether or not it is determined to notify that points have been awarded by the total number corresponding notification lottery in S106. When it is determined to notify, the process proceeds to S108 described later in order to notify that the point determined in S106 is given. On the other hand, if it is not determined to notify in S107, the process proceeds to S110 without performing the process for notifying that the points have been granted.

  In S108, a notifying process for executing a point giving effect for notifying that a point has been given is performed. In the notification process, when YES is determined in S103, information that can specify that, for example, the point “1” has been granted is notified as a point granting effect (at the start or end of the game, “Acquire Point 1! To display a message such as “!”. Further, in the notification process, information that can specify that the point determined in S104 or S106 is given as a point granting effect is notified (for example, in the case of notifying that the point “2” is given). Then, at the start or end of the game, a process for displaying a message such as “Acquire Point 2!” Is performed.

  Note that the point granting effect is not limited to that executed in the above-described manner, and may be executed in any manner as long as the effect is executed in an aspect corresponding to the number of points given. .

  In S109, the notification point total number information for specifying the notification point total number, which is the total number of points notified to the player by the process of S108 after the previous first AT lottery, is updated. In addition, as the point granting effect notified in S108, information for specifying the total number of notification points (for example, a message such as “total number of acquired points 5!”) May be notified.

  The notification point total number information is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c, and is added and updated for each point every time it is notified in S108 that a point has been given. The notification point total number information is reset after the first AT lottery is performed after the lottery conditions for the first AT lottery shown in FIGS.

  In S110, the total granted point information for specifying the total number of granted points, which is the total number of points actually given by the process in S102, is updated. The total number of granted points is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c. After the granted points are set and the notification lottery is performed in S102, the added points are added and updated.

  The total number of granted points in the present embodiment is reset after the first AT lottery is performed after the lottery conditions for the first AT lottery shown in FIGS. Note that the total number of granted points is not limited to information reset when the first AT lottery is performed, and a predetermined number of points (for example, 2 points) out of the total number of granted points even after the first AT lottery is performed. May be carried over, or may be carried over when the AT is not won in the first AT lottery.

  In the present embodiment, as the upper limit of the total number of granted points, “10” is set in advance except during the bonus, and “5” is set in advance during the bonus. For this reason, when the granted points set in S102 are added to the total number of granted points until the current point grant condition is satisfied, the upper limit is set as the total number of granted points when the above-described upper limit is exceeded. Accordingly, as the upper limit of the total number of notification points, “10” is set in advance except for the bonus, and “5” is set in advance during the bonus. For this reason, in S108, when the point determined by the notification lottery or the like is notified, it is notified from the relationship with the total number of notification points that if the above-described upper limit value is exceeded, the point that becomes the upper limit value is given. The

  When the total number of notification points is already the upper limit value, notification is not performed in the same manner as when no points are given. Therefore, after the granted points are set in S102, if the total number of notification points is already the upper limit value, the point-related processing is terminated as it is, and the process proceeds to S103 only when the total number of notification points is less than the upper limit value. You may comprise.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the point granting condition is established, whether or not to notify is determined according to the difference number or the total number of points actually assigned, It is determined and notified according to the determination result. In addition, the notification point is determined from the point that is less advantageous for the player in the first AT lottery than the actual granted point. For this reason, the points recognized by the player from the notification points are equal to or less than the total number of points actually given. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the total number of points actually granted may be greater than the total number of points specified from the notification points, and the total number of points specified from the notification points. Rather than being controlled by the AT.

  Next, the second AT lottery will be described. The sub-control unit 91 in the present embodiment performs the second AT lottery by executing the second AT lottery process included in the AT control process. In the second AT lottery process, it is determined whether or not a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied based on a command from the main control unit 41, and the second AT lottery is executed when the predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. FIG. 24 is a diagram for explaining lottery conditions that trigger the execution of the second AT lottery. FIG. 25 is a diagram for explaining a table referred to in the second AT lottery.

  As shown in the normal game state column of FIG. 24, when the current game state is the normal game state, the lottery condition is established by winning the bonus regardless of whether the effect state is AT. When the lottery condition is satisfied, the second AT lottery is performed with reference to the table shown in FIG. For example, the sub control unit 91 specifies the current gaming state based on the gaming state command from the main control unit 41 and specifies that the bonus has been won based on the internal winning command from the main control unit 41.

  When the table shown in FIG. 25A is referenced, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 0 at a rate of 50%, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at a rate of 40%, and the number of navigation stocks at a rate of 10%. Is determined to be 3, 3% of Navistock is determined to be 7%, Navistock is determined to be 10% of 2%, and Navistock is determined to be 20% of 1% The second AT lottery is performed.

  After the bonus is over, not only the number of navigation stocks determined in the 2nd AT lottery, but also the number of navigation stocks determined in the 1st AT lottery based on the bonus winning and the navigation stock determined in the 1st AT lottery after the bonus ends. The AT is controlled according to the total number with the number. The total number of navigation stocks may be configured such that an upper limit number (for example, 20) is provided and the upper limit number is set when the total number is equal to or greater than the upper limit number.

  Also, as shown in the preparation mode and AT column of FIG. 24, in the AT preparation mode, a lottery condition is established by winning a bonus. When the lottery condition is satisfied, the second AT is referenced with reference to the table shown in FIG. 25 (b) according to whether a freeze has occurred or the type of freeze that has occurred in the game in which the lottery condition has been satisfied. A lottery will be held. Whether a freeze has occurred or the type of freeze that has occurred is specified by a freeze-related command transmitted from the main control unit 41.

  In the AT preparation mode, a lottery condition is established by winning a bonus, but if no freeze occurs, refer to the bonus winning + no freeze table shown in FIG. The number is determined to be 1, the number of Navistock is determined to be 3 at a rate of 35%, the number of Navistock is determined to be 5 at a rate of 20%, and the number of Navistock is determined to be 10 at a rate of 10%. The second AT lottery is performed so that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 20 at the rate of%.

  Further, in the game where the bonus is won in the AT preparation mode and the lottery condition is satisfied, when the first freeze occurs, the bonus winning time + first freeze table shown in FIG. The number of Navistock is determined to be 1 by 30%, the number of Navistock is determined to be 3 by 30%, the number of Navistock is determined to be 5 by 20%, and the number of Navistock is 10 by 15% The second AT lottery is performed so that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 20 at a rate of 10%.

  Also, in the game in which a lottery condition is established by winning a bonus in the AT preparation mode, when the second freeze or the third freeze occurs, the bonus winning time + second / third freeze table shown in FIG. As a reference, the number of Navistock is determined to be 1 at a rate of 15%, the number of Navistock is determined to be 3 at a rate of 25%, the number of Navistock is determined to be 5 at a rate of 20%, and the rate is 20% The second AT lottery is performed so that the number of navigation stocks is determined as 10 and the number of navigation stocks is determined as 20 at a rate of 20%.

  Note that when the second AT lottery is performed with reference to the table shown in FIG. 25 (b), the number of navigation stocks is always determined to be 1 or more, so the AT is always controlled.

  Also, as shown in the preparation mode and non-AT column of FIG. 24, in the non-AT preparation mode, lottery conditions are satisfied every time 5 games are consumed or 30 bonuses are won. . When the lottery condition is satisfied, the second AT lottery is performed with reference to the table corresponding to the established lottery condition among the tables shown in FIG.

  In the second AT lottery process, in order to specify the number of games that have been consumed after being controlled in the preparation mode, for example, every time a game state command is received from the main control unit 41 after being controlled in the preparation mode, a predetermined counter Is counted up. The sub-control unit 41 specifies the number of games that have been consumed after being controlled in the preparation mode from the value of the counter, and the second AT lottery is executed when the number of games satisfies the lottery condition shown in FIG. For example, when the fifth game is finished after being controlled to the preparation mode, it is determined that five games have been consumed, and the second AT lottery is executed. It should be noted that the value of the predetermined counter is reset by reaching 30, winning a fall replay, winning a bonus, or the like.

  When it is determined that 5 games have been consumed after being controlled in the preparation mode, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 0 at a rate of 99% with reference to the table at the time of 5G digestion shown in FIG. The second AT lottery is performed so that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at the rate of.

  Further, if it is determined that 10 games have been consumed after 5 games have been digested and controlled to the preparation mode, Navistock is referenced at a rate of 98% with reference to the table for 10G digestion shown in FIG. The second AT lottery is performed so that the number is determined to be 0 and the navigation stock number is determined to be 1 at a rate of 2%.

  Further, when it is determined that 15 games have been digested after 5 games have been digested and the preparation mode has been controlled, the navigation stock is referenced at a rate of 95% with reference to the table for 15G digestion shown in FIG. The second AT lottery is performed so that the number is determined to be 0 and the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at a rate of 5%.

  Further, when it is determined that 20 games have been consumed after 5 games have been digested and controlled to the preparation mode, Navistock is referenced at a rate of 90% with reference to the table for 20G digestion shown in FIG. The number is determined to be 0, the number of Navistock is determined to be 1 at a rate of 7%, the number of Navistock is determined to be 3 at a rate of 2%, and the number of Navistock is determined to be 5 at a rate of 1% In addition, the second AT lottery is performed.

  Further, when it is determined that a total of 25 games have been digested after 5 games have been digested and the preparation mode has been controlled, the navigation stock is referenced at a rate of 70% with reference to the 25G digest table shown in FIG. The number is determined to be 0, the number of Navistock is determined to be 1 at a rate of 20%, the number of Navistock is determined to be 3 at a rate of 5%, and the number of Navistock is determined to be 5 at a rate of 3%. The second AT lottery is performed so that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 10 at the rate of%.

  Further, when it is determined that a total of 30 games have been digested after 5 games have been digested and the preparation mode has been controlled, the navigation stock is referenced at a rate of 60% with reference to the 30G digest table shown in FIG. The number is determined to be 1, the number of Navistock is determined to be 3 at a rate of 25%, the number of Navistock is determined to be 5 at a rate of 10%, and the number of Navistock is determined to be 10 at a rate of 3%. The second AT lottery is performed so that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 20 at the rate of%. When the second AT lottery is performed with reference to the table at the time of 30G digestion shown in FIG. 25 (d), the number of navigation stocks is always determined to be 1 or more. Become.

  Further, when a bonus is won in the non-AT preparation mode, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at a rate of 30% with reference to the bonus winning table shown in FIG. The number is determined to be 3, the number of Navistock is determined to be 5 at a rate of 20%, the number of Navistock is determined to be 10 at a rate of 10%, and the number of Navistock is determined to be 20 at a rate of 5% In addition, the second AT lottery is performed. Note that when the second AT lottery is performed with reference to the bonus winning table shown in FIG. 25 (d), the number of navigation stocks is always determined to be 1 or more. Become.

  In addition, as shown in the RT and AT fields of FIG. 24, when it is ART, a lottery condition is established by winning a bonus. When the lottery condition is satisfied, the second AT is referenced with reference to the table shown in FIG. 25C according to whether the freeze has occurred or the type of freeze that has occurred in the game in which the lottery condition is satisfied. A lottery will be held.

  When a lottery condition is established by winning a bonus at ART but no freezing occurs, the number of navigation stocks is calculated at a rate of 60% with reference to the table at the time of winning the bonus shown in FIG. Navistock number is determined to be 3 at a rate of 25%, Navistock number is determined to be 5 at a rate of 10%, Navistock number is determined to be 10 at a rate of 3%, 2% The second AT lottery is performed so that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 20 in proportion.

  In a game in which a lottery condition is established by winning a bonus in ART, when the first freeze occurs, the number of navigation stocks at a rate of 55% is referred to with reference to the bonus winning + no freeze table shown in FIG. Is determined as 1, Navistock number is determined as 3 at a rate of 20%, Navistock number is determined as 5 at a rate of 10%, Navistock number is determined as 10 at a rate of 8%, and 7% The second AT lottery is performed so that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 20 at the rate of.

  When a second freeze or a third freeze occurs in a game in which a lottery condition is established by winning a bonus in ART, refer to the bonus win + second / third freeze table shown in FIG. The number of Navistock is determined as 1 at 45%, the number of Navistock is determined as 3 at 15%, the number of Navistock is determined as 5 at 10%, and the number of Navistock as 13% Is determined to be 10, and the second AT lottery is performed so that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 20 at a rate of 17%.

  When the second AT lottery is performed with reference to the table shown in FIG. 25 (c), the number of navigation stocks is always determined to be 1 or more, and therefore the AT is always controlled.

  Also, as shown in the RT and non-AT column of FIG. 24, in the case of non-ART, as in the non-AT preparation mode, every time 5 games are consumed or bonus is won, as in the case of non-AT preparation mode. As a result, the lottery condition is established, and the second AT lottery is performed with reference to the table corresponding to the established lottery condition among the tables shown in FIG. In addition, when the 2nd AT lottery is performed during non-ART by referring to the table shown in FIG. Therefore, it is always controlled by the AT.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery condition that is satisfied every time 5 games are digested until 30 games are digested in non-ART, considers the number of games digested in the previous non-AT preparation mode controlled by the non-ART. And judge. That is, whether or not 30 games have been digested and whether or not 5 games have been digested in the 30 games, the total number of games of the number of games digested in the non-AT preparation mode and the number of games digested in the non-ART To be determined. That is, the sub-control unit 91 continuously executes a process of counting up a predetermined counter every time a gaming state command is received after being controlled in the non-AT preparation mode even after being controlled to be non-ART. For this reason, when control to the non-AT preparation mode is started, 30 games are consumed after the control to the non-AT preparation mode is started, regardless of whether or not the special event is stopped and controlled to RT. During this time, the players can be concentrated in the second AT lottery, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  It should be noted that the lottery condition that is satisfied every time five games are digested until 30 games are digested in non-ART, is determined based on the number of games digested in non-ART without taking into account the number of games digested in the preparation mode. May be. In this case, when it is fortunately controlled from the non-AT preparation mode to the non-ART, the player can be concentrated again in the second AT lottery in the subsequent 30 games, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Here, the degree of advantage for the player in the second AT lottery executed when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the preparation mode, and the RT is compared. The degree of advantage for the player is, for example, the ratio at which the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 or more in the AT lottery, that is, the ratio controlled by the AT, and the level at which the number of navigation stocks is determined in the AT lottery is high or low And so on.

  First, when the lottery condition is satisfied by winning the bonus, in the second AT lottery executed in the normal gaming state, the table shown in FIG. In the second AT lottery executed, the tables shown in FIGS. 25B and 25C or the table shown at the time of winning the bonus in FIG. 25D are referred to. For this reason, in the preparation mode or RT, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 or more at a higher rate than in the normal gaming state, and the number of navigation stocks is determined to be higher at a higher rate. That is, in the preparation mode or RT, it is advantageous for the player by being controlled by the AT at a higher rate and at a higher rate of navigation stock than at the normal gaming state. It can be said that an AT lottery is held. As a result, when the player is in the preparation mode or RT, the player can have a sense of expectation for being controlled by the AT and acquiring a larger number of navigation stocks than in the normal gaming state. Can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the non-AT preparation mode or non-ART, the 5G to 30G digestion table shown in FIG. 25 (d) is referred to every time 5 games are digested until 30 games are exhausted without winning a bonus. And the second AT lottery. For this reason, in the non-AT preparation mode or non-ART, the AT is controlled at a higher rate than in the normal gaming state. In the non-AT preparation mode or non-ART, as described above, by winning a bonus, the AT is controlled at a higher rate than in the normal gaming state, and the navigation stock is increased at a higher rate. By being determined, it can be said that AT lottery is performed so as to be advantageous to the player. As a result, in the non-AT preparation mode or the non-ART, a sense of expectation can be given to being controlled by the AT, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  In the non-AT preparation mode or non-ART, as shown in the table at the time of digestion of 5G to 30G in FIG. 25 (d), the proportion controlled by the AT in proportion to the number of digested games, and more navigation stocks The winning rate is set so that each ratio determined by the number is high.

  Further, when the lottery condition is established by winning a bonus in the AT preparation mode or ART, as shown in each of FIGS. 25 (b) and (c), the freezing has occurred or the type of the freezing has occurred. The degree of advantage for the player (here, the ratio determined by the larger number of navigation stocks in the AT lottery) is set differently depending on whether or not there is. In the present embodiment, AT lottery is performed so that the degree of advantage for the player is higher when the freeze occurs than when the freeze does not occur. In addition, even when a freeze occurs, the second freeze or the third freeze that occurs for a longer period of time than the first freeze occurs compared to when the first freeze that occurs for a shorter period of time. At that time, an AT lottery is performed so that the degree of advantage for the player is higher. As a result, in AT preparation mode or ART, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that a freeze will occur and that a second freeze or a third freeze will occur rather than the first freeze, improving the interest of the game Can be made. For example, to improve the fun of a game when a freeze occurs for a long period of time as a freeze before rotation, and to improve the fun of a game when a freeze after rotation occurs even if the freeze before the turn is short Can do.

  In FIGS. 24 and 25, when the bonus is won in the AT preparation mode or ART, the degree of advantage for the player differs depending on whether the freeze has occurred or the type of freeze that has occurred. The example where AT lottery is performed has been explained. However, when a bonus is won in the normal gaming state, even when a bonus is won in the non-AT preparation mode or non-ART, a freeze has occurred or the type of freeze that has occurred. Depending on the situation, the AT lottery may be performed so that the degree of advantage for the player differs.

  In addition, FIG. 25 illustrates an example in which an AT lottery is performed so that when the bonus is won, the second freeze or the third freeze is generated more advantageously than the first freeze. However, the order in which the degree of advantage increases is not limited to this, and any order may be used. For example, the degree of advantage for the player is higher in the first freeze than in the second freeze, and The AT lottery may be performed so that the third freeze is higher than the first freeze. In this case, it is possible to improve the interest of the game when a freeze occurs for a short period of time as a freeze before rotation, and further improve the interest of the game when a freeze after rotation occurs.

  In addition, the type of freeze that increases the degree of advantage may be different depending on the gaming state when the bonus is won. For example, when the game state when the bonus is won is the normal game state, non-ART, and non-AT preparation mode, the first freeze has a higher degree of advantage for the player than the second freeze, and the first The AT lottery is performed so that the third freeze is higher than the freeze, and in the ART and AT preparation modes, the second freeze is higher than the first freeze and the second freeze is more advantageous for the player. You may comprise so that AT lottery may be performed so that the 3rd freeze may become higher than 2 freezes. Thereby, the player's expectation can be made different according to the combination of the game state when the freeze occurs and the type of freeze that has occurred, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 26 shows that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 or more in the non-AT preparation mode or the second AT lottery in non-ART based on the winning rate of the table at the time of digesting 5G to 30G in FIG. It is a figure which shows the promotion rate promoted to ART. In FIG. 26, the horizontal axis indicates the progress of the number of games, and the vertical axis indicates the promotion rate corresponding to the number of games.

  From FIG. 26, in the non-AT preparation mode or non-ART, the promotion rate increases as the number of games played increases. In particular, when 30 games are consumed, the game is always controlled by the AT. As a result, in the non-AT preparation mode or non-ART, the player can have a sense of expectation that the preparation mode or RT will be maintained and the game will be played as many times as possible without winning the fall replay. Can be improved.

  In the second AT lottery executed by winning a bonus in the AT preparation mode or ART, the table shown in FIG. 25B is referred to in the AT preparation mode, and FIG. ) Is referred to. For this reason, in either the AT preparation mode or ART, the bonus preparation will always control the AT preparation mode after the bonus ends. However, in the AT preparation mode, the rate is higher at a higher rate than in the ART. A large number of navigation stocks will be determined. That is, in the AT preparation mode, it can be said that the AT lottery is performed so as to be advantageous to the player by determining the number of navigation stocks at a higher rate than in the ART. As a result, when controlled by the AT, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for winning a bonus in the preparation mode, that is, winning a bonus at an early stage as much as possible, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the lottery conditions determined in accordance with the current game state and performance state are satisfied by the second AT lottery process performed by the sub-control unit 91. When the lottery condition is satisfied, the second AT lottery is performed with reference to the corresponding table shown in FIG.

  In the present embodiment, even when the above-described notification promotion condition is satisfied, the corresponding number of navigation stocks is added to the number of navigation stocks determined by the AT lottery. That is, the sub-control unit 91 stores, in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c, an AT flag indicating the total number obtained by adding and adding the corresponding number of navigation stocks to the number of navigation stocks determined by the AT lottery when the notification promotion condition is satisfied. . FIG. 27 is a diagram for explaining the number of navigation stocks added when the notification promotion condition is satisfied.

  When the notification promotion condition is established by winning the strawberry (1) shown in FIG. 7 (e) in the bonus, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at a rate of 50%, and the number of navigation stocks at a rate of 50%. 2 is determined.

  Further, when the notification promoting condition is established by winning strawberry (1) + strawberry (2) shown in FIG. 7E during the bonus, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 3 at a rate of 100%.

  As described above, when the notification promoting condition is satisfied, the control is always performed by the AT regardless of the result of the AT lottery. For this reason, the player can have a sense of expectation that the notification promotion condition is satisfied.

  In addition, the number of navigation stocks determined when winning strawberry (1) + strawberry (2) is determined to be larger than the number of winning strawberry (1) alone. That is, it can be said that AT is controlled so that the player who wins strawberry (1) + strawberry (2) is more advantageous to the player than the player who wins strawberry (1) alone. As a result, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the notification promotion condition is established by winning strawberry (1) + strawberry (2), and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 according to the present embodiment performs the AT management process included in the AT control process when in the preparation mode or RT, so as to respond to the result of the AT lottery and the success or failure of the notification promotion condition. The control to the AT is managed based on the AT flag that is set.

  Specifically, the sub-control unit 91 specifies that the AT flag is AT when the control to the preparation mode is started after the bonus ends or when the control is already in the non-AT preparation mode. If so, control is made to the AT preparation mode.

  As a result, when the AT is determined to be controlled according to the result of the AT lottery by the bonus winning or bonus end or the establishment of the notification promotion condition, the AT preparation mode is controlled after the bonus ends, and the AT is not determined to be controlled. If this happens, the non-AT preparation mode is controlled after the bonus. In addition, when it is determined that the AT is controlled in the second AT lottery based on the number of games in the non-AT preparation mode, the AT preparation mode is subsequently controlled. In the preparation mode, the navigation preparation can be executed by controlling to the AT preparation mode without consuming (subtracting) the number of navigation stocks.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 specifies that the AT is AT from the AT flag when the special event stops in the preparation mode and the control to the RT is started, or when it is already controlled to the non-ART. When the number of navigation stocks is reached, 1 point is consumed (subtracted) to control ART during a predetermined number of times (for example, 50).

  In RT, by consuming one point of the number of navigation stocks, it is controlled to ART that can execute navigation effects while the game is consumed a predetermined number of times. When 1 point is consumed for the number of navigation stocks, the AT flag indicating the number of navigation stocks subtracted by 1 is updated.

  As a result, when the control to the RT is started, when the control to the AT is determined, the navigation stock is consumed by 1 point and the game is controlled to the ART while the game is consumed a predetermined number of times. When no is performed, it is controlled to non-ART. In this case, in this embodiment, the control is performed to the ART when the control to the RT is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the control is performed to the ART when the navigation target combination (for example, the fall replay) is won. May be.

  Also, when it is determined to control to AT in the second AT lottery by non-ART game number digestion, the navigation stock number is consumed by one point and the game is controlled to ART while digesting the game a predetermined number of times. In this case, in this embodiment, the control is performed by ART when winning the navigation target combination (for example, fall replay). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and control may be performed when it is determined to be controlled by AT. Good.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 performs AT management processing to count the number of games that have been digested when it is an ART, and control it to a non-ART when a predetermined number of times is reached. At this time, if the number of navigation stocks indicated by the AT flag is 0, it is updated to the AT flag indicating that it is not AT.

  The sub-control unit 91 performs AT management processing to determine whether or not the fall replay has been won when it is non-ART. When it is determined that the fall replay has been won, and when it is further determined from the AT flag that the vehicle is an AT, the navigation stock number is consumed by 1 point, and the ART is controlled again while the game is consumed a predetermined number of times. . On the other hand, when the fall replay is won and the AT flag specifies that it is not AT, the ART is not controlled and the navigation effect is not executed.

  As described above, when it is RT, it is controlled to ART while digesting a predetermined number of games by consuming one point of the number of navigation stock. Also, even when the game is digested a predetermined number of times in ART and is once controlled to be non-ART, the fall replay is performed on condition that the AT flag is still specified and the number of navigation stocks is 1 or more. It is controlled again by ART while a predetermined number of games have been consumed since winning. Thereby, it can be said that the ART can be controlled over a period corresponding to the number of navigation stocks set according to the result of the AT lottery and the result of success or failure of the notification promotion condition. Further, it can be said that the ART can be repeatedly controlled by the number of times corresponding to the number of navigation stocks set according to the result of the AT lottery and the result of success or failure of the notification promotion condition.

  In addition, the sub control unit 91 in the present embodiment performs the navigation effect according to the result of the internal winning by performing the navigation effect execution process included in the game effect execution process in the AT preparation mode or ART. Is done. The result of the internal winning is specified from the internal winning command from the main control unit 41.

  For example, in the AT preparation mode, when a fall replay is won, a navigation effect corresponding to the type of replay won simultaneously with the fall replay is executed. Also, in ART, when a fall replay is won, a navigation effect corresponding to the type of replay that is won at the same time as the fall replay is executed, and one of nine roles (1) to (9) is won. A navigation effect corresponding to the type of nine winning combinations is sometimes executed.

  As a navigation effect, when a replay + falling replay is won, for example, a message “Press from the left or inside!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal as a navigation effect for notifying information for first stopping the left reel 2L or the middle reel 2C. When the replay + fall replay + BAR replay is won, an effect of displaying a message such as “Press from the right!” On the liquid crystal display 51 is executed. In addition, the navigation effect of the fall replay is not limited to that executed in the above manner, and may be executed in any manner as long as it is an effect executed in a manner corresponding to the internal winning result. .

  In addition, when winning one of the nine-piece roles (1) to (9), for example, the nine-piece role (1) is won as a navigation effect for notifying information that can identify the type of the nine-piece role won. Sometimes, an effect of displaying a message such as “Aim for Red 7 on the left and Red 7 on the right!” On the liquid crystal display 51 is executed, and when winning 9 roles (9), “Left BAR, Right BAR” An effect of displaying a message such as “Aim at!” On the liquid crystal display 51 is executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of notification modes are provided as the navigation effects for each of the nine winning combinations (1) to (9).

  FIG. 28 is a diagram for explaining a notification mode determination table for determining the notification mode of the nine-stage navigation effect. Three types of A, B, and C are provided as notification modes for each of the nine role combinations (1) to (9). The notification mode of the nine-effect navigation effect is randomly determined by the navigation effect execution process using the random number extracted from the random number circuit in accordance with the notification mode determination table. The notification mode determination table is set so that the distribution rate varies depending on the number of remaining navigation stocks.

  For example, when the remaining number of navigation stocks identified from the AT flag is “0”, the distribution rate is set so that it is determined as A at a rate of 95% and determined as B at a rate of 5%. ing.

  Further, when the remaining navigation stock number specified from the AT flag is “1” to “3”, it is determined as A at a rate of 90%, determined as B at a rate of 9%, and at a rate of 1%. The distribution rate is set so that C is determined.

  Further, when the number of remaining navigation stocks specified from the AT flag is “4” or more, it is determined as A at a rate of 80%, determined as B at a rate of 15%, and determined as C at a rate of 5%. As shown, the distribution rate is set.

  The distribution ratio of the notification mode determination table shown in FIG. 28 is set so that the ratio determined to B or C increases as the number of remaining navigation stocks increases as the notification mode of the nine-effect role effect. Has been. For this reason, the number of remaining navigation stocks can be estimated from the frequency executed in B or C, for example, depending on the type of the notification mode of the nine-piece navigation effect. As a result, the player can be focused on the navigation effect, and the entertainment of the game can be improved. In addition, when the nine-game navigation effect is executed in the notification mode A, the sense of expectation that the number of navigation stocks remains is greater when it is executed in the notification mode B or the notification mode C. Can be improved.

  Further, only when the number of navigation stocks remains “1” or more, it can be determined as C as the notification mode of the nine-stage navigation effect. For this reason, when the navigation effect of the nine-piece combination is executed in the notification mode C, it is possible to give the player a sense of security that the AT is still continued.

  When A is selected as the notification mode of the 9-role role navigation effect, a message is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 that reminds of the winning 9-comb configuration symbol, and the winning 9-role configuration symbol is displayed by the male. A navigation effect generated from the speakers 53 and 54 by voice is executed. For example, when the winning combination (1) is won, an effect of displaying a message such as “Aim for Red 7 on the left and Red 7 on the right!” On the liquid crystal display 51 is executed, and the speaker 53 is displayed at the start of reel rotation. , 54, an effect of generating a sound such as “Let's aim for the left red 7 and the right red 7!” With the voice of the man is executed. In addition, when the winning combination (9) is won, an effect of displaying a message such as “Aim for the left BAR and the right BAR!” On the liquid crystal display 51 is executed, and the speakers 53 and 54 are displayed at the start of reel rotation. The effect of generating a voice such as “Let's aim at the left BAR and the right BAR!” With the voice of the man is executed.

  In addition, when B is determined as the notification mode of the 9-piece role navigation effect, a message reminiscent of the winning 9-piece winning design is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the winning 9-playing winning design symbol is displayed. A navigation effect that is generated from the speakers 53 and 54 by a female voice is executed. For example, when the winning combination (1) is won, an effect of displaying a message such as “Aim for Red 7 on the left and Red 7 on the right!” On the liquid crystal display 51 is executed, and the speaker 53 is displayed at the start of reel rotation. , 54 produces an effect of generating a voice such as “Let's aim for the left red 7 and the right red 7!” With the female voice. In addition, when the winning combination (9) is won, an effect of displaying a message such as “Aim for the left BAR and the right BAR!” On the liquid crystal display 51 is executed, and the speakers 53 and 54 are displayed at the start of reel rotation. The effect of generating a voice such as “Let's aim at the left BAR and the right BAR!” With the female voice is executed.

  In addition, when C is determined as the notification mode of the nine-player role effect, the navigation effect is executed in the B-notification mode, and a predetermined effect (predetermined character appearance, predetermined character) corresponding to the selected nine-player role is executed. The message display is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. For example, when the winning combination (1) of 9 sheets is won, an effect of displaying a message such as “Aim for Red 7 on the left and Red 7 on the right!” On the liquid crystal display 51 is executed, and the speakers 53 and 54 are displayed at the start of reel rotation. From the woman's voice, an effect that generates a voice such as “Let's aim for the left red 7 and the right red 7!”, And a character corresponding to 9 roles (1) appears and “may still continue? An effect of displaying a message such as “OK!” On the liquid crystal display 51 is executed. In addition, when the winning combination (9) is won, an effect of displaying a message such as “Aim for the left BAR and the right BAR!” On the liquid crystal display 51 is executed. A voice effect such as “Let's aim at the left BAR and the right BAR!” Is executed, and a character corresponding to the nine-piece role (9) appears and “may still continue!” An effect of displaying the message on the liquid crystal display 51 is executed.

  In addition, although the content of each of the notification modes A, B, and C of the navigation effect of 9 sheets as illustrated above is illustrated, the content of each of the notification modes A, B, and C is not limited to the above, Any mode may be used as long as the navigation effect is executed in a mode that can be identified from the notification mode.

  When the navigation effect relating to the fall replay and the navigation effect relating to the nine-piece roles (1) to (9) are both executed in a common notification mode in that a message for specifying the operation procedure is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. I can say that. For this reason, it is not necessary to specify whether the information notified by the navigation effect is information for avoiding the fall replay or information for winning the 9-piece combination (1) to (9), and is common. By stopping according to the information notified in the notification mode, it is possible to avoid the fall replay winning and to win the 9 winning winning combinations.

  As described above, the sub-control unit 91 according to the present embodiment performs the AT control process based on the command from the main control unit 41, thereby controlling the effect state according to the result of the AT lottery and the success or failure of the notification promotion condition. When it is AT, a navigation effect is executed.

  The sub-control unit 91 in the present embodiment is a non-ART or a period from the non-ART to the normal gaming state until a predetermined number of games are consumed (executes a non-ART effect to be described later with reference to FIG. 31). 9 period combination (1) to (9) by winning the non-AT navigation effect execution process during the non-AT period, etc. A non-AT navigation lottery for determining whether or not to perform a navigation effect corresponding to the type of the game is performed, and a navigation effect corresponding to the type of the nine winning combinations selected when winning the non-AT navigation lottery is executed. The

  FIG. 29 is a diagram for explaining a table used for the non-AT navigation lottery. When it is a non-ART or when it is a period from the non-ART to the normal game state until the predetermined number of games are consumed, if any of the nine-player roles (1) to (9) is won, When the AT navigation lottery is executed, it is determined that the navigation effect corresponding to the type of nine winning combinations selected at 90% is executed, and it is determined that the navigation effect is not executed at a rate of 10%.

  As described above, when one of the nine winning combinations (1) to (9) is won in the period when the player is non-ART or is controlled from the non-ART to the normal game state and the predetermined number of games are consumed, a predetermined rate is taken. A navigation effect is performed. Thereby, in the period of non-ART or in a period in which a predetermined number of games are consumed while being controlled from the non-ART to the normal gaming state, it is possible to reduce the missing of nine winning combinations. The predetermined ratio is not limited to the above winning rate. For example, when it is non-ART, or when a predetermined number of games are consumed by being controlled from non-ART to the normal game state, when winning one of the nine roles (1) to (9), the rate is 100%. A navigation effect may be executed.

  Note that, in the case of non-ART or in a period in which a predetermined number of games are consumed while being controlled from the non-ART to the normal gaming state, the notification mode of the nine-player navigation effect is that the remaining navigation stock number shown in FIG. It is determined from a plurality of types of notification modes according to the same distribution rate as when “0”.

  Next, an example of a case where the AT is not controlled and a case where the AT is controlled according to the result of the AT lottery and the result of success or failure of the notification promotion condition will be described. FIG. 30 is a diagram for describing an example of a case where the AT is not controlled and a case where the AT is controlled according to the result of the AT lottery and the result of success or failure of the notification promotion condition. In FIG. 30, the lower column of the preparation mode and RT indicates whether or not the AT is being performed, and indicates the navigation target combination in each of the preparation mode and RT. In addition, the x mark for the navigation target role indicates that the navigation effect is not executed even when the navigation target role is won, and the ○ mark for the navigation target role indicates the navigation effect when the navigation target role is selected. The symbol “Δ” for the navigation target combination indicates that the navigation effect is executed according to a predetermined probability when the navigation target combination is won.

  FIG. 30 (a) shows that AT is not won in the AT lottery, AT is not won in the second AT lottery in the non-AT preparation mode after the bonus is ended, and the special rollout is stopped before the replay. It is a figure which shows the example which was won and was controlled to the normal game state.

  In FIG. 30 (b), AT was not won in the AT lottery and was not won in the second AT lottery in the non-AT preparation mode. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example in which the AT is not won in the second AT lottery during the non-ART and as a result, a fall replay is won and the game is controlled in the normal gaming state.

  As described above, in the preparation mode and RT, the winning probability of falling replay is higher than that in the normal gaming state. Also, the fall replay has different winning avoidance procedures depending on the type of replay that is won at the same time. For this reason, if the production state is not controlled by the AT in the preparation mode and RT, it is impossible to grasp whether or not the fall replay has been won, and intentionally avoiding the fall replay winning with a high probability. I can't. As a result, if the performance state is not controlled by the AT, as shown in FIGS. 30A and 30B, the RT is not easily controlled from the preparation mode to the RT and is luckily controlled by the RT. However, it becomes difficult to maintain the normal gaming state, making it difficult for the player to obtain profits.

  On the other hand, when the non-AT preparation mode is controlled to RT fortunately as shown in FIG. 30 (b), as shown in FIG. 29, the navigation effect is executed according to a predetermined probability when the nine winning combinations are won. The benefit of being played is given to the player.

  FIG.30 (c) is a figure which shows the example which won AT by the 2nd AT lottery in the non-ART shown in FIG.30 (b), and was promoted to ART. When it is determined that the game is an AT in RT, the control of making ART during a predetermined number of game digests is repeatedly performed according to the number of navigation stocks. In ART, when it is determined that the fall replay is won based on the internal winning command from the main control unit 41, it is determined that one of the nine winning combinations (1) to (9) is won. Sometimes a corresponding navigation effect is executed.

  In addition, when the AT is won in the second AT lottery during the non-AT preparation mode, the player is promoted to the AT preparation mode. In the AT preparation mode, when it is determined that the fall replay is won based on the internal winning command from the main control unit 41, a corresponding navigation effect is executed.

  Thus, even in a disadvantageous situation where the production state is not controlled by the AT in the preparation mode and RT, there is a possibility that it can be controlled by the AT even during non-AT by winning the AT in the second AT lottery. . Therefore, even in the non-AT preparation mode or non-ART, a sense of expectation for promotion to the AT preparation mode or ART can be given, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 30 (c), even if navigation at the time of winning the fall replay is executed in ART, if the stop operation is wrong, the fall replay is won and the game state is set to the normal game. At the same time, the AT is terminated. As described above, when the AT flag is specified to be AT, when winning the fall replay, the number of navigation stocks is cleared, and the AT flag is updated to a flag specifying that the AT is not AT. As a result, if the AT is accidentally ended despite the situation where the navigation effect is performed, the AT is not controlled unless the AT lottery is won again or the notification promotion condition is not satisfied. can do.

  As described above, when a bonus is won during an AT, and the number of navigation stocks according to the result of the AT lottery performed due to the bonus winning is added and added, the fact that the AT flag is an AT is indicated. If you win a fall replay when you are identified, you are not limited to clearing the number of Navistock, Navistock that performs the clear number determination process to determine the number of Navistock to clear and subtracts the determined Navistock number The number is updated to an AT flag indicating that the number can be specified and it is not AT, and then the number of navigation stocks according to the result of AT lottery performed by bonus winning is added and added, and control is performed to the AT after the bonus ends. May be. As a result, even if the AT is closed due to accidental fall replay winning while it is in AT, there is a possibility that the number of Navistock will be added by winning the bonus. It can be compensated afterwards.

  FIG. 30 (d) illustrates an example in which the AT preparation mode and ART are controlled after the bonus ends when the AT promotion or the notification promoting condition is satisfied during the bonus in the AT lottery executed by the bonus winning or the bonus end. It is a figure for doing.

  In the AT preparation mode, when it is determined that the fall replay is won, a corresponding navigation effect is executed. For this reason, as described above, unless the operation procedure is wrong, it is possible to reliably avoid the fall replay winning and stop the special outcome and control the ART.

  When it is determined that the game is an AT in RT, the control of making ART during a predetermined number of game digests is repeatedly performed according to the number of navigation stocks. In ART, not only when it is determined that a fall replay has been won, but also when it is determined that a winning 9-piece combination has been won, a corresponding navigation effect is executed. For this reason, as described above, unless the operation procedure is mistaken, it is possible to reliably avoid the fall replay winning and continue the RT, and to reliably acquire medals to be paid out by winning nine winning prizes.

  Thus, if the performance state is controlled to AT, as shown in FIG. 30 (d), it is easy to control from the preparation mode to RT and difficult to control to the normal gaming state, and is controlled to RT. Also, the RT can be easily maintained, and the player can easily obtain profits.

  As described above, after being controlled to ART for the number of times corresponding to the number of navigation stocks, it is controlled to be non-ART, and thereafter, no navigation effect is executed even when a fall replay is won. On the other hand, even after being controlled to be non-ART, when a winning combination of 9 sheets is won, a navigation effect corresponding to the winning combination of 9 sheets is executed with a predetermined probability as shown in FIG.

  Next, the game state effect executed according to the current game state and effect state will be described. The sub-control unit 91 in the present embodiment performs a game state effect execution process included in the game effect execution process, thereby providing a game state effect related to the current game state and the effect state on the liquid crystal display 51 and the effect. This is performed using electrical components such as the LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55.

  As the gaming state effect, for example, when in the AT preparation mode, an AT preparation mode effect capable of specifying the AT preparation mode (for example, a message such as “AT preparation mode is in progress!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51). In the case of ART, an ART effect (for example, a message such as “ART in progress!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51) that can identify the ART is performed, and the non-AT preparation mode or non-ART is performed. In some cases, a non-AT effect (for example, a flashing display of the effect effect LED 52) that can specify non-AT is performed. In addition, during the bonus, a predetermined bonus effect that can identify the bonus is performed, and during the normal gaming state, a predetermined normal gaming state effect that can identify the normal gaming state is performed.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram for explaining a game state effect executed in accordance with the current game state and effect state. FIG. 31 (a) shows an example when there is a number of navigation stocks (for example, 3 points) by winning an AT in the AT lottery, etc. FIG. 31 (b) shows a case where there is no number of navigation stocks and RT FIG. 31 (c) shows an example in which the normal gaming state is controlled without being controlled, and FIG. 31 (c) shows a case in which there is no navigation stock number and the normal gaming state is controlled after being controlled from the preparation mode to RT. An example is shown. In each of FIGS. 31A to 31C, the current gaming state controlled by the main control unit 41 is shown in the upper stage, and the current performance state controlled by the sub-control unit 91 is shown in the middle stage. In the lower part, a game state effect controlled by the sub-control unit 91 is shown.

  First, referring to FIG. 31A, when the gaming state is a bonus as shown in (a1), a bonus effect is executed as shown in (a3). Further, when the bonus is ended and the preparation mode is controlled, the production state is controlled to AT as shown in (a2), and the AT preparation mode production is controlled as shown in (a3). Is running. Thereby, it is recognized that the AT preparation mode is controlled, and the player can intentionally avoid the fall replay winning based on the navigation effect, and can surely stop the special outcome and control to ART.

  Further, when the gaming state is controlled to RT as shown in (a1), as described above, it is repeatedly controlled to ART by the number of times corresponding to the number of navigation stocks. That is, as shown in (a2), every time the number of navigation stock is consumed, it is controlled to AT for 50 games by controlling to AT. Thereafter, when it is controlled to be non-ART and the fact that the AT flag is specified from the AT flag when the fall replay is won, the number of navigation stocks is consumed and the process of controlling 50 games to ART again is repeated. In FIG. 31A, since the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 3, the ART is controlled three times as shown in (a2).

  Further, while the ART is controlled, the navigation effect is executed and the ART effect is executed as shown in (a3). Accordingly, it is recognized that the control is performed by the ART, and the player can make a prize without losing 9 winning combinations while intentionally avoiding the fall replay prize based on the navigation effect.

  On the other hand, as shown in (a3), the non-ART effect is executed while the ART is ended by having consumed 50 games and is controlled to be non-ART. As a result, there is a possibility that the number of navigation stocks may remain even during a non-ART presentation, so that the player can have a sense of expectation for being controlled by ART again. , You can improve the fun of the game.

  If the AT flag is not specified as AT when the fall replay is won in a non-ART, the number of times corresponding to the number of navigation stocks is controlled to ART, so the navigation effect is executed without being controlled by the AT. Not.

  In the present embodiment, even if a fall replay is won in non-ART and the game is controlled to the normal gaming state, as shown in (a3), the non-ART effect is continued while the predetermined number of games are consumed. Run. As a result, even when the game state is controlled to the normal game state, the player can have the expectation for being controlled by the ART again as described above, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  After executing the non-ART effect over the predetermined game while in the normal game state, the normal game state effect corresponding to the normal game state is executed as shown in (a3).

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29, when a non-ART effect is executed during non-ART or when a predetermined number of games are consumed by controlling from non-ART to the normal gaming state, When one of the winning combinations (1) to (9) is won, a corresponding navigation effect is executed at a predetermined rate. As a result, the player can have a sense of expectation to be controlled by ART again, improve the fun of the game, and reduce the missed out of 9 roles and win the prize. It is possible to reduce the loss due to not.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of backgrounds to be displayed are provided as ART effects. FIG. 32 is a diagram for explaining a table for specifying the type of background to be displayed as the ART effect.

  Background types include daytime (for example, blue sky, bright red sun), evening (for example, sunset), and night (for example, stars, moon) ) Are provided.

  The background type is randomized by using random numbers extracted from a random number circuit according to the background determination table shown in FIG. 32A or the background change table shown in FIG. To be determined. The background determination table is a table for determining the type of background when the number of navigation stock is consumed and the control to the ART is started and the ART effect is started. The background change table is a table for determining whether to change the background to evening or night for each game when the ART effect is executed with the background of the daytime. Each of the background determination table and the background change table is set so that the distribution rate differs depending on the number of remaining navigation stocks.

  First, the background determination table will be described with reference to FIG. For example, when the remaining number of navigation stocks when the number of navigation stocks is consumed and controlled to ART is “0”, it is determined at noon at a rate of 90% and at evenings at a rate of 10%. In addition, a distribution rate is set.

  Also, when the remaining number of navigation stocks when the number of navigation stocks is consumed and controlled to ART is “1” to “3”, it is determined at noon at a rate of 70% and in the evening at a rate of 20%. The distribution ratio is set so that it is determined at a rate of 10% at night.

  Further, when the remaining number of navigation stock when the number of navigation stock is consumed and controlled to ART is “4” or more, it is determined in the day at a rate of 50%, determined in the evening at a rate of 30%, The distribution rate is set to be determined at night at a rate of 20%.

  The distribution ratio in the background determination table shown in FIG. 32A is set so that the ratio determined in the evening or night becomes higher as the background of the ART effect as the remaining number of navigation stocks increases. . For this reason, it is possible to estimate the remaining number of navigation stocks depending on the type of background of the ART effect. As a result, the player can be focused on the background of the ART effect, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, when the background of the ART effect is evening or night, it is possible to improve the expectation that a large number of navigation stocks remain.

  Further, only when the number of navigation stocks remains “1” or more, it can be determined at night as the background of the ART effect. For this reason, when the ART effect is executed in the night background, it is possible to give the player a sense of security that the AT is still continued.

  In addition, when the background of the ART effect is determined using the background determination table shown in FIG. 32A, the remaining points are determined because the total number of points specified from the point giving effect and the notification promotion condition are satisfied. When the player recognizes that the number of navigation stocks is 1 or more, the background type may not be determined at noon. As a result, an effect that is clearly erroneous is executed such that noon is selected as the background of the ART effect even though the player recognizes that the remaining number of navigation stock is 1 or more. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience.

  Next, the background change table will be described with reference to FIG. For example, the distribution rate is set so that the background is not changed at a rate of 100% when the number of remaining navigation stocks specified from the AT flag is “0”.

  In addition, when the number of remaining navigation stocks specified from the AT flag is “1” to “3”, the background is not changed at a rate of 99.5%, but is changed from noon to evening at a rate of 0.5%. As shown, the distribution rate is set.

  Also, when the remaining number of navigation stocks identified from the AT flag is “4” or more, the background is not changed at a rate of 99.4%, and is changed from noon to evening at a rate of 0.5%. The distribution rate is set to change from day to night at a rate of 1%.

  The distribution ratio of the background change table shown in FIG. 32B is such that the background of the ART effect can be changed from noon to evening or night only when the remaining number of navigation stock is “1” or more. Is set to In addition, the ratio of changing the background from noon is set to be higher when the number of remaining navigation stocks is “4” or more than when it is “1” to “3”. For this reason, the background of the ART effect is changed from daytime to evening or night, so that the player can recognize that the remaining number of navigation stocks is “1” or more, and the number of navigation stocks is larger. The player can have a sense of expectation for what remains, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  In addition, the background of the ART effect is set to be changeable from day to night only when the remaining number of navigation stocks is “4” or more. For this reason, when the background is changed from the daytime to the nighttime, it is possible to give the player a sense of security that the AT is still continued.

  Next, referring to FIG. 31 (b), when the bonus is ended and the preparation mode is controlled, the production state is not controlled by AT as shown in (b2), so the non-AT preparation mode is controlled. As shown in (b3), the non-AT effect is executed. In addition, referring to FIG. 31 (c), even when the control is fortunately controlled to RT in the non-AT preparation mode, it is controlled to non-ART because it is not controlled by AT, and the non-AT effect continues as shown in (c3). And running.

  By executing the non-AT effect, the player recognizes that the AT is not controlled and the navigation effect is not executed. Accordingly, it is possible to digest the game as many times as possible without winning the fall replay, and to give the player a sense of expectation for winning the AT in the second AT lottery based on game digestion.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 (b3) and (c3), as in FIG. 31 (a3), even if a fall replay is won in the preparation mode or RT and the game is controlled in the normal gaming state, the game continues over the predetermined game. Continue to perform non-AT effects. As a result, even when the game is controlled in the normal gaming state, it is possible to digest the game as many times as possible without winning the fall replay, and to have a sense of expectation for winning the AT in the second AT lottery by game digestion. Since it can be held by a person, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29, when it is non-ART or is controlled from the non-ART to the normal gaming state and a predetermined number of games are digested, that is, fortunately controlled to RT, In the period from the end of RT to the normal game state until a predetermined number of games are consumed, the corresponding navigation effect is executed at a predetermined rate when one of the nine winning combinations (1) to (9) is won. The As a result, it is possible to reduce a loss caused by not winning a prize even though the winning combination has been reduced by reducing the missed 9-piece combination.

Next, main effects obtained by the embodiment described above will be described.
(1-1) In the above-described embodiment, when a fall replay is won in the preparation mode or RT, the game state is controlled to the normal gaming state. As described with reference to FIG. 8 (a), this fall replay is based on whether the replay + fall replay is won or the replay + fall replay + BAR replay is won, and an operation procedure for winning and avoiding a win. Each operating procedure is different. In addition, for the nine-piece roles (1) to (9), even if one of them is elected, the stop switches 8L and 8R are connected to these roles from the symbols constituting each of the nine-sheet roles (1) to (9). If you don't operate at the right time to win, you won't win the 9 winning prizes.

  On the other hand, when controlled by the AT, a navigation effect corresponding to the type of replay that is won simultaneously with the fall replay is executed. For this reason, when controlled by the AT, even when the fall replay is won, it can be operated according to the navigation procedure according to the operation procedure for avoiding the fall replay winning.

  Further, when controlled by the AT, a navigation effect corresponding to the type of the winning 9-sheet combination is executed when any of the 9-port combinations (1) to (9) is won. For this reason, when controlled by the AT, even when one of the nine winning combinations (1) to (9) is won, an operation for winning the winning nine winning combination according to the navigation effect Can be operated in steps.

  Therefore, when being controlled by the AT, it is possible to avoid being controlled to the normal gaming state, and it is possible to reduce the missed winning combination of nine sheets, which is an advantageous state for the player.

  Such ATs are controlled by being determined as one or more navigation stocks in AT lotteries such as the first AT lottery shown in FIGS. 16 to 18 and the second AT lottery shown in FIGS. The

  Further, among the AT lotteries, the first AT lottery is performed at the time of winning the bonus and at the end of the bonus as shown in FIG. In the 1st AT lottery conducted at the time of winning the bonus, it is determined that the larger the total number of granted points, the higher the number of granted points, the greater the number of Navistocks will be set to 1 or more, according to the total number of granted points. The lottery will be drawn according to the winning rate. In addition, in the first AT lottery performed at the end of the bonus, according to the total number of granted points given during the bonus, the larger the total number of granted points, the higher the number of navigation stocks is set to 1 or more. The lottery will be drawn according to the winning rate specified in. Therefore, the player is given more points so that the first AT lottery is performed according to the winning rate determined to be determined to be a higher number of navigation stocks of 1 or more at a higher rate. It can make you expect.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the point related processing shown in FIG. 19, on the condition that the point granting condition is established and the point is granted, the point granting effect for notifying that the point has been given in S108 is performed. An informing process is performed. In this notification process, based on the processing results of S103 to S106 in FIG. 19, the point grant effect that accurately notifies the grant point set in S102 in FIG. 19 or the grant point set in S102 in FIG. A point giving effect for informing a small number of points is executed. Further, in the point related processing shown in FIG. 19, even when the point granting condition is satisfied and the point is given, if it is decided not to be notified in the notice lottery in S104 or S106 in FIG. Is not executed, and no notification is given that points have been awarded. For this reason, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that more points than the total number of points specified from the executed point giving effect may be actually given.

  As a result, the first AT lottery is performed according to the winning rate determined to be determined to be 1 or more and a larger number of navigation stock at a higher rate, and the point granting effect is controlled by the AT. It is possible to have a greater sense of expectation than the total number of points specified from. In addition, even when the total number of points specified from the point granting effect is relatively small, more points than the total number of points may actually be given, so a higher ratio of 1 or more and more It is possible to maintain a sense of expectation that the first AT lottery will be performed according to the winning rate determined so as to be determined by a large number of navigation stocks and that the AT will be controlled.

  Further, in the point related processing shown in FIG. 19, a point granting effect is performed for the grant points set in S102 of FIG. 19 on the condition that the point granting condition is satisfied and the points are granted. For this reason, the above-mentioned feeling of expectation can be raised step by step every time the point giving effect is executed. In addition, in order for the player to predict the total number of points given, it is possible to add an interest that the player himself accumulates and stores the points specified from the executed point giving effects.

  (1-2) After being controlled by the AT, as shown in FIG. 28 and FIG. 32, the specific effect is executed according to a different ratio depending on the number of remaining navigation stocks. For this reason, the expectation for the large number of remaining navigation stocks can be varied depending on the execution frequency of the specific performance during the AT. As a result, during the AT, the player can pay attention to whether or not the specific effect is executed. In addition, even when the total number of points specified from the point giving effect is relatively small, it can be estimated from the execution frequency of the specified effect whether or not more points than the total number of points are actually given. In addition to maintaining the expectation of being controlled for a long time by the AT, it is possible to provide an interesting game and to improve the interest.

  (1-3) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28, the fact that the 9-role combination navigation effect is executed in the notification mode B or C among the notification modes A to C, It was described as an example. Thereby, during AT, a player can be made to pay attention to which notification mode the navigation effect of 9 sheets is executed. In addition, an interesting game in which the number of remaining navigation stocks is estimated from the frequency at which the navigation effect of 9 sheets is executed in the notification mode B or C can be provided, and the interest can be improved.

  (1-4) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 32, the effect that the background of the ART effect is changed from daytime to evening or night has been described as an example of the specific effect. As a result, during ART, it is possible to make the player pay attention to what kind of background of the ART effect is executed, or whether the background of the ART effect is changed to evening or night when it is daytime, It is possible to provide an interesting game such as guessing the number of remaining navigation stocks, and to improve the interest.

  (2-1) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10A, as the type of freeze, the first freeze, the second freeze, and the freeze before rotation that generate only the freeze before rotation are generated. And a third freeze that generates a post-rotation freeze, and the lottery is performed using the freeze lottery table shown in FIG. 10B. For this reason, when each of the stop switches 8L to 8R is validated by starting the reel rotation after generating the freeze before rotation for a predetermined time after the start switch 7 is operated, and after starting the reel rotation. If the first freeze and the second freeze are generated, it is possible to generate a post-rotation freeze when each of the stop switches 8L to 8R is enabled. As a result, for example, when the third freeze is executed, after the pre-rotation freeze is generated, the timing at which each of the stop switches 8L to 8R is originally enabled (timing 4 to timing in FIG. 15). 5), it is possible to generate an unexpected freeze that the corresponding reel is not stopped even if the stop switches 8L to 8R are operated, and the entertainment of the game can be improved.

  (2-2) As shown by the timing 4a in the column (f) of FIG. 15, a predetermined time shorter than T3 from the timing 4 at which the freeze effect corresponding to the post-rotation freeze is started. It starts when (for example, 1 second) elapses. That is, when the player feels a sense of incongruity that the stop switches 8L to 8R are operated with the start of the reel rotation but the corresponding reel is not stopped, a freeze effect corresponding to the post-rotation freeze is started. The The player can be surprised at the occurrence of the freeze after rotation, and the freeze effect corresponding to the freeze after rotation is executed, so that the stop switches 8L to 8R are misunderstood. It is possible to prevent inconvenience from occurring.

  (2-3) The time during which the pre-rotation freeze is executed by the first freeze and the third freeze in the embodiment described above is set to a common T1. For this reason, the player cannot specify whether it is the first freeze or the third freeze from the time when the freeze before rotation is executed. As a result, a greater surprise can be given to the player that the freeze has occurred after rotation.

  (2-4) The freeze lottery table shown in FIG. 10B is a bonus that is more advantageous to the player when the second freeze or the third freeze occurs than when the first freeze occurs. The winning rate is set to increase the possibility of winning a big bonus. Also, in the AT lottery table at the time of bonus winning shown in FIGS. 25B and 25C, the case where the second freeze or the third freeze occurs is more than the case where the first freeze occurs when the bonus is won. The winning rate is set to increase the possibility of winning a larger number of navigation stocks. For this reason, the player has a sense of expectation that the pre-rotation freeze is executed over T2 longer than T1, and a sense of expectation that the post-rotation freeze will be executed after that when the pre-rotation freeze is executed over T1. It can be held and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, when the post-rotation freeze is executed after the pre-rotation freeze ends at a short T1, the player's sense of expectation can be reduced and then improved again. Can be held in the player, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  (3-1) In the difference number corresponding notification lottery in S104 of the point-related processing, the table shown in FIGS. 22A and 22B is referred to and whether to notify and whether or not to give the given point accurately. Is determined with a probability corresponding to the difference between the total number of notification points specified from the already performed point granting effects and the total number of granted points actually given. Further, in the difference number notification lottery, when the difference number is larger than when the difference number is small, it is determined to notify at a higher rate, and at a higher rate, points awarded or points closer to the given point are given. A notification point is determined so as to notify the user of the fact. As a result, it is possible to prevent the difference number from becoming too large and the reliability of the point specified from the point giving effect from becoming too low.

  (3-2) In the total lot notification lottery in S <b> 106 of the point related processing, the tables shown in FIGS. 23A and 23B are referred to, and whether or not to notify and whether or not to give the given point accurately are determined. It is determined with a probability corresponding to the total number of granted points actually given. Furthermore, in the total number corresponding notification lottery, when the total number of granted points is smaller than when the total number of granted points is large, it is decided to report at a high rate, and at a high rate, the points that are closer to the granted point or the given points The notification point is determined so that the fact that it has been granted is notified. On the other hand, the smaller the total number of granted points, the higher the player's attention to whether or not the points have been notified. Therefore, at a stage where the player's attention level with respect to the point giving effect is high, the player can be given a sense of expectation and a sense of security corresponding to the given points at a high rate.

  (3-3) As shown in FIG. 29 to FIG. 31, when one of the nine winning combinations (1) to (9) is won during RT, a predetermined value is obtained regardless of whether or not it is controlled by the AT. The non-AT navigation lottery is performed in accordance with the ratio, and when it is determined that the navigation effect is to be executed, the navigation effect corresponding to the type of the winning nine-piece combination is performed. For this reason, when it is controlled by RT, it is possible to reduce the missed winning combination of nine sheets regardless of whether or not it is controlled by AT. As a result, the player was not able to control the AT because only a small number of points were given, or because it was controlled by the AT but ended in a short period because the number of navigation stocks decided was small. It is possible to reduce the discomfort that is held, and to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that the interest of the game is extremely lowered when not controlled by the AT.

  (3-4) As shown in FIG. 27, when the notification promotion condition is satisfied, the number of navigation stocks is set so as to be more advantageous to the player than when the notification promotion condition is not satisfied. For this reason, even when only a small number of points are awarded, the player can have a sense of expectation for being controlled by the AT by establishing the notification promotion condition, and improve the interest of the game. be able to.

  Further, the number of stocks set when the notification promotion condition is satisfied is added to the number of stocks set in the AT lottery. For this reason, the player can easily experience the advantage over the establishment of the notification promoting condition, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (4) As shown in FIGS. 22 (a) and 23 (a), even when the point granting condition is satisfied, when it is determined not to be notified by the notice lottery, the point giving effect is not executed. For this reason, even when the point giving effect is not executed, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that points are actually given, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 20, when a melon is won, a point granting condition is established when a predetermined lottery is won. Even when the point granting condition is satisfied and points are awarded, when it is determined not to be notified by the notice lottery, the point giving effect is not executed. On the other hand, when a melon is won, a winning occurs regardless of the operation procedure. For this reason, even if the point granting effect is not executed when winning the melon and the impression is as if it was not won in the predetermined lottery, it is actually won in the predetermined lottery and points are given The player can have a sense of expectation for the game, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  (5) As shown in FIG. 22 (b) and FIG. 23 (b), even when it is determined to be notified by the notification lottery, the fact that fewer points than the actually granted points are granted A point giving effect for informing the user can be executed. For this reason, even when only a small number of points are identified from the point granting effect, the player can have a sense of expectation that more points are actually given, improving the interest of the game Can be made.

  (6) As shown in FIG. 20, the point granting condition can be established in a high-probability state in which the probability state is continued until 30 or 50 games are consumed, or in a bonus that is controlled over a plurality of games. For this reason, the expectation with respect to being controlled to a high probability state can be given. In addition, it is possible to have a greater expectation for being controlled by the bonus. Furthermore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in a state that continues for a plurality of games such as a high probability state and a bonus.

  (7) As shown in FIG. 8 (a), the fall replay that is triggered by winning in the preparation mode or RT and controlling to the normal gaming state, depending on the type of reel to be stopped first, Since the case of winning the falling replay and the case of avoiding the falling replay winning are distributed, it is possible to improve the fun when the reels are stopped.

  Further, since it is not necessary to consider the stop operation timing when avoiding the fall replay winning in the present embodiment, it is possible to reduce the player's burden caused when the reels are stopped.

  (8) In the bonus, the role that triggers the point grant condition is a melon or nine-card role as shown in FIG. 20B, whereas the role that triggers the notification promotion condition is as shown in FIG. And strawberry (1) and strawberry (2). In other words, in the bonus, by winning a plurality of winning combinations such as melon, nine winning combinations, strawberry (1), and strawberry (2), the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 or more and higher at a higher rate. Can give a sense of expectation to the game and improve the fun of the game.

  (9) When the strawberry (1) or strawberry (2) serving as the trigger for establishment of the notification promotion condition is won, special reel control is performed for the middle reel 2C as shown in FIG. 8 (b). For this reason, the notification promoting condition is satisfied when a bonus that can be stopped only when special reel control is performed (symbol stop of symbol number 4 or 5 in the middle stage of the middle reel 2C) is achieved. The player can recognize that he / she has done. Therefore, during the bonus, it is possible to concentrate the player on the stopped appearance, and to add the fun of specifying success or failure of the notification promotion condition from the outcome.

  Further, when the probability state is a high probability state other than during the bonus and when strawberry (1) or strawberry (2) is won, the point granting condition is satisfied as shown in FIG. . Therefore, even when the player is in a high-probability state, the player can be concentrated at the point where he / she is stopped, and the point-scoring condition is established not only from the point-sparing effect but also from the point. The player can recognize that it has been granted.

  (10) As shown in FIG. 27, in the bonus, the strawberry (2) is won more than when the strawberry (1) is won alone and the notification promotion condition is satisfied without winning the strawberry (2). When the notification promoting condition is satisfied, a larger number of navigation stocks is set. Further, as shown in FIG. 8B, on the condition that the strawberry (2) is won, special reel control for stopping the symbol of symbol number 4 on the middle stage of the middle reel 2C can be executed. Therefore, in the bonus, the symbol number 4 is stopped in the middle stage of the middle reel 2C, so that the strawberry (2), which is more advantageous to the player than when the strawberry (1) is selected alone, is won and the notification promotion condition is established. The player can recognize that the game has been performed, and more fun can be added.

  (11-1) In the above-described embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 6A and the like, control is made to the preparation mode after the bonus is over, and in the preparation mode, nine combinations (1) to (9 ) When a special event that can be derived only when the 9-card combination is missed is stopped when one of the above is won, control to RT which is advantageous to the player, and a fall replay is performed in the preparation mode. When winning, it is controlled to the normal gaming state. For this reason, RT can be controlled when the special outcome is stopped before the fall replay wins in the preparation mode after the bonus ends.

  As described with reference to FIG. 8A, the fall replay that triggers the transition to the normal gaming state and the transition to the RT is won by replay + fall replay or win by replay + fall replay + BAR replay. The reel control is performed so that the operation procedure for winning and the operation procedure for avoiding the winning are different.

  Further, when controlled by the AT in the preparation mode, that is, in the AT preparation mode, as described with reference to FIG. 30 and the like, a navigation effect corresponding to the type of replay that is simultaneously won at the time of falling replay is executed.

  As described above, after the bonus is over, the game state in the previous stage of RT is controlled to the preparation mode, and is controlled to RT only when the special event is stopped before winning the fall replay in the preparation mode. In this preparation mode, when controlled by the AT, that is, in the AT preparation mode, even when a fall replay is won, an operation procedure for avoiding the fall replay winning is performed according to the navigation effect. Can do. On the other hand, when the AT is not controlled in the preparation mode, that is, in the non-AT preparation mode, the falling replay winning cannot be intentionally avoided, and the winning rate of the falling replay is higher than the appearance rate of the special roll. Therefore, there is an increased possibility that the player will win the fall replay before the special game is stopped and be controlled in the normal gaming state. Further, as shown in FIGS. 7B and 7C, the number of determination values is set so that the winning rate of the fall replay is higher in the preparation mode than in the RT, and the fall replay winning is set. Thus, there is a higher possibility that the player is controlled to the normal gaming state without being controlled by RT. As a result, it is possible to give the player a clear degree of advantage for the player depending on whether or not the AT is controlled in the preparation mode, which is the previous stage of RT, and the expectation for being controlled in the AT preparation mode is effectively increased. Can increase the interest of the game.

  Similarly, in the RT, when the AT is controlled by the AT in the RT, that is, in the ART, a navigation effect corresponding to the type of replay that is simultaneously won at the fall replay win is executed. For this reason, in ART, even when the fall replay is won, it is possible to operate according to the navigation procedure according to the operation procedure for avoiding the fall replay winning. On the other hand, when the AT is not controlled by the RT, that is, in the non-ART, the fall replay winning cannot be intentionally avoided, and when the fall replay is won, the fall replay is won and the game is controlled to the normal gaming state. The possibility that it will end up increases. As a result, even in RT, it is possible to give a clear degree of advantage to the player depending on whether or not it is controlled by AT, effectively increasing the expectation for being controlled by ART, and improving the interest of the game be able to.

  (11-2) As shown in FIG. 24, the lottery condition for the second AT lottery is established only when the bonus is won in the normal gaming state, whereas it is not controlled by the AT in the preparation mode or RT. This is true not only when the bonus is won but also when the game has been completed a predetermined number of times. Further, in the second AT lottery, the ratio at which the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 or more and the control is determined to be AT, and the ratio at which the number of navigation stocks is determined to be larger are tables that are referred to in the normal gaming state. (Table in FIG. 25 (a)) is referred to when the preparation mode is controlled (table in FIG. 25 (b), (d) at the time of winning a bonus), or controlled by AT in RT. The winning rate is set so that the table that is referred to when it is not (the table at the time of winning the bonus in FIG. 25D) is higher. In other words, when controlled in the preparation mode or in non-ART that is not controlled by AT in RT, AT lottery is performed so as to be more advantageous to the player than in the normal gaming state. For this reason, even in the preparation mode or non-ART, the player can advance the game while expecting to be controlled by the AT, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (11-3) In the non-AT preparation mode and non-ART, as shown in FIG. 24, the lottery condition is satisfied every time 5 games are consumed until 30 games are consumed, and the second AT lottery is performed. That is, in the non-AT preparation mode and non-ART, the lottery condition is established and the second AT lottery is performed every time the game is consumed a predetermined number of times during non-AT. For this reason, in the non-AT preparation mode or non-ART, the player can advance the game while expecting to be controlled by the AT step by step every time the game is consumed a predetermined number of times. Can be improved.

  In addition, as shown in the table at the time of 30G digestion in FIG. 25 (d), in the preparation mode and RT, the game is digested by 30 games without generating a fall replay prize during non-AT, so that the AT is selected in the second AT lottery. It is decided to control, and it is always controlled by AT. For this reason, in the non-AT preparation mode and non-ART, it is possible to add the fun of setting the final goal to digest 30 games without causing a fall replay winning and proceeding with the game, improving the fun of the game Can be made.

  Note that the conditions that must be controlled by the AT depending on the number of non-AT digested games are that the number of games digested during the non-AT reaches a predetermined number of games (30 games), and in the non-AT preparation mode. The number of games that have been digested to reach the predetermined number of games (15 games), the number of games that have been digested during non-ART will reach the predetermined number of games (15 games), The number of games avoiding the winning of the falling replay has reached a predetermined number of games (for example, 3 games), and the number of games won for a specific winning combination during non-AT is determined (for example, 3 games) may be established.

  Also, as shown in the table at the time of digesting 5G to 30G in FIG. 25 (d), the ratio controlled by AT and the ratio determined by a larger number of navigation stocks are increased stepwise according to game digestion. The second AT lottery is performed every time the game is consumed a predetermined number of times during non-AT. This makes it possible to vary the sense of expectation for being controlled by the AT in accordance with the number of games digested during the non-AT. That is, it is possible to increase the expectation for being controlled by the AT in proportion to the number of games that have been digested, and to improve the interest of the game.

  (12) The special event that triggers the transition from the preparation mode to the RT in the above-described embodiment is an operation of dropping the nine-piece combination when winning the nine-piece combination as described with reference to FIG. Reel control is performed so that it is stopped on the winning line only when operated according to the procedure. As a result, in the preparation mode, if a player loses a 9-piece winning combination, a medal to be paid out cannot be obtained due to the occurrence of a 9-piece winning combination. Since it is stopped and controlled to RT which is advantageous for the player, the disadvantage can be compensated.

  Even when nine winning combinations are won in the AT preparation mode, the navigation effect is not executed. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent inconvenience that the stop operation is performed according to the navigation effect and the winning combination of nine pieces can be won, but the RT is not controlled indefinitely.

  On the other hand, when 9 winning combinations are won in ART, a navigation effect is executed. As a result, by performing a stop operation according to the navigation effect, it is possible to obtain medals to be paid out in association with the occurrence of the nine winning combinations. In addition, by setting the outcome that can be stopped when a small role is missed as a trigger for transition from the preparation mode to RT, there is no need to newly set a winning combination that triggers the transition, for example. The design burden in the machine development stage can be reduced.

  (13) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in the bonus winning table in FIG. 25D, when the bonus is won in the non-AT preparation mode or non-ART, in addition to being controlled by the bonus, After the bonus is over, it is controlled to the AT preparation mode, and is controlled to ART unless a stop operation is mistaken based on the navigation effect. For this reason, in the non-AT preparation mode and non-ART, a sense of expectation for winning the bonus can be more strongly held, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the above-described embodiment, as shown in the tables of FIGS. 25B and 25C, in addition to being controlled by the bonus when the bonus is won in the AT preparation mode or ART, After the bonus is over, it is controlled to the AT preparation mode, and is controlled to ART unless a stop operation is mistaken based on the navigation effect. For this reason, since it is controlled by AT continuously with a bonus in between, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the above-described embodiment, when a bonus is won in the preparation mode or RT, regardless of whether the player is an AT or not, it is controlled to the AT preparation mode after the bonus ends, and the stop operation is erroneously performed based on the navigation effect. Although the example controlled by ART has been described as long as there is no limit, this is not limited to this, and even when a bonus is won in the preparation mode or RT, it is always controlled by the AT after the bonus ends only when it is non-AT, The AT may be configured to be controlled by the AT only when winning with a predetermined probability. In this case, the loss incurred during the non-AT can be compensated afterwards by winning the bonus at the non-AT. Also, even when a bonus is won in the preparation mode or RT, it is always controlled to AT after the bonus ends only when it is AT, and when it is non-AT, it is controlled to AT only when winning with a predetermined probability You may comprise so that it may not be carried out. In this case, it is possible to add a premium to winning a bonus at the AT and improve the interest of the game.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. Hereinafter, modifications of the above-described embodiment applicable to the present invention will be described.

  (A) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, the example in which the navigation stock is set when the notification promoting condition is satisfied has been described. However, when the notification promoting condition is satisfied, any process that is advantageous for the player regarding the AT control may be executed. For example, when the notification promotion condition is satisfied, a predetermined number of points (for example, 5 points) may be given, and one or more at a higher rate than when the tables shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 are referred to. In addition, the first AT lottery may be performed with reference to a table in which the winning rate is set so that a larger number of navigation stocks is determined. In FIG. 17 and FIG. Points to be determined (for example, “6” in FIG. 17 or points whose total is “6” or more in relation to the total number of granted points) may be granted. According to such a configuration, even if the total number of points granted when the point granting condition is satisfied is the number of points with a relatively low degree of advantage for the player, the notification promotion condition is satisfied, The player can have a greater sense of expectation than the total number of points actually given for being controlled, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (B) In the above-described embodiment, for the fall replay that triggers the preparation mode or RT, as shown in FIG. 8A, winning is avoided when the stop order is a predetermined stop order. A possible example has been described. In addition, for the 9-piece roles (1) to (9) in which the navigation effect is executed at a predetermined ratio even if it is non-ART, an example can be awarded when the stop operation timing is the predetermined stop operation timing Explained.

  However, the fall replay can avoid winnings on the condition that it is a predetermined stop operation timing according to the type of the winning combination, as in the case of nine winning combinations (1) to (9). May be.

  For example, as a winning combination in which a navigation effect is executed at a predetermined ratio even if it is non-ART, 9 winning combinations (1) (configuration symbol: “Red 7-ANY-ANY”), 9 winning combinations (2) (configuration) Set the symbol: “White 7-ANY-ANY”), 9-piece role (3) (Composition symbol: “BAR-ANY-ANY”), and fall replay as a winning combination that will trigger the preparation mode and RT (1) (Composition pattern: “white strawberry / black strawberry-ANY-red 7), tumble replay (2) (configuration pattern:“ white strawberry / black strawberry-ANY-white 7 ”, tumble replay (3) (configuration pattern : "White strawberry / Black strawberry-ANY-BAR" may be set.

  In this case, with respect to the nine winning combinations (1) to (3), the winning is made on condition that an operation for stopping the left reel 2L is performed at a predetermined stop operation timing according to the type of the winning combination. Can do. For example, when the 9-piece combination (1) is won, the 9-piece combination (1) is placed on the left reel 2L on the condition that “Red 7” is stopped at a timing that allows the drawing to be made on the winning line. You can win a prize.

  In addition, for the fall replays (1) to (3), it is possible to avoid winning a prize on condition that an operation for stopping the right reel 2R is performed at a predetermined stop operation timing according to the type of the winning combination. it can. For example, when the fall replay (1) is won, the right reel 2R receives the red fall 7 on the condition that “red 7” is stopped at a timing that cannot be drawn into the pay line. Can be avoided.

  As a result, even when the left reel 2L is erroneously stopped when the winning of the fall replay is avoided, the right reel 2R is stopped at a predetermined stop operation timing according to the type of the winning combination. By performing the operation, it is possible to avoid winning a fall replay. Further, in the case of winning nine winning combinations, even if the right reel 2R is erroneously stopped, an operation for stopping the left reel 2L at a predetermined stop operation timing corresponding to the type of winning combination is performed. By performing, it is possible to win nine winning combinations.

  In addition, as described above, when the operation procedure for avoiding the fall replay winning and the 9 winning combinations (1) to (9) winning is set to the predetermined stop operation timing according to the type of the winning combination, the falling replay is related. Both the navigation effect and the navigation effect related to the nine-piece role include, for example, red information that recalls “red” corresponding to the “red 7” symbol, and white information that recalls “white” corresponding to the “white 7” symbol. , Using information notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display 51, a predetermined lamp, a predetermined 7-segment display, etc.) that can specify the black information reminiscent of “black” corresponding to the “BAR” symbol. You may comprise so that it may be performed by the common alerting | reporting aspect by alert | reporting any of red information, white information, and black information.

  The red information is, for example, an effect of displaying a red character mainly using red on the liquid crystal display 51, or an effect of lighting a lamp capable of specifying red (for example, lighting a lamp provided corresponding to red) Alternatively, the lighting color may be red). Similarly, white information is an effect of displaying a white character mainly using white color or an effect of lighting a lamp capable of specifying white (for example, lighting a lamp provided corresponding to white or lighting color) The black information is an effect of displaying a black character mainly using black or an effect of lighting a lamp capable of specifying black (for example, provided for black). The lamp may be turned on or the lighting color may be black.

  Specifically, for example, when the falling replay (1) is won, the falling replay (1) is performed on the condition that the red reel 2R is stopped at a timing at which it is not possible to draw “red 7” into the winning line. Since the “Red 7” can be avoided, the black information that reminds of “Black” corresponding to the “BAR” symbol arranged at the timing where the “Red 7” cannot be drawn into the winning line is informed. You may perform a navigation effect by alert | reporting by a means. Similarly, red information reminiscent of “red” corresponding to the “red 7” symbol when winning the fall replay (2), and “white 7” symbol when winning the falling replay (3) The navigation effect may be executed by notifying white information reminiscent of “white” to be performed by the information notification means. In addition, when the nine-piece combination (1) is won, the nine-piece combination (1) is awarded on the condition that the left reel 2L is stopped at a timing at which “red 7” can be drawn into the winning line. Therefore, the navigation effect may be executed by notifying red information reminiscent of “red” corresponding to the “red 7” symbol by the notifying means. Similarly, white information that recalls “white” corresponding to the “white 7” symbol when winning nine (2) roles, and “BAR” symbol when winning nine (3) symbols. The navigation effect may be executed by notifying the black information reminiscent of the corresponding “black” by the information notification means.

  Thereby, it is not necessary to specify whether the information regarding the color notified by the navigation effect is information for avoiding the fall replay or information for winning the nine-piece roles (1) to (9). By stopping the reels 2L to 2R according to the information related to the color notified in a common notification mode by the information notification means, it is possible to avoid the falling replay winning and to win the winning nine-piece combination.

  In addition, as for the 9 winning combinations (1) to (9), as in the case of the fall replay, the winning combination can be won on the condition that the winning combination is in accordance with the type of combination of the winning combinations. May be. For example, when a stop operation is performed in a predetermined stop order corresponding to the combination of winning combinations, the corresponding nine winning combinations can be won, and when a stop operation other than the predetermined stop order is performed Reel control may be performed so that nine winning combinations cannot be won.

  This eliminates the need for so-called pressing in both cases of avoiding the falling replay winning and winning the nine-piece winning combination, thereby reducing the player's burden associated with the stop operation.

  In addition, as described above, when the operation procedure for avoiding the fall replay winning and the 9 winning combinations (1) to (9) winning is set in a predetermined stop order according to the type of the winning combination, the navigation related to the falling replay is performed. Both the effect and the navigation effect relating to the 9-piece combination are, for example, information notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display 51, a predetermined lamp, a predetermined 7-segment display, etc.) for notifying the stop order information that recalls the stop order. ) May be configured to be executed in a common notification mode by notifying the stop order.

  The stop order information corresponds to, for example, an effect of displaying the stop order on the liquid crystal display 51 (for example, a message such as “left” is displayed when the first reel to be stopped is the left reel 2L), and each of the reels 2L to 2R. The effect of lighting the lamp in such a manner that the stop order can be specified (for example, the lamp corresponding to the left reel 2L is lit when the first reel to be stopped is the left reel 2L) may be used.

  Thereby, it is not necessary to specify whether the stop order information notified by the navigation effect is information for avoiding the fall replay or information for winning the 9-piece combination (1) to (9). By stopping the reels 2L to 2R according to the stop order information notified in a common notification mode by the information notification means, it is possible to avoid the falling replay winning and to win the winning nine-piece combination.

  (C) In the total lot notification lottery in the above-described embodiment, an example in which lottery is performed according to the total number of granted points updated in S110 of FIG. 19 has been described. However, the total number corresponding notification lottery may be configured to perform lottery according to the total number of notification points updated in S109 of FIG. In the total number corresponding notification lottery in this case, the tables shown in FIGS. 23A and 23B are referred to, and the notifications that have been notified up to now whether or not to notify and whether or not to grant points accurately are notified. The probability is determined according to the total number of points. Further, in the total number corresponding notification lottery in this case, it is determined to notify at a high rate when the total number of notification points is smaller than when the total number of notification points is large, and at a high rate, depending on the grant points or the grant points The notification point is determined so as to notify that a close point has been given. On the other hand, the smaller the total number of notification points, the higher the degree of attention the player has on whether or not the points have been notified. Therefore, at a stage where the player's attention level with respect to the point giving effect is high, the player can be given a sense of expectation and a sense of security corresponding to the given points at a high rate.

  (D) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which whether or not to execute a navigation effect that can identify the type of a winning nine-sheet combination during non-ART is determined every time the nine-piece combination is won. explained. However, during non-ART, whether or not to execute a navigation effect that can identify the type of the winning 9-sheet combination is determined when the 9-port combination is won in the non-ART when controlled by the non-ART. It may be configured to determine whether or not to execute. In this case, in the non-ART determined to execute the navigation effect, the navigation effect corresponding to the type of the 9 winning combination is always executed when winning the 9 winning combination. Thereby, every time it is controlled to non-ART, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for being controlled to non-ART in which a nine-stage navigation effect is executed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which the gaming state in which the navigation effect is executed at the time of winning the nine winning combinations is RT regardless of whether or not it is controlled by the AT. However, for example, if the special event that triggers the transition to RT is not the event that is derived when the nine-card combination is missed, even in the preparation mode, the navigation is performed when the nine-card combination is selected regardless of whether or not it is controlled by the AT. You may comprise so that an effect may be performed. Thereby, the discomfort with respect to not being controlled by AT can be reduced further.

  (E) In the point-related processing in the above-described embodiment, even if the total number of granted points updated in S110 is an upper limit, if the total number of notification points updated in S109 is not the upper limit, S103 and the subsequent steps You may comprise so that a process may be performed. Thereby, even after the total number of granted points has reached the upper limit, when the total number of notification points has not reached the upper limit, the same control as before the total number of given points has reached the upper limit is performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that the point giving effect is not executed after the total number of given points reaches the upper limit. Note that when the total number of notification points reaches the upper limit, the point-related processing may not be executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing from being performed.

  (F) In the embodiment described above, in the notice lottery in S104 and S106 of FIG. 19, the degree of advantage for the player is lower than the awarded points set in S102, that is, points below the given points are determined as the notice points. An example to be described. However, if the notification points determined in the notification lottery in S104 and S106 of FIG. 19 are determined from points whose total number of notification points is not equal to or greater than the total number of granted points even after notification, S102 The player may be configured such that the degree of advantage for the player is higher than the grant points set in Step 1, that is, the points more than the grant points are determined as notification points.

  FIG. 33 is an example of a table used in the notification lottery, and is a diagram for explaining a table in which more points than the given points can be determined as notification points in the difference number corresponding notification lottery.

  Also in the difference number corresponding notification lottery in this modification, the lot number determination whether or not to notify the point according to the difference number is performed with reference to the difference number correspondence table A of FIG. The difference number correspondence table A in FIG. 33A is the same as the table in FIG.

  When it is decided to notify with reference to the difference number correspondence table A in FIG. 33A, the added points set in S102 with reference to the difference number correspondence table B in FIG. In accordance with the difference number, a lottery for determining the notification points is performed.

  When the granted point is “1” and the difference number is “0 to 1”, the total number of reporting points after reporting the current reporting point at a rate of 100% is given as the reporting point. It is determined that the post-notification difference number is “0”, which is the difference from the total number of granted points to which the given points are added. Specifically, the notification point is (difference number−difference number after notification + giving point). In this case, if the difference number is “1”, the notification point is determined as (1−0 + 1) = point “2”. In this way, more points than the given points are notified.

  When the granted point is “1” and the difference number is “2-3”, the post-notification difference number is determined to be “0” at a rate of 15%, and “1” at a rate of 25%. ”And“ 2 ”at a rate of 60%.

  When the granted point is “1” and the difference number is “4”, the post-notification difference number is determined to be “1” at a rate of 10% and is set to “2” at a rate of 20%. It is determined to be “3” at a rate of 30% and “4” at a rate of 40%.

  Hereinafter, similarly, the post-notification difference number is determined according to the distribution rate specified from the granted point and the difference number, and the notification point is determined by calculating (difference−post-notification difference number + grant point). The

  For example, when the granted point is “3” and the difference number is “3” and “1” is determined as the difference number after notification, (3-1 + 3) = point “5” is determined as the notification point. To be determined.

  As described above, when a lottery is performed using a table in which more points than the granted points can be determined as notification points, for example, even when the difference number becomes too large, the player is more likely than the granted points. By reporting a point with a high degree of advantage as a reporting point, the difference number can be reduced. For this reason, it is possible to easily improve the reliability of the total number of notification points.

  (G) The navigation effects related to the fall replay and the navigation effects related to the nine-piece roles (1) to (9) in the embodiment described above are common by displaying a message for specifying the operation procedure on the liquid crystal display 51. The example performed by the alerting | reporting aspect was demonstrated. However, the configuration for executing the navigation effect is any one that can execute the predetermined effect in a common notification mode, such as a predetermined lamp mounted on the slot machine or a predetermined 7-segment display. There may be.

  (H) In the embodiment described above, the fall replay that is a re-gamer is set as the winning combination that triggers the preparation mode or RT, and the navigation effect is executed at a predetermined rate even in the case of non-ART. The example in which the nine winning combinations (1) to (9) are set as the winning combinations. However, the winning combination that triggers the completion of the preparation mode or RT is not limited to the re-playing combination, but may be a predetermined small combination, a single bonus that controls the next game as a bonus by winning. In addition, the winning combination in which the navigation effect is executed at a predetermined ratio even if it is non-ART is not limited to a small combination, but may be a predetermined re-playing combination, a single bonus, or the like.

  (I) In the first AT lottery in the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, as the total number of normal granted points and the total number of bonus granted points increases, the AT is controlled at a higher rate and the higher rate In this example, the AT lottery is performed so as to be advantageous to the player by determining a larger number of navigation stocks. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The AT lottery may be configured to be advantageous to the player by being controlled by the AT at a high rate and being determined to have a higher number of navigation stocks at a high rate.

  In this case, even when the above-described point grant condition is not satisfied, the point grant effect may be executed as if a point was granted. Moreover, you may comprise so that a point provision effect may be performed as if the point provision conditions were satisfied and more points were provided than the point actually provided. Further, whether or not to execute such a point grant effect may be determined with a different probability depending on at least one of the grant points, the difference number, the total number of grant points, and the total number of notification points. .

  Thereby, even when the point granting effect is executed or when it is notified that a large number of points are given, the player is expected to expect that fewer points or points are not actually given. It is possible to hold the game, and it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation that the first AT lottery will be performed in an advantageous manner for the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  (J) In the first AT lottery in the above-described embodiment, the example in which the AT lottery is performed so as to be more advantageous for the player as the total number of normal granted points or the total number of bonus points is increased has been described. Instead, when the total number of granted points is equal to or less than a predetermined number (for example, “0”), the AT lottery is performed so as to be more advantageous to the player than when the total number of granted points is larger than the predetermined number. It may be configured. Specifically, when the total number of granted points is “0”, the AT lottery is performed at the same winning rate as when the total number of granted points is “5” or “10” which is the upper limit. May be. Thereby, the player can also have a sense of expectation that the total number of granted points is equal to or less than the predetermined number, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (K) It may be a process of clearing (for example, “0”) the number of navigation stock when the bonus is won with the number of navigation stock remaining. May be performed, a process of subtracting a predetermined number may be performed, a process of adding and adding a predetermined number may be performed, and which process is to be performed every time the bonus is won It may be determined and the determined processing is performed. Thereby, the variation when a bonus is won in a state where the number of navigation stocks remains is increased, and the entertainment of the game can be improved.

  (L) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the number of awarded points is not subtracted has been described. You may comprise. In this case, the number of points actually subtracted may be notified as the number of subtracted points, or the number of points larger than the number of points actually subtracted may be notified. As for whether to notify the number of points actually subtracted or the number of points greater than the number of points actually subtracted, at least one of grant points, difference numbers, grant points, report points Accordingly, it may be configured to determine with different probabilities. In the case of such a configuration, it is possible to give a sense of tension to the point being subtracted even after the point is awarded, and to improve the interest of the game.

  (M) In the first AT lottery and the second AT lottery in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the number of navigation stocks corresponding to the expected value for the length controlled by the AT has been described. However, in the 1st AT lottery and the 2nd AT lottery, not only the number of navigation stocks but also the probability (intrusion rate) controlled by the AT and a predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games) are used and the AT is controlled again after the AT is finished You may comprise so that the probability (continuation rate) to do may be determined. In this case, it is determined whether or not the AT is controlled according to the rush rate determined in the AT lottery, and the AT is controlled according to the continuation rate determined in the AT lottery when the predetermined number of games are digested and the AT is completed. It may be configured to determine whether or not.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the AT is continued until a predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games) are consumed when controlled by the AT has been described. You may comprise so that the said AT may be continued until the frequency | count that a navigation effect was performed reaches | attains predetermined number (for example, 10 times etc.).

  (N) An example in which a predetermined number of points are notified 100% when winning a strawberry (1) and a strawberry (2) that satisfy the 100% point grant condition by winning when they are in a high probability state has been described. However, not limited to this, a predetermined number of points are notified by winning and winning, or by appearing a winning that is stopped only when winning the strawberry shown in FIG. 8 (b), If you win but don't win, you may be notified according to the notification lottery.

  (O) In the above-described embodiment, for example, when a winning operation is performed at a timing at which the type of 9 winning combinations can be drawn with respect to when 9 winning combinations (1) to (9) are selected, An example in which a control that increases the player's advantage in terms of generating 9 winning combinations and paying out 9 medals than when stopping at an operation timing that cannot be pulled in, or winning a fall replay When the stop operation is performed in the avoidance procedure for avoiding the falling replay winning according to the type of replay that has been won at the same time, for example, when the stop operation is performed in the avoidance procedure, the RT An example in which control is performed to increase the degree of advantage for the player in that the point is continued has been described. However, the control that increases the degree of advantage for the player may be, for example, the following control.

    (O-1) For example, in the case where different types of small combinations with different medal payout numbers associated with winning can be won simultaneously, operation is performed in a procedure different from a predetermined advantageous procedure according to the types of small combinations that are simultaneously selected It is also possible to perform a control for winning a small role with a small medal payout number when the medals are accepted, and to perform a control for winning a small role with a large medal payout number when an operation is accepted in an advantageous procedure. As a result, in a game in which small types of small medals with different medal payout numbers are simultaneously won, the game value that a player acquires when operated by an advantageous procedure than when operated by a procedure different from the advantageous procedure It can be said that the degree of advantage for the player increases in terms of increase in the number of players.

    (O-2) For example, in the preparation mode, a game state (for example, even if a special outcome is derived) that is disadvantageous to the player when winning one of the nine winning combinations (1) to (9) It is controlled to so-called disadvantage RT, such as a state that is not controlled by RT, a state where the replay winning probability is lower than RT, and a special outcome that can be derived when 9 roles (1) to (9) are missed is derived Then, the game state (for example, RT) that is advantageous to the player is controlled, and when the player is elected to one of the nine-player combinations (1) to (9) in the AT preparation mode, the nine-player combination is selected. In the slot machine that is configured to execute the corresponding navigation effect and executes the navigation effect corresponding to the type in the AT preparation mode at the time of winning the nine role combination, the operation timing at which the type of the selected nine role combination can be drawn stop When operated, the 9-piece combination is won to shift to an unfavorable gaming state, and when the selected 9-type combination is stopped at an operation timing that cannot be drawn, the 9-piece combination is dropped and the 9-medal is paid out. However, it is possible to control the RT so that a special outcome is derived and the player is in an advantageous state. As a result, apart from the degree of advantage in the game in which nine winning combinations are won in the AT preparation mode, the winning nine winning combination is more when the type of the winning nine winning combination is stopped at an operation timing that cannot be drawn. It can be said that the degree of advantage for the player is higher in that it is controlled by RT in the game after the game, compared to when the stop operation is performed at the operation timing at which this type can be drawn.

  In addition, for example, the above-mentioned replay is a small one with a single payout, and a fall replay is a specific small with a medal payout greater than one. In the case where BAR replay is won simultaneously in the same manner as in the above-described embodiment, and a specific small role winning can be avoided by a stop procedure corresponding to the combination of simultaneous winnings, When an operation is accepted in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure corresponding to the winning combination (see FIG. 8 (a)), the winning of a specific small role occurs and the RT ends, and the advantageous procedure corresponding to a predetermined result When the operation is accepted, a winning of one small role may be generated and the RT may be maintained. Thus, apart from the degree of advantage in the game won for a specific small role during RT, the procedure when avoiding the specific small role winning is different from the procedure for avoiding the specific small role winning. It can be said that the degree of advantage for the player is higher in that the RT is maintained without ending in the game after the game than when the game is operated.

    (O-3) For example, in a slot machine in which each of 9 winning combinations (1) to (9) and melon can be won simultaneously, when any of 9 winning combinations and melon are simultaneously won, 9 winning winning combinations When an operation is accepted in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure corresponding to the combination of melon and melon, nine winning combinations are won at a predetermined non-advantage ratio (for example, 1/9), and the operation is accepted in the advantageous procedure Alternatively, control may be performed to win the melon at a predetermined advantageous rate (100%) higher than a predetermined non-advantageous rate. As a result, if any of the 9 winning combinations and melons are won at the same time, 9 medals will be obtained at a higher rate when operated by the advantageous procedure than when operated by a procedure different from the advantageous procedure. In terms of what can be done, it can be said that the degree of advantage for the player increases.

  Also, for example, in a slot machine in which each of the 9 winning combinations (1) to (9) and melon can be won simultaneously, when any of the 9 winning combinations and melon are simultaneously won, When the operation is accepted in a procedure different from the advantageous procedure corresponding to the combination of the above, a 9-piece combination with a predetermined non-advantage amount (9-medal payout) at a predetermined non-advantage rate (for example, 1/9) When a prize is awarded and an operation is accepted by an advantageous procedure, a melon with a predetermined advantageous amount (9-medal payout) is awarded at a predetermined advantageous rate (for example, 100%), and (advantageous rate) ) × (advantageous amount)> (non-advantageous ratio) × (non-advantageous amount). As a result, when any of the 9 winning combinations and melons are won at the same time, the amount of game value that the player earns when operated by an advantageous procedure than when operated by a procedure different from the advantageous procedure It can be said that the degree of advantage for the player is high in that the expected value of becomes high.

  (P) In the embodiment described above, notification conditions (for example, FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, various ratios) with different degrees of advantage for the player are set according to the total number of granted points, and the first AT lottery is performed according to the notification conditions. An example of performing is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the AT is controlled over the length uniquely identified from the total number of granted points (the number of navigation stocks, the period for digesting the predetermined number of games, the period for executing the navigation effect a predetermined number of times, etc.). The first AT lottery may be performed.

  For example, in the first AT lottery, the number of navigation stocks may be set uniquely from the total number of granted points. More specifically, a predetermined number (for example, 1) is set as the number of navigation stock with respect to a predetermined number (for example, 2) for the total number of granted points. (6/2) "may be set.

  Further, as another example in the first AT lottery, the number of games that can be uniquely controlled by the AT may be set from the total number of granted points. More specifically, a predetermined number (for example, 10) is set as the number of games that can be controlled by the AT with respect to a predetermined number (for example, 1). You may comprise so that "60 (6x10)" may be set as the number of games which can be controlled. Even in the case of such a configuration, the same effect as described above is obtained.

Other Modifications (1) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 7B and 7C, the fall per game is more in the preparation mode than in the RT mode. The example in which the number of determination values is set so that the replay winning rate is high has been described. However, the winning rate of fall replay per game may be set to be higher in RT than in preparation mode.

  For example, the number of fall replay judgment values per game in the preparation mode and RT may be set to the number of judgment values shown in FIGS. 34 (b) and 34 (c). FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating each lottery target combination and the number of determination values acquired based on the gaming state and the set value in the modified example. 34 (a), (d), and (e) are the same as the number of determination values shown in FIGS. 7 (a), (d), and (e), respectively, and thus description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 34 (b) is a diagram showing the number of determination values acquired in the internal lottery of each of replay, fall replay, and BAR replay when the gaming state is a preparation mode controlled after the bonus ends. For example, when the set value is 1 to 4, “105” is replay + tumbling replay + BAR replay when the target of the internal lottery is replay, and “8880” is replay + falling replay. Sometimes “8880” is acquired as the number of determination values.

  FIG. 34 (c) shows a case where RT is controlled by stopping the special game when the game state is in the preparation mode, and is acquired in the internal lottery of each of replay, fall replay, and BAR replay. It is a figure which shows the number of judgment values. For example, when the set value is 1 to 4, “15000” is “replay + tumbling replay + BAR replay” when the target character of the internal lottery is replay, and “16450” is replay + tumbling replay. Sometimes “16450” is acquired as the number of determination values.

  Even in the case where the number of determination values is set in this way, the same effect can be obtained in the configuration common to the above-described embodiment. That is, the winning rate of fall replay per game is 5120 / 65536≈8% in the normal gaming state and 17760 / 65536≈in the preparation mode, based on the total number of fall replay judgment values. 27%, 32900 / 65536≈50% when RT, and 10000 / 65536≈15% when inside RT. As a result, the winning rate of the fall replay per game is such that even if the fall replay wins, the game state is maintained and the normal game state is achieved by winning the fall replay than in the case of the internal RT. It is set to be higher in the preparation mode that suffers the disadvantage of being controlled by the system and in the RT mode.

  In addition, the appearance rate of the special appearance per game in the preparation mode is (9000/65536) × (8/9) ≈12% based on the number of judgment values of 9 roles (1) to (9) and the missing rate. It becomes. That is, even in the case where the number of determination values shown in FIG. 34 is set, in the preparation mode, the winning rate of the fall replay is set to be higher than the appearance rate of the special appearance. For this reason, in the preparation mode, it can be said that there is a high possibility of winning the fall replay before the special outcome is stopped. Therefore, for example, in the non-AT preparation mode, it can be said that it is easy to control to the normal gaming state by winning a fall replay.

  In addition, when focusing on the winning rate of falling replay per game, the winning rate of falling replay per game is set to be higher in RT than in the preparation mode. . Thereby, in RT, the possibility of winning a fall replay and winning a prize can be further increased than in the preparation mode. Therefore, for example, in the case of non-ART, it can be said that it is easier to control to the normal gaming state by winning the fall replay than in the non-AT preparation mode.

  Further, even when the reel control related to the fall replay shown in FIG. First, the win rate of the fall replay per game when in the preparation mode is 27%, so that the winning rate of the fall replay is 13.5% in consideration of the reel control shown in FIG. . Therefore, the average number of games in the non-AT preparation mode that can be digested without winning the fall replay is about 7.4 games from the fall rate of the fall replay. As a result, it is possible to prevent the preparation mode from being continuously controlled over a long period of time even though the performance state is not controlled by the AT, and the preparation mode is hardly maintained, and the normal gaming state is controlled. Can be made easier.

  Also, the drop replay winning rate when in the preparation mode is still higher than 12% of the appearance rate of the special event that triggers the RT control. For this reason, in the preparation mode, even if the probability of accidentally dropping the fall replay is taken into account, it can be said that there is a high possibility of winning the fall replay before the special outcome is stopped. For this reason, when in the non-AT preparation mode, the internal winning situation cannot be grasped, and the fall replay is performed before the special outcome is stopped based on the winning rate of the fall fall and the appearance rate of the special outcome. Since the possibility of winning and winning is increased, it can be easily controlled to the normal gaming state and difficult to be controlled by RT.

  On the other hand, when in the AT preparation mode, the internal winning situation can be grasped, and even if the winning rate of the falling replay has a high probability, the falling replay winning can be intentionally avoided. For this reason, when in the AT preparation mode, it is possible to avoid the control to the normal gaming state, and it is possible to control the RT as a result by stopping the special game.

  That is, a preparation mode is provided as a previous game state controlled to RT advantageous for the player, and when the performance state in the preparation mode is not controlled by the AT, it is easy to control from the preparation mode to the normal game state. Thus, it is difficult to control to RT, and when the effect state in the preparation mode is controlled to AT, RT can be surely controlled. For this reason, the difference in the degree of advantage for the player can be increased depending on whether or not the performance state in the preparation mode is controlled by the AT, so that a sense of expectation that the performance state is controlled by the AT can be given. It can be increased effectively and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, since the winning rate of the fall replay per game during the RT is 50%, the winning rate of the fall replay is 25% in consideration of the reel control shown in FIG. Therefore, the average number of non-ART games that can be digested without winning a fall replay is about 4 games based on the win rate of the fall replay. As a result, even if the performance state is not controlled by the AT, even if it is fortunately controlled by the RT, it is possible to prevent the RT from being continuously controlled over a long period of time and to enter the normal gaming state. It can be easily controlled.

  On the other hand, when it is ART, the internal winning situation can be grasped, and even if the winning rate of the falling replay has a high probability, the falling replay winning can be intentionally avoided. For this reason, when it is ART, it can avoid being controlled to a normal game state, and RT can be maintained as a result.

  That is, even if the non-AT preparation mode is fortunately controlled to non-ART, it is difficult to maintain the RT by making it easily controlled to the normal gaming state, and the RT can be reliably continued when it is ART. For this reason, the difference in the degree of advantage for the player can be increased depending on whether or not the performance state in RT is controlled by the AT, so that a sense of expectation for the fact that the performance state is controlled by the AT is effective. Can increase the interest of the game.

  As described above, the slot machine in which the number of judgment values is set so that the winning rate of the fall replay per game is higher in the preparation mode than in the RT may be used. An example has been described in which a slot machine in which the number of determination values is set so as to be higher at RT than at a certain time has been described. However, the combination of the RT and the preparation mode in which the number of determination values is set so as to be higher in the preparation mode than in the RT, and the combination of the RT and the preparation mode. It may be a slot machine having both the combination of the RT and the preparation mode in which the number of determination values is set so as to increase.

  For example, a plurality of types of preparation modes and RTs are provided. For example, after the first type of special gaming state (for example, big bonus) is finished, the first type of preparation mode is controlled. When a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied, the first type of RT is controlled. When a predetermined end condition is satisfied in the preparation mode and RT, the normal gaming state is controlled, while the second type of special gaming state (eg, regular bonus) ends. Later, the game is controlled to the second type of preparation mode. When the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied in the second type of preparation mode, the second type of RT is controlled. When the predetermined end condition is satisfied in the preparation mode and RT, the normal game In the slot machine controlled by the state, the combination of the first type of preparation mode and the first type of RT The number of determination values is set so as to be higher in the preparation mode than in the RT, and the combination of the second type of preparation mode and the second type of RT is more than in the preparation mode. Alternatively, the number of determination values may be set so that the value at RT is higher. Thereby, a player's expectation can be made different with respect to which kind of preparation mode is controlled, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (2) In the embodiment described above, the preparation mode has been described as an example in which the preparation mode is ended by winning a fall replay and controlled to the normal gaming state. However, even if the fall replay is won, the preparation mode is not controlled to the normal gaming state. Alternatively, control may be continued in the preparation mode. That is, the preparation mode may be controlled continuously until the special event is stopped, or a bonus is won or won. In this case, for example, the reel control for stopping the special output is performed only when the stop switches 8L to 8R are operated in a specific operation procedure corresponding to each type of nine winning combinations in the preparation mode. In addition, a configuration is made to perform a navigation effect for notifying information that can specify the type of the nine-piece combination or a specific operation procedure corresponding to the type of the nine-piece combination when winning the nine-piece combination only in the AT preparation mode. May be. Thus, similar to the above-described embodiment, the appearance rate of the special appearance differs depending on whether or not the AT is controlled in the preparation mode. For example, the special appearance is stopped when controlled by the AT. However, when it is not controlled by the AT, it is difficult to stop the special eye and it is difficult to control by the RT. As a result, it is possible to give the player a degree of advantage for the player depending on whether or not the AT is controlled in the preparation mode, effectively increasing the expectation of being controlled in the AT preparation mode, and increasing the interest of the game. Can be improved.

  (3) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the number of navigation stocks is consumed to control the AT while the game is consumed a predetermined number of times has been described. You may make it consume 1 whenever it performs. The number of navigation stocks may be any value as long as it is a value that specifies the period of time controlled by the AT at RT.

  (4) In the above-described embodiment, the same table (see FIG. 25D) is used in the non-AT preparation mode and in the non-ART in the second AT lottery executed by the predetermined number of games. Although the example to be used has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, but a table having a different degree of advantage between the non-AT preparation mode and the non-ART mode, that is, the ratio determined by the probability of winning an AT and a larger number of navigation stocks Alternatively, the second AT lottery may be performed using a table with different numbers. Thus, if the second AT lottery that is more advantageous in the non-AT preparation mode than in the non-ART is performed, the RT in the preparation mode is RT. The loss due to low replay winning probability can be compensated. Further, when the second AT lottery that is more advantageous in the non-ART mode than in the non-AT preparation mode is performed, the degree of advantage during the RT can be increased.

  (5) In the above-described embodiment, in the second AT lottery executed by the predetermined number of times of game digestion, the ratio controlled by AT and the ratio determined by a larger number of navigation stocks are stepwise according to game digestion. The example which becomes high was demonstrated. As a result, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the game will be digested as many times as possible without winning a fall replay during non-AT, and the interest of the game can be improved. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the second AT lottery executed by game digestion a predetermined number of times, the ratio controlled by AT or the ratio determined by a larger number of navigation stocks becomes lower step by step according to game digestion. It may be. As a result, a sense of expectation for winning an AT at the earliest possible stage during non-AT can be given, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (6) In the embodiment described above, the gaming state when the bonus is won is the preparation mode, the RT, the normal gaming state, the performance state is AT, or the probability state is high. Although an example in which the first AT lottery is performed using a table having the same degree of advantage for a player regardless of whether it is in a probability state, the game state when a bonus is won is not limited to this, and the game state is a preparation mode Or RT, normal gaming state, performance state is AT, or probability state is a high probability state, the table has a different degree of advantage for the player You may make it perform 1st AT lottery using. In the embodiment described above, the example in which the second AT lottery is performed using the table having the same degree of advantage for the player regardless of whether or not the player is in the AT when the bonus is won in the preparation mode has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second AT lottery may be performed using a table having a different degree of advantage for the player depending on whether or not the AT is in progress. In addition, an example in which the second AT lottery is performed using a table having a different degree of advantage for the player according to whether or not the bonus is won in RT has been described. Regardless of whether or not there is, the second AT lottery may be performed using a table having the same degree of advantage for the player.

  (7) In the above-described embodiment, the RT may be terminated by digesting a prescribed game (for example, 100 games). Further, the RT may be controlled so that the degree of advantage (replay winning rate, prescribed number of games) varies depending on the type of special event. Thereby, the variation of RT can be made abundant and the interest of a game can be improved.

  (8) In the embodiment described above, an example in which the reel control for stopping the special game on the winning line is performed only when the 9-card combination is missed regardless of the game state is won. did. However, the reel control for stopping the special game at the winning line may be performed only when the 9-card combination is missed when the 9-card combination is won and the game state is the preparation mode. Good. Thereby, in spite of the special game being stopped in the normal gaming state, it is not controlled by RT, so that it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that causes confusion for the player.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the special game is not controlled by the RT even when the special game is stopped in the normal game state has been described. You may comprise so that it may be controlled by RT with low probability. In addition, RT is only performed when a special outcome (for example, red 7-blank (1) -blank (1) among the special outcomes shown in FIG. 5B) is stopped in the normal gaming state. You may comprise so that it may be controlled by. As a result, the player can have a sense of expectation for being directly controlled to RT from the normal gaming state.

  (9) In the embodiment described above, in the AT lottery, the number of special navigation stocks controlled by the AT until the bonus is won may be determined. As a result, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning the special Navistock number. In this case, the number of special navigation stocks may be won with a higher probability in the AT lottery when the bonus is won in the preparation mode than when the bonus is won in the normal gaming state. Further, the number of special navigation stocks may be won with a higher probability in the AT lottery when a bonus is won in the preparation mode than when a bonus is won in RT. Thereby, it is possible to add a premier to winning a bonus in the preparation mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

  (10) In the above-described embodiment, in a game where a special role is won and a small role with a payout number of 3 or more (hereinafter referred to as a normal small role) is won, The combination of symbols corresponding to the normal small combination is preferentially derived, and a small combination (hereinafter referred to as a specific small combination) in which the number of payouts is smaller than 3 is provided when the special combination is won. In a game in which the specific small role is won, reel control is performed in which the symbol combination corresponding to the big bonus or the regular bonus is given priority over the symbol combination corresponding to the specific small role. An example was described. In addition to such reel control, the following reel control may be performed.

  When an equivalent small combination with the same number of medals as the number of bets and a special combination are elected, for example, reel control may be performed to preferentially win an equivalent small combination over a special combination. Thereby, the next game can be started with the medals that are awarded to the equivalent small role and paid out, and the player can be expected to win the normal small role in the game. Further, when the equivalent small combination and the special combination are elected, the reel control may be performed so that the special combination is preferentially won over the equivalent small combination. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the number of games and medals required for winning a special combination.

  Also, the number of medals paid out changes according to the number of winning lines like strawberry, for example, for a special small role that may be less than the number of bets or more than the number of bets, When a special role is elected, the special small role is given priority over the special role when operated in an operating procedure that allows the special small role to be awarded so that the number of payouts is greater than the number of bets. The special role is given priority over the special small role when it is operated according to the operating procedure that allows the special small role to be awarded so that the number of payouts is less than the number of bets. Reel control may be performed so as to win a prize. Thereby, taking into account the operation procedure, it is possible to reduce as much as possible that the display result that is a disadvantageous game result for the player is derived, and the display result that is advantageous to the player is given priority. Can be derived.

  In addition, in a game where a special role is won and a small role is selected, a symbol combination corresponding to the small role is selected rather than the special role regardless of the number of payouts of the selected small role. Reel control that is preferentially derived may be performed.

  Further, the normal small combination and the specific small combination may be simultaneously read out as the lottery target combination to be selected. In this case, for example, when a special small role and a specific small role are elected in a state where the special role winning is carried over, the special role, the normal small role, and the specific small role are selected. At the same time, it will be a winning situation. In this case, reel control is performed so that the normal small role is given priority over the special role and the specified small role, and when the normal small role cannot be won, the special role is given priority over the specific small role. The reel control may be performed so that the reel control is performed to win a specific small combination when the normal small combination and the special combination cannot be won. As a result, even when the normal small combination and the specific small combination are won at the same time, it is possible to reduce the display result that is a disadvantageous game result for the player as much as possible, which is advantageous for the player. A display result as a game result can be preferentially derived.

  (11) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which a chance effect for notifying that it is a chance timing for winning a bonus after notifying the bonus winning has been described. The chance effect may be configured to perform a navigation effect that informs the player of information that is advantageous to the player, such as the type of bonus that has been won and the operation procedure for winning the bonus.

  (12) In the industry where the slot machines in the above-described embodiments are distributed, inspection (type test) by a third party is required at the pre-shipment stage, and the predetermined standard is satisfied in the type test. There is a special situation that only the determined model is allowed to be shipped to the game hall. Further, in recent years, in order to prevent the shooting ability from being increased too much, it is required to be able to perform a test assuming that the slot machine is shipped to the market and actually played by a player. Yes.

  Therefore, in the slot machine in the above-described embodiment, in consideration of such special circumstances and needs, a test is performed assuming that the slot machine is shipped to the market and actually played by the player. “Output means” for outputting “information that can be performed” may be further provided. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 35, the game control board, the effect control board, and the input / output board will be described as an example of “output means”, and the recommended operation procedure information will be referred to as “the slot machine is shipped to the market and the player actually As an example of “information that can be tested on the assumption that a game is played”. FIG. 35 is a block diagram showing an example of a control circuit of a slot machine equipped with a test apparatus 1200 for performing a type test and an input / output board 1100 for inputting / outputting test information used for the test.

  As shown in FIG. 35, the test information output from the slot machine 1 to the test apparatus 1200 includes winning status information for specifying the game start and winning status, and the rotational positions of the reel motors 32L to 32R (for example, Recommendations that are expected to be actually operated by the player in consideration of the rotational position information for specifying the step number of the predetermined position, the area number of the symbol located in the lower stage, etc., the presence or absence of navigation effects, etc. The recommended operation procedure information for specifying the operation procedure is included. Note that the test information output from the slot machine 1 to the test apparatus 1200 includes winning information for specifying that a winning has occurred and the type of the winning, payout information for specifying that a medal has been paid out, and the like. , Other information included.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 35, the test information input from the test apparatus 1200 to the slot machine 1 includes game start information for starting a game, such as bet number setting and reel rotation, and reels. The game end information for ending the game such as stopping the game is included.

  The input / output board 1100 mounted on the slot machine 1 includes a connector 1101 for electrically connecting to the game control board 40, a connector 1102 for electrically connecting to the effect control board 90, and a test apparatus 1200. A connector 1103 for electrical connection is provided. The type test described above is performed by inputting / outputting various types of information in a state where the input / output board 100 and the test apparatus 1200 are connected by a connector. Hereinafter, the flow and operation of various information when the type test is performed will be specifically described.

  First, the test apparatus 1200 outputs game start information in order to start a game in the slot machine 1. The game start information is input to the game control board 40 via the input / output board 1100. Thereby, in the main control part 41 of the game control board 40, the process for starting a game (betting number setting, lottery process, reel rotation process, etc. in the BET process) is performed.

  And the main control part 41 of the game control board 40 produces | generates and outputs winning condition information at the time of a game start. The corresponding selection status information is input to the test apparatus 1200 via the input / output board 1100. As a result, the test apparatus 1200 can specify that the game has started and the winning situation.

  Further, the main control unit 41 of the game control board 40 generates and outputs rotational position information according to the reel rotation. The rotational position information is information for specifying a step existing at a predetermined position among 168 steps of each of the reel motors 32L to 32R, for example, and is input to the test apparatus 1200 via the input / output board 1100. Thereby, in the test apparatus 1200, the current rotation position can be specified for each of the reels 2L to 2R.

  Further, the sub control unit 91 of the effect control board 90 generates and outputs recommended operation procedure information according to the winning situation or the like. The recommended operation procedure information is input to the test apparatus 1200 via the input / output board 1100. Thereby, in the test apparatus 1200, the recommended operation procedure can be specified.

  Based on the current rotation position of the reels 2L to 2R specified from the rotation position information, the test apparatus 1200 provides game end information for stopping each of the reels 2L to 2R in the recommended operation procedure specified from the recommended operation procedure information. Generate and output. The game end information is input to the game control board 40 via the input / output board 1100. Thereby, in the main control part 41 of the game control board 40, each of the reels 2L to 2R is stopped according to the game end information, and a process (reel rotation process, winning determination process, payout process, etc.) for ending the game is performed. Do. Thereby, each of the reels 2L to 2R can be stopped by the recommended operation procedure.

  As described above, information is repeatedly input / output between the slot machine 1 and the test apparatus 1200 via the input / output board 1100, and the game can be automatically repeated. As a result, the type test for the slot machine 1 can be automatically performed.

  As described above, the recommended operation procedure may be information for enabling the test to be performed assuming that the slot machine is shipped to the market and actually played by the player. For example, the recommended operation procedure is an operation procedure for deriving a symbol combination to be actually stopped by the player by a game effect (for example, a chance effect) that informs information related to the winning situation. When the game effect for notifying the information related to is not performed, a predetermined operation procedure (a procedure for minimizing the small part missing, so-called DDT hitting method, KKK hitting method, etc.) may be used.

  Specifically, the recommended operation procedure is a bonus in which a symbol combination to be actually stopped when the chance effect described above is executed, and therefore, an operation procedure for deriving the combination of the bonus. Say. Thereby, in the test apparatus 1200, when the current rotation position of each of the reels 2L to 2R specified from the rotation position information becomes the position of each of the reels 2L to 2R specified from the recommended operation procedure information, the corresponding reel The game end information for stopping the game is output. As a result, each of the reels 2L to 2R can be stopped by the recommended operation procedure, and a bonus winning winning in the slot machine 1 can be generated.

  As a result, in the test apparatus to which the recommended operation procedure information is input, the recommended operation procedure for deriving the symbol combination to be actually stopped by the player by the game effect informing the information related to the winning situation is specified. can do. As a result, the type test can be performed based on the results of operation according to the recommended operating procedure, so the test should be performed assuming that the slot machine is shipped to the market and actually played by the player. Can do.

  In addition, the recommended operation procedure when the game effect that informs the information related to the winning situation is not performed is a predetermined operation procedure (in the case of including a predetermined small role that is missed by the operation procedure) It is also possible to use a procedure for minimizing missing, so-called DDT method, KKK method, etc. For example, it is conceivable that a player who has not recognized whether or not a bonus has been won usually performs a stop operation so that a predetermined small role can be won as much as possible. This is because it is possible to minimize the possibility of losing the selected small part that has been won. That is, the stop operation is performed so that the predetermined small role can be won, so that, for example, when the predetermined small role is won, it is more reliable when the predetermined small role is won. Can win a prize, and if you have not won a given small role and have won another small role (for example, a small role that has not been missed), you can pull in the selected small role, This is because the possibility of being missed can be minimized. Accordingly, for example, compared with an operation procedure in which a predetermined small role cannot be won, the possibility of losing a small role is reduced by performing a stop operation in an operation procedure for winning a predetermined small role. it can.

  Note that the recommended operation procedure when the game effect for notifying the information related to the winning situation is not performed may be an arbitrary operation procedure (so-called father hitting). This is because when the game effect is not performed, it is considered that the player can proceed with the game without pressing in consideration of speeding up the game. The recommended operation procedure information in this case is information that can specify the region numbers 0 to 20 for each of the reels 2L to 2R.

  Thereby, in the test apparatus to which the recommended operation procedure information is input, even when the game effect for notifying the information related to the winning situation is not performed, the symbol combination to be actually stopped by the player The recommended operation procedure for deriving can be identified. As a result, since the type test can be performed based on the result of operation according to the recommended operation procedure, it is not during the so-called AT assuming that the slot machine is shipped to the market and actually played by the player. You can also test for time.

  Note that the recommended operation procedure information that is output when a game effect that informs the information related to the winning situation is not performed is a predetermined operation procedure (a procedure for minimizing a small part missing, so-called DDT batting method, KKK batting For example, the first information for specifying a method and the like and the second information for specifying an arbitrary operation procedure (so-called father hitting) may be output. As a result, the test apparatus 1200 can perform a test when a game effect that informs information related to the winning situation is not performed using the first information or the second information as necessary. It is possible to perform a test when a game effect for notifying information related to the winning situation is not performed in a state closer to the case where the game is played by the player.

  The sub-control unit 91 outputs, for example, a first strobe signal based on the internal winning command and the gaming state command from the main control unit 41, and outputs data for specifying the region number for the left reel 2L, The second strobe signal is output, data for specifying the region number for the middle reel 2C is output, and further, the third strobe signal is output, and the data for specifying the region number for the right reel 2R. To complete the output of the recommended operating procedure information. Thus, recommended operation procedure information is input to the test apparatus 1200 via the input / output board 1100. On the test apparatus 1200 side, the position where each reel should be stopped can be specified from the recommended operation procedure information, and the game end information is output in consideration of the rotation position specified from the rotation position information. Each reel can be stopped by the recommended operation procedure.

  When the recommended operation procedure includes the reel stop order, the sub control unit 91 outputs the first strobe signal based on the internal winning command and the gaming state command from the main control unit 41, for example. Data for specifying an area number for the first reel to be stopped is output, a second strobe signal is output, data for specifying an area number for the second reel to be stopped is output, and 3 is output, and data for specifying the region number for the third reel to be stopped is output, thereby completing the output of the recommended operation procedure information. Thus, recommended operation procedure information is input to the test apparatus 1200 via the input / output board 1100. On the test apparatus 1200 side, in addition to the recommended operation procedure information, the reel stop order can be specified in addition to the position where each reel should be stopped, and the rotational position specified from the rotational position information is taken into consideration. The game end information can be output and each reel can be stopped by the recommended operation procedure.

  Note that after the type test is completed, it is conceivable that an illegal act of inputting illegal information via the connector 1103 described above is performed. In order to avoid this, for example, the connector 1103 may be provided so as to be removable from the input / output board 1100, and the connector 1103 may be configured to be removable at the shipping stage. In the shipping stage, the input / output board 1100 may be shipped without being mounted. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized acts such as inputting unauthorized information.

  (13) In the slot machine in the above-described embodiment, the special combination and the small combination may be won simultaneously. Further, the combination of the special combination and the small combination that are won simultaneously may be as follows. Here, bonus (A) and bonus (B) are illustrated as special roles, and each of bonus (A) and (B) is a predetermined orange (combination of constituent symbols: orange-orange-orange) or plum. In the internal lottery, one of 15 small payouts such as (combination of structural symbols: plum-plum-plum) and one single payout such as 1 (1) or 1 (2) will be selected at the same time. An example will be described in which a big bonus and a small combination that are read out as a combination and are simultaneously read out can be won in duplicate. The combinations that are read out as the lottery target are orange, bonus (A) + orange, orange + 1 (1), bonus (A) + orange + 1 (1), plum, bonus (B) + plum, plum + 1 ( 2) Bonus (B) + Plum + 1 (2) are included. The bonus (A) and bonus (B) may be the following combinations. For example, the bonus (A) may be the big bonus (1) in the above-described embodiment, and the bonus (B) may be the big bonus (2) in the above-described embodiment.

  These bonuses (A), bonuses (B), orange, plum, 1 (1), 1 (2), each symbol (combination of symbols) is composed of 5 frames in each reel 2L, 2C, 2R. In principle, combinations that cannot be awarded unless the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated at an appropriate timing are set.

  Further, the bonus (A), the orange that can be won simultaneously with the bonus (A), and the symbols (combination of symbols) that constitute each of the combinations of the symbols (1) are the maximum drawing range in a predetermined reel. Arranged across frames. As a result, the bonus (A), the orange that can be won simultaneously with the bonus (A), and the combination of each (1) are configured such that there is no stop operation position that can be aimed at the same time.

  Further, a bonus (B), a plum that can be won simultaneously with the bonus (B), and a symbol (a combination of symbols) that constitutes each role (2) are the maximum drawing range in a predetermined reel. Arranged across frames. As a result, the bonus (B), the plum that can be won simultaneously with the bonus (B), and the combination of one (2) are configured such that there is no stop operation position that can be aimed at the same time.

  In addition, the symbols (combination of symbols) constituting the roles of orange, one sheet (1), plum, and one sheet (2) are arranged in excess of four frames that are the maximum drawing range in a predetermined reel. Therefore, there is no stop operation position that can be aimed at the same time.

  The slot machine including such bonus (A), bonus (B), orange, plum, 1 (1), 1 (2) as a winning combination further comprises the following configuration. May be.

  (13-1) In the conventional slot machine, the reel stop control pattern used when winning a specific combination that may be missed is different from the reel stop control pattern used when no combination is won. When a specific role is missed, there is a suggestion that the specific role will be missed by stopping a specific stop mode that does not stop if none of the roles are elected. If the player does not know the specific stop mode that stops when he misses, he cannot know that he has missed the elected special role. It is difficult to determine whether or not the specific role has been missed. Therefore, the following configuration may be adopted.

  Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) are won and at the first stop (stop operation of any reel while all reels are changing) If a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the orange symbol cannot be drawn into the winning line, the control of pulling the plum role symbol into any of the winning lines is performed and the remaining reels In the case where the stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the composition symbol of the orange part can be drawn into the winning line where the composition part of the plum part is stopped in FIG. Control to pull in.

  In addition, Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) will be selected, and the constituent symbols for the Orange will stop on any winning line at the first stop However, at the time of the second stop (when one of the two reels is fluctuating and one of the reels is stopped), the constituent symbol of the orange part is changed to the winning line where the constituent part of the orange part is stopped at the first stop. Even if it was not possible to stop at the winning line where the constituent symbols of the orange role were stopped at the time of the second stop because the stop operation was performed at the stop operation position that could not be withdrawn, When one reel is moving and the last reel is stopped), the orange line will be displayed on the winning line where the orange pattern is stopped at the first stop. If the stop operation at the stop operation position retractable configuration pattern is performed, thereby performing the control to draw a structure pattern orange combination the winning line stop structure symbol orange combination was at the first stop.

  In other words, even if orange is missed at the time of the first stop or the second stop, if the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the remaining symbols can be drawn into the winning line for the remaining reels, Control to align a part of the combination with the winning line is performed.

  Also, when Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum, Plum +1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum +1 (2) are selected and the Plum is lost at the first stop or the second stop Similar control is performed.

  Therefore, even if orange, bonus (A) + orange, orange + 1 (1), bonus (A) + orange + 1 (1) are won, and orange is missed at the first stop or second stop When the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position at which the structure of the orange combination can be drawn into the winning line for the remaining reels, a part of the combination of the orange combination is aligned with the winning line. Even when the orange is missed at the time of 2 stops, it can be easily determined whether or not the orange has been missed depending on whether or not a part of the combination of orange matches the winning line. Also, when Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum, Plum +1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum +1 (2) are selected and the Plum is lost at the first stop or the second stop Has the same effect.

  In this example, Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) are won, and the orange is missed during the first stop and the second stop. In the case of an error, the symbol that is used as an indicator (the structural symbol of the plum role when it is missed during the first stop, the structural symbol of the orange role that was stopped during the first stop when it is missed during the second stop) The stop position is regarded as a stop position where the structural symbol stops, and stop control is performed using a stop control table used when orange is not missed. For this reason, a stop control table for stopping the combination of orange combinations on the winning line, and a stop for stopping a part of the combination of orange combinations on the winning line when orange is missed at the first stop and the second stop. Since there is no need to prepare a separate control table, the stop control table is used even when control is performed to align a part of the combination of oranges with the winning line when orange is missed at the first stop or the second stop. Storage capacity can be reduced. The same applies to a case where a winning combination of plum, bonus (B) + plum, plum + 1 (2), bonus (B) + plum + 1 (2) is won.

  (13-2) In the conventional slot machine, the reel stop control pattern used when the small combination is selected independently and the reel stop control pattern used when the small combination and special combination are simultaneously selected are different from each other. Although the expectation was given to the winning of the special role according to the stopping mode of the small role, the stopping mode at the time of winning the single role of the small role is different from the stopping mode at the time of simultaneous winning of the small role and the special role. There is a problem that it can be determined from the player whether or not the special combination is won according to the mode, and the expectation is lost. Therefore, the following configuration may be adopted.

  Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) are selected at the stop operation position where the combination of oranges can be drawn into the winning line When a stop operation is performed, control is performed to align the combination of orange roles on the winning line.

  Among them, when orange, bonus (A) + orange are won, out of the stop operation positions where the combination of oranges can be drawn into the winning line, the combination of oranges is only applied to the winning lines L1 and L2. When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position that can be aligned and at a stop operation position that can be aligned with any of the winning lines L1 to L6, control for aligning the combination of orange roles to the winning lines L1 and L2 is performed. The combination of the orange combination can be aligned only with the winning lines L3 and L4, and the combination of the orange combination is only performed when the stop operation is performed at a stop operation position that cannot be aligned with the winning lines L1 and L2. , Control to align with L4.

  On the other hand, when orange + 1 (1) and bonus (A) + orange + 1 (1) are selected, the combination of orange combinations can be drawn into the winning line. When the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of the orange combination can be aligned only with the winning lines L3 and L4 and the stop operation position where the combination can be aligned with any of the winning lines L1 to L6, the orange It is possible to align the combination of the winning combination to the winning lines L3 and L4, and it is possible to align the combination of the orange winning combination only to the winning lines L1 and L2, and stop operation at the stop operation position that cannot be aligned to the winning lines L3 and L4. Control is performed so that the combination of the orange combination is aligned with the winning lines L1 and L2 only when the is made.

  That is, when orange and bonus (A) + orange are selected and a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of oranges can be drawn into the winning line, the combination of oranges is selected as the winning line L3, Priority is given to the winning lines L1 and L2 over L4, and orange + 1 (1) and bonus (A) + orange + 1 (1) are selected, and the combination of orange is drawn into the winning line. When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the winning combination can be performed, a control for aligning the combination of orange roles with priority to the winning lines L3 and L4 over the winning lines L1 and L2 is performed.

  Similarly, when the plum, bonus (B) + plum is selected and the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of the plums can be drawn into the winning line, the combination of the plums is selected as the winning line L3, The winning line L1 and L2 are controlled in preference to L4, and Plum + 1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum + 1 (2) are selected, and the combination of plums is drawn into the winning line. When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the winning combination can be performed, control is performed so that the combination of plums is preferentially aligned with the winning lines L3 and L4 over the winning lines L1 and L2.

  With such a configuration, when orange, bonus (A) + orange, plum, bonus (B) + plum are selected, there is a possibility that the combination of orange combination or plum combination will be aligned on the winning lines L1, L2. If orange is +1 (1), bonus (A) + orange +1 (1), plum +1 (2), bonus (B) + plum +1 (2) is won There is a high possibility that a combination of winning combination or plum winning combination is aligned with the winning lines L3 and L4. In other words, when Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum is won, Orange and Plum win, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 ( 1) Plum + 1 piece (2), Bonus (B) + Plum + 1 piece (2), winning line where the combination of orange or plum combination is easy to match when orange and plum wins Is different.

  After the reel control as described above is performed, in the internal lottery, the bonus (A) in the total value of the winning probability of orange, bonus (A) + orange + orange is higher than the ratio of the winning probability of orange + 1. (1) Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) winning probability ratio of orange and bonus (1) A) + Orange, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1). Similarly, Plum +1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum +1 (2) than the ratio of Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum winning probability to the total value of Plum winning probability Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum, Plum +1 (2), Bonus (B) + with the probability that the ratio of the winning probability of bonus (B) + plum + 1 (2) in the total value of winning probability will be higher Plot + 1 (2) lottery.

  As a result, when Orange and 1 sheet (1) are elected at the same time, both Orange and 1 sheet (1) are won at the same time as Bonus (A). The percentage increases, and when the Plum and one (2) are won at the same time, the Plum and one (2) are won at the same time as the bonus (B). Therefore, the winning line of the combination of the orange role or the plum role is the winning line L1, L2 or the winning line L3, L4. Can change expectations.

  Furthermore, even if the winning line with the combination of orange role or plum role is the winning line L1, L2 or the winning line L3, L4, it is suggested that the special role may be won. However, it is impossible to determine whether or not a special role has been won from a winning line with a combination of roles. Regardless of the winning line, a game for a special role being won The expectation of the person will not be lost.

  In this example, Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum is won, and stops at the stop operation position where the combination of Orange or Plum can be drawn into the winning line. When an operation is performed, control is performed so that the combination of orange combination or plum combination is aligned with the winning lines L1 and L2 at a higher rate than the winning lines L3 and L4, and orange + 1 (1), bonus (A) + orange + 1 Sheet (1), Plum + 1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum + 1 (2) are selected and stop at the stop operation position where the combination of orange or plum can be drawn into the winning line When an operation is performed, control is performed to align the combination of orange combination or plum combination with the winning lines L3 and L4 at a higher rate than the winning lines L1 and L2. However, Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum are selected and stop at the stop operation position where the combination of Orange or Plum can be drawn into the winning line. When an operation is performed, when a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of orange combination or plum combination can be drawn into the winning line, the combination of orange combination or plum combination is applied only to the winning lines L1 and L2. Control of aligning, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1), Plum + 1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum + 1 (2) are elected and play the role of Orange Or, when a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where a combination of plums can be drawn into the winning line, a combination of oranges or plums is won. It may perform control to align only in L3, L4.

  In this example, in the internal lottery, the ratio of the winning probability of bonus (A) + orange to the total value of the winning probability of orange, bonus (A) + orange, orange + 1 (1), bonus (A) + Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Orange + 1 (the ratio of the winning probability of Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) in the winning value of Orange + 1 (1) is different) 1) Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) lottery, Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange has been won, at the stop operation position where the combination of orange can be drawn into the winning line When a stop operation is performed, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) are selected, and the combination of oranges can be drawn into the winning line. By controlling so that the winning line to be preferentially aligned is different from when the stop operation is performed at the active stop operation position, the player's winning for the special role is determined by the difference in the winning line with the combination of orange roles The degree of expectation can be changed, but in the internal lottery, the bonus (A) + orange + 1 (in the total value of the winning probability of orange, bonus (A) + orange + 1 (1) ( The ratio of the winning probability of 1) and orange + 1 (1), bonus (A) + orange winning probability ratio of the total value of the bonus (A) + orange winning probability is different from the orange, Lottery of bonus (A) + orange, orange + 1 (1), bonus (A) + orange + 1 (1), orange, bonus (A) + orange + 1 (1) If a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of the orange combination can be drawn into the winning line, and Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange is selected. By controlling so that the winning line that is preferentially aligned differs between when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of the winning combination can be drawn into the winning line, the winning line with the orange combined combination is controlled. Depending on the difference, the player's expectation for winning the special role may be changed. The same applies to the case of plum, bonus (B) + plum, plum + 1 (2), bonus (B) + plum + 1 (2).

  (13-3) In the conventional slot machine, the reel stop control pattern used when winning a specific combination that may be missed is different from the reel stop control pattern used when no combination is won. When a specific combination is missed, if there is no winning combination, there will be a change in the reel stop mode by stopping a specific stop mode that will not stop. There is a problem that there is only one type of specific stop mode that stops when the specific combination is missed by performing the stop operation at the same timing, and the stop mode of the reel becomes monotonous. Therefore, the following configuration may be adopted.

  When the orange and bonus (A) + orange are selected, and the stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of the orange combination cannot be drawn into the winning line, the predetermined chance except for the orange combination or the plum combination is won. Priority is given to the winning lines L1 and L2 over the lines L3 and L4, and orange + 1 (1), bonus (A) + orange + 1 (1) are selected, and the combination of orange roles is won When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position that cannot be drawn into the line, control is performed so that the chance lines are preferentially aligned with the winning lines L3 and L4 over the winning lines L1 and L2.

  Similarly, when Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum is selected and a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of plums cannot be drawn into the winning line, a chance is won from the winning lines L3 and L4. Priority is given to the lines L1 and L2, and a control operation that prevents the combination of plums from being drawn into the winning line is selected as plum + 1 (2), bonus (B) + plum + 1 (2) When the stop operation is performed at the position, the control is performed so that the chance lines are preferentially aligned with the winning lines L3 and L4 over the winning lines L1 and L2.

  As a result, even if Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange is won, or Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1) is won, If a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination can be drawn into the winning line, the combination of the orange combination will be aligned on the winning line, but if orange, bonus (A) + orange are won, In other words, if only orange out of orange (1) is elected alone and the orange is missed, chances are high that the chances are aligned with the winning lines L1, L2, orange + 1 (1), bonus ( A) If + Orange + 1 (1) is elected, that is, if both Orange and 1 (1) are elected at the same time and lose the orange, chances will be entered Likely to align the line L3, L4. Similarly, when Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum is won, or when Plum + 1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum + 1 (2) is won, If a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination can be drawn into the winning line, the combination of plums will be aligned on the winning line, but if Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum is selected, That is, if only one of the plums (1) (2) wins alone and misses the plum, chances are high that the winning lines will be aligned with the winning lines L1, L2, and the plum + 1 (2), bonus ( B) If + Plum + 1 (2) is won, that is, if both Plum and 1 (2) are won at the same time and the Plum is missed, chances can be aligned on the winning lines L3 and L4 High .

  As a result, when Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum is won and Orange and Plum are missed, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 (1 ), Plum +1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum +1 (2) are won and the orange and plums are missed. It is possible to diversify the manner in which the reels are stopped at the time.

  The chances are that Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum was won and Orange and Plum were missed, Orange +1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange +1 (1) Plum + 1 (2), Bonus (B) + Plum + 1 (2) are controlled to be aligned to any of the winning lines on condition that the orange and plum are missed. When a combination or combination of combinations is not won, chances are not matched to any winning line. For this reason, the possibility of winning a special role is surely suggested by having chance chances on any of the winning lines.

  In this example, as described above, the bonus (A) when the orange and one sheet (1) are won at the same time is more than the case where the orange and one sheet (1) are won alone. ) At the same time, the percentage of winning prizes will increase, and a bonus will be awarded when a plum and one piece (2) of the plum and one piece (2) are won at the same time, rather than when the plum is won alone. B) Since the winning percentage will increase at the same time, the game for winning the special role depends on whether the winning line with the chance is the winning line L1, L2 or the winning line L3, L4. Can change the expectation of a person.

  Furthermore, even if the winning line with the chance line is the winning line L1, L2 or the winning line L3, L4, it is suggested that the special role may be won, but the chance line is It is impossible to determine whether or not a special role has been won from the line of winning lines, and the player's expectation that a special role has been won, regardless of the winning line. A feeling is not spoiled.

  In this example, Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum is won and Orange and Plum are lost, Orange + 1 (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 The winning line where the chances are easy to match will be changed when winning (1), plum + 1 (2), bonus (B) + plum + 1 (2) and orange and plum are missed. However, chances 1 and 2 with different display modes are determined, and orange, bonus (A) + orange, plum, bonus (B) + plum is won and orange +1 is lost and orange +1 Sheet (1), Bonus (A) + Orange + 1 sheet (1), Plum + 1 sheet (2), Bonus (B) + Plum + 1 sheet (2) are selected and Orange and Plum are removed. And if spilled, in appearance and easy chance eyes of types may be changed.

  In this example, when Orange, Bonus (A) + Orange, Plum, Bonus (B) + Plum is elected and Orange and Plum are missed, the chance is won at a higher rate than the winning lines L3 and L4. Control to align with lines L1 and L2, and orange + 1 (1), bonus (A) + orange + 1 (1), plum + 1 (2), bonus (B) + plum + 1 (2) When the orange and plum are missed, the control is performed so that the chances are aligned with the winning lines L3 and L4 at a higher rate than the winning lines L1 and L2, but the orange, bonus (A) + orange, plum If the bonus (B) + plum is won and the orange or plum is missed, control is performed to align the chances to only the winning lines L1 and L2. +1 sheet (1), Bonus (A) + Orange +1 sheet (1), Plum +1 sheet (2), Bonus (B) + Plum +1 sheet (2) are elected and Orange and Plum are lost You may make it perform the control which aligns a chance line only to the winning lines L3 and L4.

  In addition, in this example, when orange and one sheet (1) are elected at the same time, it is won at the same time as bonus (A) than when orange and one sheet (1) are elected alone. The ratio of the winning combination is higher when the Plum and one piece (2) are won at the same time than the case where the Plum and one piece (2) are won alone. By increasing the winning percentage, the player's expectation for winning the special role depends on whether the winning line with the chances is the winning line L1, L2 or the winning line L3, L4. For example, when the chances are aligned with any of the winning lines, the process proceeds to RT described later, and when the chances are aligned with the winning lines L1 and L2, the first Move to RT When the game line is aligned with the winning lines L3 and L4, the second RT is different from the first RT in terms of the advantage (RT termination condition, winning probability of the re-gamer, presence / absence notification of the winning combination or notification ratio) It is also possible to adopt a configuration for shifting to RT, and by adopting such a configuration, when orange or plum is missed, the display mode of the reels is not only diversified, but the display mode that the same chance eyes are aligned on the winning line Even so, when orange and plum are elected alone, RT and orange + 1 (1) and plum + 1 (2) that may move when orange and plum are dropped are won In this case, the advantage can be changed between the orange and the RT which may shift when the plum is dropped.

  (14) In the above-described embodiment, it may be configured to be controlled in the preparation mode or RT depending on whether it is a big bonus or a regular bonus. For example, when the big bonus (1) is finished, it is controlled so as to be more advantageous than the preparation mode controlled when the big bonus (2) is finished (for example, the winning rate of falling replay is low). It may be configured. Also, the RT controlled from the preparation mode controlled when the big bonus (1) ends is more advantageous than the RT controlled from the preparation mode controlled when the big bonus (2) ends (for example, It may be configured such that the winning ratio of replay is controlled. In this case, the combination of bonuses that trigger the control to the preparation mode or RT may be composed of different symbols for each of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel. For example, the big bonus (1) may be “red 7-grape-melon”, the big bonus (2) may be “grape-white 7-BAR”, and the regular bonus may be “melon-strawberry-watermelon”. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which bonus is won when a bonus is won. As a result, it can be difficult to understand which type of RT is controlled.

  Further, in such a configuration, the bonus effect may be such that the player cannot specify the type of bonus being controlled by performing the same content regardless of the type of bonus. This makes it difficult for the player to identify the type of bonus from the combination of symbols at the end of the game, and makes it difficult for the player to notice which type of bonus is being controlled. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult to specify the preparation mode and RT type to be controlled after the bonus ends.

  Further, in the case of such a configuration, the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51 is made larger than the area of the see-through window 3 of the variable display device 2 and close to the height of the player's line of sight. You may install in the position which is easier to visually recognize than the window 3. FIG. Then, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51, a virtual reel for scrolling the symbols in accordance with the display state of the variable display device 2 is displayed, and the effect symbols corresponding to the display results of the variable display device 2 are displayed in a variable manner. You may comprise so that it may display on the winning line of the virtual reel to make. Specifically, when a combination of grapes is derived in the variable display device 2, “grape-grape-grape” may be stopped and displayed on the winning line on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51. As a result, the player can proceed with the game by viewing the variable reels 2 by displaying the virtual reels. In such a slot machine, when any of the bonuses that trigger the above-described preparation mode or RT control is won, the winning line on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51 is displayed regardless of the type of bonus that has been won. You may comprise so that common "7-7-7" may be stopped and displayed. This makes it difficult for a player who visually recognizes the liquid crystal display 51 to proceed with the game and to determine which type of bonus has been won. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which kind of preparation mode or RT is controlled.

  In addition, the RT which is advantageous to the player in the above-described embodiment is terminated by using a predetermined number of games or winning a big bonus or a regular bonus (by winning a big bonus or a regular bonus) You may comprise so that it may not complete | finish. As a result, it is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of loss by ending RT because the big bonus or regular bonus has been won before the predetermined number of games is consumed. . In addition, since the bonus winning flag is carried over after the next game until winning, it is possible to win the bonus won during the RT after reaching the predetermined number of games. It is possible to increase the player's expectation for winning the bonus at the end of RT.

  The RT replay winning probability mentioned above is RT that is likely to receive fewer medals, that is, RT that has an expected value of the number of medals per game smaller than the number of medals used for setting the number of bets. It may be set as follows. The expected value of the number of medals acquired per game is, for example, the number of medals acquired when a game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 10,000 times, 100,000 times) in a certain gaming state. The value (theoretical value) divided by the number of times the number of winning is subtracted. In the case of such a configuration, when it is further controlled by the AT and becomes ART, the number of medals to be won per game is awarded by not winning the winning small role according to the navigation effect. The expected value may be made larger than the number of medals used for setting the number of bets, and the number of medals owned by the player may be increased.

  (15) As an RT termination condition in the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which a bonus is won and a fall replay is established. However, the end condition of RT is not limited to this, and may be configured to be satisfied by further digesting the prescribed number of games and winning in a predetermined end lottery. In addition, an example in which the preparation mode end condition is established by bonus winning, falling replay winning, special stoppage, etc. has been described. However, the end condition of the preparation mode is not limited to this, and it may be configured to be further established by winning in a specified number of games and a predetermined end lottery. As a result, the types of timings at which the RT or the preparation mode ends can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (16) In the above embodiment, the slot machine to which medals are applied as a game medium used for setting the number of bets and giving game value associated with winning is described as an example. However, the slot machine embodying the present invention may be a slot machine (so-called parrot) to which a game ball used in a pachinko gaming machine is applied as a game medium. When game balls are used as game media, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls, and when three bets are set in the above embodiment, 15 game balls are used. This is equivalent to setting the number of bets using.

  (17) In the above embodiment, the slot machine for setting the bet number using medals and credits is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the bet number is set using a game ball. Or a fully credit type slot machine that uses only credits to set the number of bets.

  Further, in addition to the medal insertion mechanism such as the flow path switching solenoid 30 and the insertion medal sensor 31, a ball take-in device that takes in game balls, and a take-in ball that detects game balls taken in by the ball take-in device In addition to a medal payout mechanism, such as a hopper motor 34b and a payout sensor 34c, a ball payout device for paying out game balls, a payout ball detection switch for detecting game balls payed out by the ball payout device It is possible to set the number of bets using both medals and game balls and play a game, and the present invention may be applied to a slot machine in which medals and game balls are paid out when a winning occurs.

  (18) In FIG. 17 and FIG. 18 of the above-described embodiment, as a notification condition related to whether or not to start the notification period, (a) on the condition that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 or more An example of the ratio determined to be controlled by the AT in the slot machine to be controlled by is illustrated. However, as notification conditions related to whether or not to start the notification period, (b) Control by the AT on the condition that the number of games digested in the non-AT in the preparation mode or RT has reached a predetermined number of reached games The rate at which the number of games reached until the start of AT control in the slot machine to be played is determined. It may be a ratio that determines the number of times to reach the AT until the control to the AT is started in the slot machine that is controlled in the notification period on the condition that it has been reached.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the case of (a) above, by using a table that determines that AT is controlled at a higher rate as the total number of granted points is larger (the degree of advantage for the player is higher), the player An example of AT lottery so as to be advantageous to the above has been described. However, in the case of (b) above, similarly, a table in which the winning rate is set so that the higher the total number of granted points (the higher the degree of advantage for the player), the smaller the number of reached games is determined at a higher rate. It may be configured to perform an AT lottery so as to be advantageous for the player. Similarly, in the case of (c), a table is used in which the winning rate is set so that the greater the total number of granted points (the higher the degree of advantage for the player), the smaller the number of arrivals is determined at a higher rate. Thus, the AT lottery may be configured to be advantageous to the player.

  In FIG. 17 and FIG. 18 of the above-described embodiment, as the notification condition related to the period controlled in the notification period, (D) the number of games digested in AT reaches the number of finished games according to the number of navigation stocks acquired. The ratio of determining the number of navigation stocks in the slot machine that ends the control to the AT on condition that it has been, that is, the ratio of determining the number of finished games is illustrated. However, as a notification condition related to the period to be controlled in the notification period, (e) a predetermined end lottery is executed in accordance with the end probability determined in advance in the AT, and the control to the AT is performed on the condition that the end lottery is won The ratio at which the end probability is determined in the slot machine that finishes, (f) The slot machine that finishes the control to the AT on condition that the number of times that the navigation effect has been executed by winning the fall replay at the AT has reached the specified number The ratio for determining the prescribed number of times may be used.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the case of (d) above, the larger the total number of granted points (the higher the degree of advantage for the player), the higher the number of navigation stocks, that is, the higher the number of finished games is determined at a higher rate. An example in which the AT lottery is performed so as to be advantageous to the player by using the table to be described has been described. However, in the case of the above (e), similarly, a table in which the winning rate is set so that the higher the total number of granted points (the higher the degree of advantage for the player) is, the higher the lower end probability is determined. Thus, the AT lottery may be configured to be advantageous to the player. Similarly, in the case of (f), a table is used in which the winning rate is set so that the greater the total number of granted points (the higher the degree of advantage for the player), the higher the specified number of times is determined. Thus, the AT lottery may be configured to be advantageous to the player.

  The notification conditions include, for example, a ratio for determining a winning probability in a slot machine that draws whether or not a navigation effect is to be executed at the time of winning a fall replay at (ki) AT, and executes a navigation effect when winning. It may be. Similarly, in the case of (ki) above, by using a table in which the winning rate is set so that the higher the total number of granted points (the higher the degree of advantage for the player), the higher the winning probability is determined at a higher rate. The AT lottery may be configured to be advantageous to the player.

  In addition, the notification condition may be any of the above (A) to (K), or may be selectively combined among the above (A) to (K). Even if the notification condition is any one of the above (A) to (K) or a combination of (A) to (K), the same effect as the above-described embodiment can be obtained.

  (19) As shown in (18) above, at least (a) the number of games digested in the non-AT in the preparation mode or RT as a notification condition related to whether or not to start the notification period has been determined in advance Percentage of determining the number of games reached until the start of AT control in a slot machine controlled by AT on condition that the number of games has been reached, (c) Winning a fall replay won in non-AT in preparation mode or RT In a slot machine that adopts a ratio for determining the number of times to reach control at the AT in the slot machine that is controlled in the notification period on the condition that the number of times of avoidance that has been avoided has reached the determined number of arrivals, etc. In the preparation mode until controlled during the notification period or in non-AT in RT A means for performing a navigation effect that enables identification of the type of replay that has been won at the time of winning, and a control of the replay that has been won at the time of winning the fall replay on condition that it is a period that can be notified outside the period. And a means for executing a navigation effect that makes it possible to specify the type. In this case, as a notification condition related to whether or not to start the notification period, it is further provided that the number of games digested in the non-period notification possible period has reached a predetermined number of out-of-period end games. As a ratio of determining the end-of-period end game in the slot machine that ends the control to the out-of-period notification possible period, (k) a predetermined out-of-period end lottery according to a predetermined out-of-period end probability in the out-of-period notification possible period The ratio of determining the out-of-period end probability in the slot machine that finishes the control to the out-of-period notification possible period on condition that the lottery is won in the out-of-period end lottery. The control for the out-of-period notification period is terminated on condition that the number of times that the replay is won and the navigation effect is executed reaches the prescribed number of times outside the period. Percentage that determines periods outside predetermined number of times in the slot machine, or the like may be used.

  In the case of (c) above, the larger the total number of granted points (the higher the degree of advantage for the player), the more advantageous for the player by using a table that determines a higher number of out-of-period end games. As described above, an AT lottery including a lottery related to an out-of-period notification possible period may be configured. In the case of (K), the larger the total number of granted points (the higher the degree of advantage for the player), the more advantageous it is for the player by using a table for determining a lower out-of-period end probability at a higher rate. In addition, an AT lottery including a lottery related to an out-of-period notification possible period may be configured. In the case of the above (co), the period is set such that the larger the total number of granted points (the higher the degree of advantage for the player) is, the more advantageous the player can be by using a table that determines the higher number of out-of-period prescribed times. You may comprise so that AT lottery including the lottery regarding an outside alerting | reporting period may be carried out.

  In addition, for example, the notification condition is determined by lottery whether or not the navigation effect is executed at the time of winning the fall replay in the (sa) outside notification possible period, and the winning probability is determined in the slot machine that executes the navigation effect when winning. It may be the ratio to do. Similarly, in the case of (sa), the larger the total number of granted points (the higher the degree of advantage for the player), the more advantageous to the player by using a table for determining a higher winning probability at a higher rate. You may comprise so that AT lottery including the lottery regarding the period which can be notified outside a period is included.

  In addition, the notification conditions in the slot machine may be any of the above (a) to (ki) and the above (ku) to (sa), and the above (a) to (ki) and the above (ku). It may be one that is selectively combined among (s). Even if the notification condition is any of the above (a) to (ki) and the above (ku) to (sa) or selectively combined, other than the notification period in the period controlled to the advantageous state Since the notification conditions are set so as to be more advantageous to the player than in the normal state, the player can proceed with the game with expectation and improve the interest of the game. it can.

  (20) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25 (d) and the like, the lottery condition is satisfied every time when a period of 5 games is consumed as a predetermined period when it is non-AT. An example in which the 2AT lottery is performed has been described. However, the predetermined period is not limited to a period in which the game is consumed a predetermined number of times, but is a period until a specific winning combination (for example, melon) is won or won a predetermined number of times, a period until a predetermined number of times for a fall replay, and a predetermined time elapses. It may be a period of time. Thereby, when it is non-AT, a player can be made to pay attention to whether a predetermined period passes, and the interest of a game can be improved.

  (21) In FIG. 25 of the above-described embodiment, as the notification condition related to whether or not to start the notification period, (a) the AT is controlled on condition that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 or more. The ratio of determining to control to AT in the slot machine is illustrated. However, as notification conditions related to whether or not to start the notification period, (b) Control by the AT on the condition that the number of games digested in the non-AT in the preparation mode or RT has reached a predetermined number of reached games The rate at which the number of games reached until the start of AT control in the slot machine to be played is determined. It may be a ratio that determines the number of times to reach the AT until the control to the AT is started in the slot machine that is controlled in the notification period on the condition that it has been reached.

  In the above-described embodiment, in the case of (a) above, in the non-AT preparation mode or non-ART, a table that determines to control AT at a higher rate than in the normal gaming state (FIG. 25 ( The example in which the AT lottery is performed so as to be advantageous to the player by using the table of a) and the table of (d) has been described. However, in the case of (i) above, similarly, in the non-AT preparation mode or non-ART, the winning rate is set so that a smaller number of reached games are determined at a higher rate than in the normal gaming state. By using a table, AT may be selected so as to be advantageous to the player. Similarly, in the case of (c) above, in the non-AT preparation mode or non-ART, the winning rate is set so that the number of times of arrival is determined at a higher rate than in the normal gaming state. By using a table, an AT lottery may be configured to be advantageous to the player.

  In FIG. 25 of the above-described embodiment, as the notification condition related to the period to be controlled in the notification period, (d) that the number of games digested in AT has reached the number of end games corresponding to the number of acquired navigation stocks. As a condition, the ratio of determining the number of navigation stocks in the slot machine that ends the control to the AT, that is, the ratio of determining the number of finished games is illustrated. However, as a notification condition related to the period to be controlled in the notification period, (e) a predetermined end lottery is executed in accordance with the end probability determined in advance in the AT, and the control to the AT is performed on the condition that the end lottery is won The ratio at which the end probability is determined in the slot machine that finishes, (f) The slot machine that finishes the control to the AT on condition that the number of times that the navigation effect has been executed by winning the fall replay at the AT has reached the specified number The ratio for determining the prescribed number of times may be used.

  In the above-described embodiment, in the case of (d) above, in the non-AT preparation mode or non-ART, a larger number of navigation stocks, that is, a larger number of finished games is higher than in the normal gaming state. Example of AT lottery that is advantageous to the player by using the table determined by the ratio (see the table of FIG. 25A and the table of 30G digestion and bonus winning time of FIG. 25D). explained. However, in the case of (e) above, similarly, in the non-AT preparation mode or non-ART, the winning rate is set so that a lower end probability is determined at a higher rate than in the normal gaming state. By using a table, an AT lottery may be configured to be advantageous to the player. Similarly, in the case of (f), in the non-AT preparation mode or non-ART, the winning rate is set so that a higher number of prescribed times is determined at a higher rate than in the normal gaming state. By using a table, an AT lottery may be configured to be advantageous to the player.

  The notification conditions include, for example, a ratio for determining a winning probability in a slot machine that draws whether or not a navigation effect is to be executed at the time of winning a fall replay at (ki) AT, and executes a navigation effect when winning. It may be. Similarly in the case of (ki), in the non-AT preparation mode or non-ART, a table in which the winning rate is set so that a higher winning probability is determined at a higher rate than in the normal gaming state. It may be configured to perform an AT lottery so as to be advantageous for the player.

  In addition, the notification condition may be any of the above (A) to (K), or may be selectively combined among the above (A) to (K). Even if the notification condition is any one of the above (A) to (K) or a combination of (A) to (K), the same effect as the above-described embodiment can be obtained.

  (22) As shown in (21) above, at least (a) the number of games digested in the non-AT in the preparation mode or RT is reached as a notification condition related to whether or not to start the notification period. Percentage of determining the number of games reached until the start of AT control in a slot machine controlled by AT on condition that the number of games has been reached, (c) Winning a fall replay won in non-AT in preparation mode or RT In a slot machine that adopts a ratio for determining the number of times to reach control at the AT in the slot machine that is controlled in the notification period on the condition that the number of times of avoidance that has been avoided has reached the determined number of arrivals, etc. In the preparation mode until controlled during the notification period or in non-AT in RT A means for performing a navigation effect that enables identification of the type of replay that has been won at the time of winning, and a control of the replay that has been won at the time of winning the fall replay on condition that it is a period that can be notified outside the period. And a means for executing a navigation effect that makes it possible to specify the type. In this case, as a notification condition related to whether or not to start the notification period, it is further provided that the number of games digested in the non-period notification possible period has reached a predetermined number of out-of-period end games. As a ratio of determining the end-of-period end game in the slot machine that ends the control to the out-of-period notification possible period, (k) a predetermined out-of-period end lottery according to a predetermined out-of-period end probability in the out-of-period notification possible period The ratio of determining the out-of-period end probability in the slot machine that finishes the control to the out-of-period notification possible period on condition that the lottery is won in the out-of-period end lottery. The control for the out-of-period notification period is terminated on condition that the number of times that the replay is won and the navigation effect is executed reaches the prescribed number of times outside the period. Percentage that determines periods outside predetermined number of times in the slot machine, or the like may be used.

  Also, in the case of (c) above, in the non-AT preparation mode or non-ART, by using a table that determines a higher number of out-of-period end games at a higher rate than in the normal gaming state, You may comprise so that AT lottery including the lottery regarding the period which can be notified outside a period may be advantageous. In the case of the above (K), in the non-AT preparation mode or non-ART, it is advantageous for the player by using a table for determining a lower out-of-period end probability at a higher rate than in the normal gaming state. It may be configured to perform an AT lottery including a lottery related to an out-of-period notification possible period. In the case of (iii) above, in the non-AT preparation mode or non-ART, it is advantageous to the player by using a table that determines a higher number of out-of-period prescribed times at a higher rate than in the normal gaming state. As described above, an AT lottery including a lottery related to an out-of-period notification possible period may be configured.

  In addition, for example, the notification condition is determined by lottery whether or not the navigation effect is executed at the time of winning the fall replay in the (sa) outside notification possible period, and the winning probability is determined in the slot machine that executes the navigation effect when winning. It may be the ratio to do. Similarly, in the case of (sa), in the non-AT preparation mode or non-ART, it is advantageous for the player by using a table for determining a higher winning probability at a higher rate than in the normal gaming state. As such, the AT lottery including the lottery related to the out-of-period notification possible period may be configured.

  In addition, the notification conditions in the slot machine may be any of the above (a) to (ki) and the above (ku) to (sa), and the above (a) to (ki) and the above (ku). It may be one that is selectively combined among (s). Even if the notification condition is any of the above (a) to (ki) and the above (ku) to (sa) or selectively combined, other than the notification period in the period controlled to the advantageous state Since the notification conditions are set so as to be more advantageous to the player than in the normal state, the player can proceed with the game with expectation and improve the interest of the game. it can.

  (23) In the embodiment described above, (i) the number of navigation stocks acquired by the number of games digested in AT as the expected value of the number of games that can be expected to be digested before the notification period ends. The number of navigation stocks is exemplified in the slot machine that finishes the control to the AT on the condition that the number of finished games corresponding to is reached. However, a predetermined AT continuation lottery is executed according to the expected value of the number of games, which is the number of games that can be expected to be consumed before the notification period ends, and (ii) a predetermined continuation probability (AT continuation rate), The continuation probability has been reached in the slot machine that continues to control the AT on the condition that it has been won in the AT continuous lottery, and (iii) the number of times that the navigation effect is executed by winning the fall replay in the AT has reached the specified number of times. The specified number of times (the number of times that a navigation effect can be performed) may be used in the slot machine that terminates the control to the AT under the above condition.

  (24) In the embodiment described above, FIG. 28 shows a specific effect executed based on a different ratio according to the expected value of the number of games, which is the number of games that can be expected to be consumed by the end of the notification period. Of the notification modes A to C shown, the nine-game navigation effect in the notification mode B or C, the effect that the background of the ART effect shown in FIG. 32 is changed from noon to evening or night, and the like are illustrated. However, the specific effect is not limited to this, and may be any effect as long as the effect is executed in a manner that allows the player to distinguish from other effects. For example, a plurality of types of modes including a specific mode are provided as modes of point granting effects, and according to the expected value of the number of games, which is the number of games that can be expected to be digested by the end of the notification period when reporting points. When the aspect of the point giving effect is determined so that the specific aspect is determined as the aspect of the point giving effect based on the different ratios, it can be said that the point giving effect in the specific aspect corresponds to the specific effect. Even in this case, the player can be focused on the aspect of the point provision effect, and the expected value of the number of games can be estimated from the frequency at which the point provision effect is executed in the specific aspect.

  (25) The example in which the freeze before rotation in the above-described embodiment is generated for a time corresponding to the type of freeze after being counted for a predetermined time or more by one game timer in S30 of FIG. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the wait by one game timer and the freeze from occurring at the same time.

  Note that the pre-rotation freeze may be generated over a period of time corresponding to the type of freeze after the operation of the start switch 7 is effectively accepted. For example, even when NO is determined in S30 of FIG. 11, the same processing as S31 to S33 may be performed to subtract the pre-rotation freeze counter. As a result, when a freeze occurs after the start switch 7 is operated, it is possible to make it unclear whether it is a freeze before rotation or a freeze by one game timer, and an opportunity to give the player a sense of expectation Can be increased.

  (26) In the above-described embodiment, as an example of the post-rotation freeze, an example in which the timing at which each of the stop switches 8L to 8R is activated is delayed is shown. However, the freeze after rotation only needs to delay the timing at which the stop switch is activated after the reel rotation is started. For example, a predetermined stop operation (for example, a first stop operation, a second stop operation, etc.) When the operation is performed, the stop switch corresponding to the reel that is still rotating may be disabled for the time corresponding to the type of freeze and then re-enabled.

  Further, as the freeze after rotation, a plurality of types may be provided so that the timing at which the freeze occurs is different. For example, as the third freeze, a freeze before rotation is generated, a freeze after rotation is generated after the reel rotation is started, a freeze 3b is generated after the first stop operation, and a second stop is generated. A third c freeze that generates a post-rotation freeze after the operation may be provided. In this case, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the freeze and whether the type of the freeze is to be first, second, 3a, 3b, or 3c by freeze lottery. May be. Thereby, since the timing at which the freeze occurs after rotation becomes random, the player can be made even more surprising.

  (27) In the embodiment described above, as an example of increasing the degree of advantage for the player at a higher rate when the second freeze or the third freeze occurs than when the first freeze occurs, As shown in FIG. 10B, the number of medals to be paid out increases directly by increasing the possibility of winning a big bonus controlled by a bonus longer than the regular bonus, and FIG. As shown in (b) and (c), the number of medals to be paid out indirectly increases by increasing the possibility of acquiring a larger number of navigation stocks as the number of navigation stocks that influence the period controlled by the AT. An example was described. However, as a technique for increasing the degree of advantage for the player, only FIG. 10B may be adopted so that the number of medals to be paid out increases only directly, or FIG. Only b) and (c) may be adopted so that the number of medals to be paid out increases only indirectly.

  (28) It should be noted that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  1 slot machine, 2L, 2C, 2R reel, 8L, 8C, 8R stop switch, 40 game control board, 41 main control unit, 41a main CPU, 41b ROM, 41c RAM, 42 random number generation circuit, 43 sampling circuit, 51 liquid crystal Display, 90 stage control board, 91 sub control unit, 91a sub CPU, 91b ROM, 91c RAM, 92 display control circuit, 141 VDP, 142 CGROM, 155 temporary storage memory, 156 frame buffer memory.

Claims (1)

A variable display unit capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each capable of being identified,
After displaying the variable display unit in a variable manner, the display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and in a slot machine capable of generating a prize according to the display result,
A pre-determining means for deciding whether or not to allow a prize to be generated;
Delay control means for performing delay control for delaying the progress of the game over a delay period;
A privilege grant determining means for making a decision regarding grant of a privilege,
When it is determined by the predetermining means that the occurrence of a specific winning is permitted, the determination by the privilege grant determining means is performed, and when the delay control is performed by the delay control means, the delay control is performed. A slot machine in which the degree of advantage of the determination by the privilege grant determination means is higher for the player than when there was not.

Images